(Not for use in Japan) No.

CP-SP-1448E

Single Loop Controller

Model C1M

User’s Manual
for Installation and Configuration

Thank you for purchasing your Azbil

Corporation product.
This manual contains information for
ensuring the safe and correct use of
the product.
Those designing or maintaining
equipment that uses this product
should first read and understand
this manual. This manual contains
information not only for installation,
but also for maintenance,
troubleshooting, etc. Be sure to keep it
nearby for handy reference.
 Getting Up to Speed with model C1M
The quick reference guide on pages D-1 to D-8 summarizes key operations, parameters, and
settings, and gives concrete operation examples using illustrations.
Try looking at these pages first, and then read the main text for details.
A separate color version of the quick guide printed on dirt-resistant paper is available for
convenient use on the work site (document No. CP-SP-1450E).
Contact the azbil Group or a distributor for details.

NOTICE

Please make sure that this manual is available to the user of the product.
Unauthorized duplication of this user’s manual in part or in whole is
forbidden. The information and specifications in this manual are subject to
change without notice.
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is complete
and accurate, but if you should find an omission or error, please contact us.
In no event is Azbil Corporation liable to anyone for any indirect, special, or
consequential damages as a result of using this product.

© 2022-2023 Azbil Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Modbus™ is a trademark and the property of Schneider Electric SE, its subsidiaries
and affiliated companies.
Safety Requirements

To reduce the risk of an electric shock resulting in personal injury, follow all
safety notices in this document.

This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard.

Use of this product in a manner not specified by the manufacturer will impair its built-in safety features.

Do not replace any component except as specified by the manufacturer.

All wiring work must comply with local regulations and be carried out by authorized and experienced personnel.

Make sure to provide a cutoff switch for the power to this device within reach of the operator.

When wiring the power for AC power models, install a time-lag (T) fuse (rated current 0.5 A, rated voltage 250 V).
(IEC 60127)

z Device Ratings
Voltage: 100 to 240 V AC (operating voltage: 85 to 264 V AC)
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 8 VA max.

z Operating Environment
Do not operate this device in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors. Operation in such
environments is a safety hazard.
Operating temperature: −10 to +55 °C
Operating humidity: 10 to 85 % RH (without condensation)
Vibration: 0 to 5 m/s2 (10 to 60 Hz)
Overvoltage category: II (IEC 60364-4-443, IEC 60664-1)
Pollution degree: 2
Installation location: indoors
Elevation: 2000 m max.

z Device Installation
This product should be installed in a panel to protect the operator from accidental contact with the
rear terminals.

Common mode voltage of all I/O except for supply power and relay contact outputs: voltage to
ground of 30 Vrms max., 42.4 V peak max., and 60 V DC max.

z Standards compliance
EN 61010-1, EN 61326-1 (for use in industrial locations)

During EMC testing, the reading or output may fluctuate by ±10 % FS (for MFB: ±30 % FS).

i
Conventions Used in This Manual
„ The safety precautions explained below aim to prevent injury to you and others, and to prevent property damage.

Warnings are indicated when mishandling this product may

WARNING result in death or serious injury.

Cautions are indicated when mishandling this product may

CAUTION result in minor injury or property damage only.

„ In describing the product, this manual uses the icons and conventions listed below.

Indicates that caution is required in handling.

The indicated action is prohibited.

Be sure to follow the indicated instructions.

Handling Precautions:
Information to be aware of when handling.

Note: Indicates information that may be useful.

: Indicates an item or page to which the user may refer.

(1), (2), (3): Steps in a sequence or parts of a figure, etc.

[PARA], [MODE], etc. Indicates keys on this device.

>> : Indicates the result of an operation, or the status after the operation.

ii
z Numeric value and character display on LCD
Numeric values: The 7-segment LCD expresses numeric values as follows:
0 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

Alphabetical characters: The 7-segment LCD expresses alphabetical characters shown below. There
are some alphabetical characters which are not displayed on the LED.
A B C D E

a b c d e

F G H I J

f g h i j

K L M N O

k l m n o

P Q R S T

p q r s t

U V Y Z －

u v y z

Handling Precautions:
• As shown above, the following are shown in the same way: the number 2
and the letter Z, the number 5 and the letter S, and the number 9 and the
letter Q.

iii
Safety Precautions

WARNING
To prevent electrical shock, this device must be installed in a location that is only accessible
to people with appropriate knowledge about electrical safety. Install this device inside a
control panel that cannot be opened without the use of a key or tool.
Do not use this device in an environment with conductive contamination, or with dry
non-conductive contamination which can become conductive due to condensation, etc.
Otherwise, problems such as tracking phenomena may damage parts, resulting in fire.
Be sure to use the fuse described in the specifications for the power wiring of this device.
Otherwise, tracking phenomena or parts failure due to other factors may cause fire.

Be sure to check that the device has been correctly wired before turning on the power.
Incorrect wiring of this device may cause device failure and also lead to a dangerous accident.

Before removing, mounting, or wiring this device, be sure to turn off the power to this device
and all connected devices. After wiring this device, attach the separately sold terminal cover
(model No. 84515888-001). Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock.
Do not touch live parts such as the power terminals. There is a danger of electric shock.

Do not disassemble this device. There is a danger of electric shock or device failure.

CAUTION
Use this device within the operating ranges given in the specifications (for temperature,
humidity, voltage, vibration, shock, mounting direction, atmosphere, etc.). Otherwise, there
is a danger of fire or device failure.
Do not block the ventilation holes. There is a danger of fire or device failure.

Wire this device correctly in compliance with applicable standards, and use the power source
and installation methods specified in this user’s manual. Otherwise, there is a danger of fire,
electric shock, or device failure.
Do not allow wire clippings, metal shavings, water, etc., to enter the case of this device. There
is a danger of fire or device failure.

Firmly tighten the terminal screws to the torque listed in the specifications. Insufficient
tightening may result in fire or electric shock.

Do not use unused terminals as relay terminals. There is a danger of fire, electric shock, or
device failure.

Use the relays within the recommended service life. Otherwise, there is a danger of fire or
device failure.

Use an appropriate overcurrent protection device (fuse, circuit breaker, etc.) with a sufficient
breaking capacity for lines to which the relays of this device are connected to protect the
circuits. Otherwise, there is a danger of fire or device failure.

iv
 CAUTION
If there is a risk of a power surge caused by lightning, use a surge absorber (surge protector).
Otherwise, there is a danger of fire or device failure.

Do not operate the keys with a sharp object (such as a mechanical pencil tip, etc.). Doing so
can cause device failure.

To remove dirt from this device, wipe it with a soft dry cloth.
Never use an organic solvent such as paint thinner or benzene, or a detergent.
Do not use this device in wet places or with wet hands.
There is a danger of electric shock.
Do not use the current transformer input for measurement in a place that falls into
measurement category II, III, or IV. There is a danger of fire, electric shock, or device failure.

Before Using This Device

There is a film over the console on the front of this device to protect the surface.

After the installation and wiring work is completed, stick a piece of tape on the corner of the console and pull it in
the direction indicated by the arrow below to remove the protective film.

Handling Precautions:
• Removing the protective film with your fingernail may cause scratches on the
console.

Tape

Pull

v
The Role of This Manual
There are five different manuals related to model C1M Single Loop Controller (hereafter “this device”).
Read them as necessary for your specific requirements.
If you do not have a manual you require, please contact us or one of our dealers.
Alternatively, you can download the necessary manuals from http://www.azbil.com.

Single Loop Controller Model C1M User’s Manual for Installation and Configuration
 Document No. CP-SP-1448E
This manual.
This manual describes the hardware and all functions of this device. Personnel in charge
of the design, manufacture, operation, or maintenance of equipment that incorporates
this device, or those in charge of communication software for equipment that uses this
device’s communication functions, should read this manual thoroughly.
This manual also describes the installation, wiring, connections for communication,
functions and settings of this device, operating procedures, communication with a master
station (PC, etc.), communication addresses, troubleshooting, and detailed specifications.

Single Loop Controller Model C1M User’s Manual

 Document No. CP-UM-5964JEC
This manual is supplied with the product. It has descriptions in Japanese,
English, and Chinese. Personnel in charge of the design or manufacture of
equipment that incorporates this device should read this manual thoroughly.
This manual covers safety precautions, installation, wiring, main specifications,
and parameters of this device. For further information about operation, refer to
the user’s manual for installation and configuration.

Quick Reference Guide for Model C1M

 Document No. CP-SP-1450E
For those using this device for the first time or for operators on the work site, this
guide serves as a reference when specifying parameters.
Key operations, menu flowcharts and parameter settings are described with
color illustrations.

Smart Loader Package Model SLP-C1F Installation Manual

 Document No. CP-UM-5986JEC
This manual is supplied with the product. It has descriptions in Japanese, English,
and Chinese. Personnel in charge of the design or manufacture of equipment that
incorporates this device should read this manual thoroughly. This manual covers
safety precautions, installation, wiring, main specifications, and parameters of
this device. For further information about operation, refer to the user’s manual on
detailed functions.

User’s Manual for Detailed Functions of Smart Loader Package Model SLP-
C1F for Single Loop Controller Model C1A/C1M
 Document No. CP-SP-1463E
This manual is supplied with Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F.
This manual describes the software used on a PC to configure model C1M.
Those designing or setting up equipment that uses model C1M should read this
manual. The manual describes installation of the software into a PC, operation of
the PC, various functions, and setup procedures.

vi
Organization of This User’s Manual
This manual is organized as shown below.
Quick Reference Guide
Parameters, settings, and concrete operation examples with illustrations.
For quick understanding of this device, read this section first.
Chapter 1. Overview
This product’s applications, features, model selection, and part names and their
functions. The terms introduced in this chapter are used in the subsequent
descriptions, so make sure to understand them.
Chapter 2. Outline of Functions
Overview of functions and operations.
Chapter 3. Installation
Operating environment, installation procedures, necessary tools.
Chapter 4. Wiring
Wiring procedures and precautions, and connection examples.
Chapter 5. Functions
Detailed description of functions.
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings
Displayed items and settings.
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function
Communication with a host device (PC, PLC, etc.) using Azbil’s standard CPL
communication and RS-485.
Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function
Communication with a host device (PC, PLC, etc.) using Modbus communication
and RS-485.
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function
Communication with a PLC using RS-485 without the need for special programs.
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data
A list of communication data in the memory of this device.
Chapter 11. Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Maintenance, inspection, and troubleshooting.
Chapter 12. Calibration and Inspection
Calibration to maintain accuracy for safe operation.
Chapter 13. Disposal
Disposal of this device when it is no longer used.
Chapter 14. Specifications
General specifications, performance specifications, and optional parts.

vii
Contents
Safety Requirements
Conventions Used in This Manual
Safety Precautions
Before Using This Device
The Role of This Manual
Organization of This User’s Manual

Quick Reference Guide for Model C1M  D-1

Flowchart of Key Operations and Displays  D-2

Operation Examples  D-4
Parameters  D-6

Chapter 1. Overview  1-1

1-1 Overview  1-1

„ Model Selection Table  1-2
„ Accessories  1-3
„ Optional parts  1-3
1-2 Names and Functions of Parts  1-4
„ Model C1M and its console  1-4
„ Terminals  1-5

Chapter 2. Outline of Functions  2-1

2-1 Input/Output Configuration  2-1

2-2 Key Operation  2-2
„ Standard mode  2-2
„ Special mode  2-4
„ How to set data  2-6
„ Using the [MODE] key  2-7
„ User level  2-8
2-3 Operation Modes  2-9

Chapter 3. Installation  3-1

„ Installation location  3-2

„ Mounting precautions  3-2
„ External dimensions  3-3
„ Panel cutout dimensions  3-3
„ Mounting method  3-4

Chapter 4. Wiring  4-1

4-1 Wiring  4-1

„ Symbols used in the terminal wiring label  4-2
„ Wiring precautions  4-2
„ Connecting open collector outputs to digital inputs  4-5

viii
 „ RS-485 communication connections  4-6
„ Connecting solid state relays (SSR)  4-8
„ Connecting a current output device  4-11
„ Noise suppression measures  4-11
4-2 Cables  4-12

Chapter 5. Functions  5-1

5-1 PV Input  5-1

„ PV input range type  5-2
„ Temperature unit  5-5
„ Reference junction compensation (cold junction compensation)  5-6
„ PV square root extraction dropout  5-6
„ PV decimal point position  5-7
„ PV range low/high limit  5-8
„ PV ratio and PV bias  5-8
„ PV low limit alarm threshold  5-9
„ PV filter  5-9
„ PV hold  5-9
„ PV limiting and PV low/high limit alarm  5-10
5-2 Mode  5-11
„ AUTO/MANUAL mode  5-11
„ RUN/READY mode  5-11
„ AT (automatic tuning) stop/start  5-12
„ AT error  5-12
„ Release all DO (digital output) latches  5-13
„ User-defined bit 1  5-13
5-3 Control  5-14
„ ON/OFF control  5-14
„ PID control, Ra-PID control, heating/cooling control  5-15
„ Control method  5-16
„ Control action and heating/cooling control  5-16
„ Special control output  5-17
„ Operation when switched to MANUAL mode  5-17
„ Initial output type (mode) of PID control  5-18
„ Initial output of PID control  5-19
„ Integral time and derivative time decimal point position  5-19
„ ON/OFF control  5-20
„ PID control  5-21
„ Heating/cooling control  5-22
„ AT (automatic tuning)  5-24
„ Ra-PID  5-26
„ SP lag  5-27
5-4 AT (Automatic Tuning) Function  5-28
„ How to start AT  5-28
„ How to stop AT  5-28
5-5 SP  5-32
„ Specifying the SP using operation settings  5-33
„ Number of LSP groups  5-33
„ LSP1 to 8  5-33
„ LSP group No.  5-34

ix
 „ Specifying LSP group selection by DI assignment  5-34
„ SP ramp unit  5-35
„ SP up ramp / down ramp  5-36
„ SP low/high limit  5-37
„ Enabling/disabling SP ramp by DI assignment  5-37
5-6 Step operation  5-38
„ Number of LSP groups  5-38
„ SP ramp type  5-39
„ SP ramp unit  5-40
„ STEP time unit  5-41
„ STEP PV start  5-42
„ STEP loop  5-43
„ Step operation: LSP, PID group No., ramp, soak time  5-44
„ Internal contacts: operation type  5-46
5-7 Digital Input (DI) / Internal Contacts  5-47
„ Operation type  5-48
„ Internal event No. assignment  5-50
„ Input bit functions  5-51
„ Input assignment  5-52
„ Input assignment polarity  5-53
„ Function result polarity  5-53
„ DI assignment by Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F  5-54
5-8 Internal Events  5-55
„ Operation  5-56
„ Operation type  5-62
„ Direct/reverse, standby, and READY mode operation  5-63
„ Alarm OR, special OFF, delay time unit  5-64
„ Main setting, sub-setting,hysteresis  5-65
„ ON delay time, OFF delay time  5-66
5-9 Digital Output (DO)  5-68
„ MV1/MV2 processing  5-69
„ Operation type  5-71
„ Output assignment  5-72
„ Output assignment polarity  5-73
„ Function result polarity  5-74
„ Latch  5-74
„ DO assignment by Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F  5-75
5 - 10 Application Examples  5-76
„ Applications using the assignment function  5-76
5 - 11 Continuous output  5-85
„ Output range  5-85
„ Output type  5-86
„ Output scaling low/high limit  5-87
„ MV scaling width  5-88
5 - 12 Current Transformer (CT) Input  5-89
„ CT operation type  5-90
„ CT output  5-90
„ CT measurement wait time  5-90
„ Number of CT turns / number of CT power wire passes  5-91
5 - 13 Display on the Console and Key Operation  5-93
„ Key operation mode  5-93
„ [MODE] key function  5-93

x
 „ Mode display setup  5-94
„ PV/SP display setup  5-95
„ MV display setup  5-96
„ Event display setup  5-97
„ Event remaining time display setup  5-97
„ CT input current display setup  5-98
„ User level  5-98
„ Status indicator  5-98
„ User-defined function  5-99
„ Key lock, communication lock, loader lock  5-103
„ Password  5-104

Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings  6-1

6-1 Operation Settings  6-1

„ Operation settings  6-1
6-2 Parameter Settings  6-3
„ Mode bank  6-3
„ SP bank  6-4
„ Event bank  6-6
„ PID bank  6-8
„ Parameter bank  6-16
„ Extended tuning bank  6-18
6-3 Setup Bank, etc., Settings  6-19
„ Setup bank  6-19
„ Event configuration bank  6-25
„ DI assignment bank  6-28
„ DO assignment bank  6-34
„ User function bank  6-38
„ Lock bank  6-39
„ Instrument information bank  6-40

Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function  7-1

7-1 Overview of Communications  7-1

„ Features  7-1
„ Configuration  7-1
„ Communication procedure  7-2
„ Message structure  7-3
„ Data link layer  7-3
7-2 Message Structure  7-3
„ Application layer  7-6
7-3 Description of Commands  7-7
„ Continuous data read command (RS command)  7-7
„ Continuous data write command (WS command)  7-8
„ Fixed-length continuous data read command (RD command)  7-9
„ Fixed-length continuous data write command (WD command)  7-10
„ Fixed-length random data read command (RU command)  7-11
„ Fixed-length random data write command (WU command)  7-12
„ RAM and EEPROM areas of data addresses  7-13

xi
 „ Write data range  7-13
„ Write conditions  7-13
7-4 Definition of Word Addresses  7-13
7-5 Numerical Representation in the Application Layer  7-14
„ RS and WS commands  7-14
„ RD, WD, RU, and WU commands  7-14
7-6 List of Termination Codes  7-15
7-7 Reception and Transmission Timing  7-17
„ Time specifications for instruction and response messages  7-17
„ RS-485 driver control timing specifications  7-17
7-8 Precautions for Creating Communication Programs for the Master Station  7-18
„ Communication program example  7-18

Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function  8-1

8-1 Overview of Communications  8-1

„ Features  8-1
„ Configuration  8-1
„ Communication procedure  8-2
„ Message Structure  8-3
8-2 Message Structure  8-3
„ Command types  8-7
„ Number of data records  8-7
„ Other specifications  8-8
8-3 Description of Commands  8-9
„ Read command (03H)  8-9
„ Write command (10H)  8-11
„ One data record write command (06H)  8-13
8-4 Specifications Common with CPL Communication Function  8-14
„ Definition of word addresses  8-14
„ Numerical representation  8-14
„ Specifications of RS-485 driver control timing  8-14

Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function  9-1

9-1 Overview  9-1

„ Supported PLC protocol  9-1
„ Supported PLCs (typical models)  9-1
„ Specifications  9-2
„ Precautions for the PLC link communication function  9-2
9-2 Data Transmission  9-3
„ Usable devices  9-6
„ Completion notification data  9-11
9-3 PLC Link Setup  9-12
„ Common settings  9-12
„ Transfer settings  9-13
„ Transfer setting examples  9-14
9-4 List of PLC Link Settings  9-19
„ Common settings  9-19
„ Transfer settings  9-20

xii
 „ Data settings  9-20

Chapter 10. List of Communication Data  10-1

„ List of communication data  10-1

Chapter 11. Maintenance and Troubleshooting  11-1

„ Maintenance  11-1
„ Alarm codes and countermeasures  11-2
„ Operation when a PV input error occurs  11-4
„ If an error occurs in communication with model SLP-C1F  11-5

Chapter 12. Calibration and Inspection  12-1

„ Starting calibration and inspection  12-1

„ Ending calibration and inspection  12-2
„ Precautions for calibration  12-2
„ Measuring instruments required for calibration  12-2
„ Calibration and checking procedure  12-3

Chapter 13. Disposal  13-1

Chapter 14. Specifications  14-1

„ Specifications  14-1

Appendix  App.-1

„ ROM version history  App.-1

„ Description of used symbols, terms, and abbreviations  App.-2

Index  Index-1

xiii
 Quick Reference Guide for Model C1M
This guide offers a summary of key operations, parameter flowcharts, and settings, for convenient reference at the
operation site This guide is made for repeated use. Dirt wipes off easily and even notes written with an oil-based felt-tip
pen can be removed with an eraser.
If more detailed information on model C1M is needed, refer to the user's manual for installation and configuration (CP-SP-1448E).
The most convenient way to configure the C1M is with the Smart Loader Package (model No. SLP-C1FJA_). Please
contact the azbil Group or a distributor for more information.

(14)

(1)

(13)

(5) (9) (10) (11) (12)

(2) (6)

(3) (7) (8)

(4)

(1) Upper display Shows PV (present temperature, etc.) or items that can be set.
(2) [MODE] key Pressing this button shows the operation display. If it is held down for 1 second or longer,
the preset operation (initial setting: AUTO/MANUAL selection) can be executed.
(3) [PARA] key Switches the display.
(4) [ ], [ ], and [ ] keys Used for incrementing/decrementing numeric values and performing arithmetic shift
operations.
(5) MAN mode indicator Lights up in MANUAL mode.
(6) RDY mode indicator Lights up in READY (control stop) mode.
(7) Event indicator Lights up when the corresponding event output is ON.
(8) Control output indicator Lights up when the corresponding control output is ON.
(9) Status indicator Lights up according to the setting of the status indicator. (Default: Not used)
(10) AT indicator Flashes during AT execution.
(11) Slope display unit Shows the operation status during a step operation.
(12) Lower display Shows SP (set temperature, etc.) and other settings.
(13) Loader connector Connected to the PC using the USB loader cable included with the Smart Loader Package.
(14) Protective film Protects the surface. Please remove the protective film before use.

D-1
Flowchart of Key Operations and Displays
When the power
LSP
is turned ON

400 LSP1 ST.0 OUT HEAT COOL

PV group Step MV MV for MV for
No. No. heating cooling

200 SP 200 SP 0.00 Step 65.3 MV 65.3 MV 65.3 MV

remaining
(2) time (1)
Timer
remaining

UF-8 UF-7 UF-2 UF-1 T3.--

*1
time 3

Power-on all on  [PARA] key *3

all off  sequential on . . . . . .
8888 . . . 8888 8888 . . .
8888 0.0 Internal
and off  operation event 3
display (sequence delay time
takes about 9 s) 2-second press of [PARA] key

MODE SP Event PID Parameter Extended tuning

(A)

(If AUTO) (If MANUAL)

SP-1 E1 P-1 CTRL AT.TY
A--M A--M
AUTO MAN
PID.1 E1.sb I-1 AT.OL SP.LG
When When RMP.1 E1.HY D-1 AT.OH AT-P
changed from changed from
MANUAL to AUTO AUTO to MANUAL TIM.1 E1.On RE-1 DIFF AT-i
 (2)  (1)
E1.Of OL-1 OFFs AT-d
SP-8 OH-1 FL At.Pt
r--r PID.8 E5 P-1C RA At.Pv
AT RMP.8 E5.sb I-1C BI CTR.A
AT.ER TIM.8 E5.HY D-1C CYU CLg
dolt E5.On OL.1C CY [PARA] key

UDB.1 E5.Of OH.1C tPO 2-second

press of
[PARA]
CYU2 To (A)
key
[PARA] key *3
P-8 CY2
I-8 tPo2
D-8 TP.TY
RE-8 SPU
OL-8 SPD
OH-8
P-8C
I-8C
D-8C
OL.8C
OH.8C

D-2
  Some items are not displayed depending on the availability of optional functions, model number, display setup (C73 to C78) and user level (C79).
 Pressing the [PARA] key while changing the setting of an item will cancel the change, and the next item will be displayed.

Operation display
Internal Internal Timer

400 CT1 CT2 E1 E1.sb T1.--

PV CT1 CT2 event 1 event 1 remaining
main setting sub-setting time 1

AT 0 AT 30.0 Current 30.0 Current 300 Setting 0 Setting 0.0 Internal

event 1
progress delay time

Internal event 3 Internal event 3 Timer Internal event 2 Internal event 2

E3.sb E3 T2.-- E2.sb E2

sub-setting main setting remaining time 2 sub-setting main setting

0 Setting 0 Setting 0.0 Internal event 2 0 Setting 0 Setting

delay time

To (2)
2-second press of [PARA] key
Display of settings
*2 Setup Event configuration DI assignment DO assignment User function Lock Instrument information

(B)

C 01 C 30 C 71 E1.C1 DI1.1 Ot1.1 UF-1 LOC id01

C 02 C 31 C 72 E1.C2 UF-2 C.LOc id02
Key operation & display

C 03 C 32 C 73 E1.C3 DI1.9 Ot1.8 UF-3 L.LOc id03

C 04 C 33 C 74 DI2.1 Ot2.1 UF-4 PASS id04
C 05 C 75 E5.C1 UF-5 PS1A id05
Analog input

C 06 C 39 C 76 E5.C2 DI2.9 Ot2.8 UF-6 PS2A id06

C 07 C 40 C 77 E5.C3 DI3.1 Ev1.1 UF-7 PS1B id07
C 08 C 41 C 78 UF-8 PS2B id08
C 09 C 79 DI3.9 Ev1.8 id09
C 42 DI4.1 Ev2.1 id10
C 43 C 80
C 14
Control action

C 44 C 90 id11
C 15 C 91 DI4.9 Ev2.8 FP01
C 16 C 45 DI5.1 Ev3.1
C 17 C 46 C 92
C 47 C 93 FP16.8
C 18 C 97 DI5.9 Ev3.8 [PARA] key
C 19 C 48 To (B)

C 20 C 49 C 98
C 21 C 50
C 22 C 51
C 23 C 64
C 26 C 65
C 28 C 66 *1 The parameters and numerical values registered as user functions UF are displayed.

C 67 *2 If no key is pressed for 3 minutes, the display automatically returns to (2), the PV display.
*3 I f the [ ] key is pressed while holding down the [PARA] key, various displays/settings

C 68 can be navigated in reverse order.

C 69  Explanation of arrows  Item selection in setup menus

C 70 [PARA] key:
2-second press of [PARA] key:
[PARA] key (move to next item)
[PARA] + [ ] (to previous item)

D-3
 Operation Examples Red letters : Initial setup procedure
Blue letters : Procedure during operation

Setup of PV input range type Execution of auto tuning (AT)

AT forces ON/OFF of the MV a number of times (a limit cycle) to calculate
1 Press [MODE]
once to show the
2 Hold down [PARA]
for 2 s or longer. The
PID values. Check that this operation does not create any problems for the
associated equipment before executing AT.
operation display. screen for specifying
25 0
If the sensor has not been
A--M AUTO
parameters is shown
with a--M on the
1 Press [MODE]
once to show the
2 Hold down [PARA]
for 2 s or longer. The
wired or is disconnected,
upper display. operation display. screen for specifying
an alarm for abnormal PV
input (any one from AL01
to AL11) may appear on
In ON/OFF control, r--r
is on the upper display.
25 0
A--MAUTO
parameters is shown
with a--M on the
the upper display. upper display.

3 Hold down [PARA] 4 Press [ ], [ ], or

for 2 s or longer [ ]. The rightmost 3 Press [PARA] twice. 4 Press [ ] or [ ].
again. digit on the lower AT is shown on the at.Of flashes.
C 01 1
The setup screen
showing the setting
C 01 0001
display flashes and
its value can be AT
upper display and
AT.OF on the lower AT The display flashes only
in RUN and AUTO modes,
for C01 (PV input changed. At.OF display. At.OF and only if there is no PV
range type) is Select the range If the control method is
input error.
displayed. of the sensor (see Also, if “AT stop/start” is
ON/OFF control and if bit
set as the DI assignment,
the PV input range 3 (AT stop/start display)
the display does not flash
table) by pressing [ of C73 (mode display
and the setting cannot
setup) is “0” (disabled),
], [ ], or [ ]. be changed using the
the parameter and
keys.
Do not press any setting are not displayed.
key for 2 s. The new
value stops flashing
and is now set.
5 Press [ ] once. 6 Do not press any
at.On flashes on the key for 2 s. at.ON
lower display. stops flashing and
Setup of event operation type AT At.ON
AT AtON
AT begins.
During AT, the AT
In this example, the operation type of event 1 is set to “deviation high limit.”
indicator flashes
1 Press [MODE]
once to show the
2 Hold down [PARA]
for 2 s or longer. The
and repeatedly.
When AT and the
operation display. screen for specifying calculation of PID
25 0
A--M AUTO
parameters is shown
with a--M on the
constants are done,
the indicator turns
upper display. off.
During the AT process, if the mode is changed to READY or MANUAL, if PV
3 Hold down [PARA]
for 2 s or longer
4 Press [PARA] several
times. e1.c1 is shown
input is faulty, or if a power failure occurs, AT stops automatically without
changing the PID constants. AT can also be stopped by changing the
again. on the upper display setting from At.ON to At.OF (return to step 3 above).
C 01 1
The setup screen
showing the setting
E1.C1 0
and 0 on the lower
display. Setup of the SP
for C01 (PV input
range type) is
0 on the lower display
means that no event is 1 Press [MODE]
once to show the
2 Check that the
operation display
displayed. set.
operation display. shows the SP.
5 Press [ ] or [
flashes.
]. The rightmost digit on the lower display 25 0
25 0
(If not, press [PARA]
several times until it
is displayed).
E1.C1 Press [ ] or [ ] until 4 is displayed. Do not press any key
for 2 s. The new value stops flashing and is now set.
0004
4 on the lower display means that the event operation type is “deviation 3 Press [ ], [ ], or
[ ]. The rightmost
4 Do not press any
key for 2 s. The new
high limit.”
digit on the lower value stops flashing
Use e2.C1 to set the operation type for event 2, and e3.C1 for event 3. 25
0120
display flashes and
its value can be
25
120
and is now set.

changed. Change If [MODE] is pressed while

the setting is flashing, the
to the desired SP by status returns to that of
pressing [ ], [ ], step 1.
or [ ].
Flashing means the
setting has not been
finalized.

If the SP limit function

is enabled, a value
exceeding the limit
cannot be set. If you need
to change the value,
change the SP limit first.

D-4
For highlighted steps (e.g., 4 ), the following precaution applies:
• If keys are locked, the setting does not flash and cannot be changed. To change the setting, cancel the key lock first.

RUN/READY mode selection Setup of event value

1 Press [MODE]
once to show the
2 Hold down [PARA]
for 2 s or longer. The
1 Press [MODE]
once to show the
2 Hold down [PARA]
for 2 s or longer. The
operation display. screen for specifying operation display. screen for specifying
25 0
A--M AUTO
parameters is shown
with a--M on the
25 0
A--M AUTO
parameters is shown
with a--M on the
upper display. upper display.

In ON/OFF control, r--r

is on the upper display.
3 Press [PARA] several
times. e1 is shown
4 Press [ ], [ ], or
[ ]. The rightmost
3 Press [PARA] once. 4 Press [ ] or [ ]. on the upper display digit on the lower
r--r is shown on
the upper display
The lower display
flashes. E1 and 0 on the lower E1 display flashes and

r--r r--r 0 display. 0020 its value can be

and rdy or run is changed.
shown on the lower If “RUN/READY 0 on the lower display
rdy rdy selection” is set as the Change to the
display. means that the event
DI assignment, the main setting is “0.” desired event
display does not flash setting by pressing
The current mode is
and the mode cannot be
indicated by run (RUN) or [ ], [ ], or [ ].
changed using the keys.
rdy (READY).
Flashing means the
setting has not been
5 Press [ ] or [ ] to
select run or rdy.
6 Do not press any
key for 2 s. The new
finalized.
value stops flashing 5
r--r r--r
Do not press any key for 2 s. The new value stops flashing
and the mode is and is now set.
run run now set.
E1 20
If [MODE] is pressed while the setting is flashing, the status returns to that of
step 1.

Setup of PID values

Use e2 to specify the setting for event 2, and e3 for event 3.
1 Press [MODE] 2 Hold down [PARA]
once to show the for 2 s or longer. The 6 To proceed to
hysteresis setup,
7 Press [ ], [ ], or
[ ]. The rightmost
operation display. screen for specifying
25 0
A--M AUTO
parameters is shown
with a--M on the E1.hy
press [ ] twice or
press [ ] several E1.hy
digit on the lower
display flashes and
upper display. 5 times. e1.hy is shown 3 its value can be
on the upper display changed.
and 5 on the lower Change to the
3 Press [PARA]
several times. p-1
4 Press [ ], [ ], or
[ ]. The rightmost
display. desired hysteresis
setting by pressing
(proportional band) digit on the lower 5 on the lower display

P-1 5.0
is shown on the
upper display and
P-1 0100
display flashes and
its value can be
means that the hysteresis
setting is “5.”
[ ], [ ], or [ ].
Do not press any
the present setting changed. key for 2 s. The new
is shown on the value stops flashing
Change to the
lower display. and is now set.
desired P value by
pressing [ ], [ ], Use e2.hy to specify the hysteresis setting for event 2, and e3.hy for event 3.
If the control method
is ON/OFF control, the or [ ].
parameter and setting Flashing means the Memo
are not displayed.
setting has not been
finalized.

The setting range of the

proportional band is
from 0.1 to 999.9 %.

5 Do not press any key for 2 s. The new value stops flashing
and is now set.

P-1 10.0
If [MODE] is pressed while the setting is flashing, the status returns to that of
step 1.

Use i-1 for specifying the integral time (0–9999 s) and d-1 for the
derivative time (0–9999 s).

D-5
 Parameters
: Essential parameters for PV measurement and control
: Basic parameters
: Required when using optional functions

Operation settings Setup bank, etc., settings

Display
Left: upper display
Item Contents Initial
value
Setting
StUP Setup bank
Right: lower display
Display Item Contents Initial Setting
Value (PV) Value (SP) SP (target value) SP low limit to SP high limit 0 value
LSP1 *1 LSP LSP No. (the last digit) 1 to LSP system group (max. 8) 1
PV input range type For details, refer to the PV Input Range Table Depends
C 01
ST.1- *1 Step Step No., step remaining time Not applicable - on the
remaining Step No. indicates whether the process is ramp-up, ramp-down, model
time or soak.
C 02 Temperature unit 0: Centigrade (°C) 0
OUT Value MV (Manipulated Variable) -10.0 to +110.0 % - 1: Fahrenheit (°F)
Setting is enabled in MANUAL mode (value flashiing)
C 03  Reference junction compensation (Cold 0: Performed (internal) 0

Analog input
HEAt Value Heat MV (Manipulated Variable) Not applicable. - junction compensation) 1: Not performed (external)
COOL Value Cool MV (Manipulated Variable) -10.0 to +110.0 % - C 04 Decimal point position 0: No decimal point 0
Value (PV) At1 *1 AT progress display (the last digit) Not applicable. - 1 to 3: 1 to 3 digits below decimal point
Ct1 Value CT current value 1 Not applicable. - C 05 PV range low limit When the PV input type is DC voltage/DC current, 0
Ct2 Value CT current value 2 Not applicable. - C 06 PV range high limit -1999 to +9999 U 1000
E1 Value Internal Event 1 main setting -1999 to +9999 U or 0 to 9999 U 0 C 07  SP low limit PV input range low limit to PV input range high limit -
E1.Sb Value Internal Event 1 sub-setting 0 C 08  SP high limit -
t1-- *1 Value Timer remaining time 1 Not applicable. - C 09  PV square root extraction dropout 0.0 to 100.0 % (PV square root extraction is not performed 0.0
Upper display: ON delay / OFF delay distinction is displayed. when set at 0.0.)
E2 Value Internal Event 2 main setting Same as Internal Event 1 main setting 0 C 14 Control action (Direct/Reverse) 0: Heat control (Reverse action) 0
E2.Sb Value Internal Event 2 sub-setting Same as Internal Event 1 sub-setting 0 1: Cool control (Direct action)
t2-- *1 Value Timer remaining time 2 Same as Timer remaining time 1 - C 15  Output operation at PV alarm 0: Control calculation is continued. 0
E3 Value Internal Event 3 main setting Same as Internal Event 1 main setting 0 1: Output at PV alarm is output.
E3.Sb Value Internal Event 3 sub-setting Same as Internal Event 1 sub-setting 0 C 16  Output at PV alarm -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0
t3-- *1 Value Timer remaining time 3 Same as Timer remaining time 1 - C 17  Output at READY (Heat) -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0
C 18  Output at READY (Cool) -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0
*1 Display example

Control action
C 19  Output operation at changing AUTO/ 0: Bumpless transfer 1: Preset 0
MANUAL

Parameter settings C 20  Preset MANUAL value -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 or 50.0

C 21  Initial output type (mode) of PID control 0: Auto 1: Not initialized 2: Initialized 0
MOdE Mode bank C 22  Initial output of PID control -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 or 50.0

Display Item Contents Initial value Setting C 23  Integral time and derivative time decimal 0: XXXX (No decimal point) 1: XXX.X 0
A--M AUTO/MANUAL AUTO: AUTO mode MAN: MANUAL mode AUTO point position 2: XX.XX 3: X.XXX
r--r RUN/READY RUN: RUN mode RDY: READY mode RUN C 26 Heat/Cool control 0: Not used 1: Individual PID 2: Common PID 0
At AT execution/stop instructions At.OF: AT stop At.ON: AT execution AT stop C 28 Heat/Cool control dead zone -100.0 to +100.0 % 0.0
At.Er Auto tuning error Er.OF: Normal Er.On: Abnormal Normal C 30 LSP system group 1 to 4 1
dO.Lt Release all DO latchs Lt.ON: Latch continue Lt.OF: Latch release Latch continue C 31 SP ramp type 0: Standard 1: Multi-ramp 0
Udb.1 User-defined bit db.Of: OFF db.On: ON OFF 2: Step operation: When the power is turned ON again, the
step operation is stopped (READY)

SP SP bank 3: Step operation: When the power is turned ON again, the

step operation is reset
C 32  SP ramp unit 0: 0.1 U/s 1: 0.1 U/min 2: 0.1 U/h 1
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting
C 33 STEP time unit 0: 0.1 s 1: 1 s 2: 1 min 2
SP-1 ~ SP-8 SP (for LSP1 to 8) SP low limit to SP high limit 0
C 34 STEP PV start 0: None 1: Up start 2: Down start 0
PId.1 ~ PId.8 PID group number (for LSP1 to 8) 1 to 8 1 SP
C 35 STEP loop 0: Stop 1: Loop 2: Final step continued 0
rMP.1 ~ rMp.8 Ramp (for LSP1 to 8) 0 to 9999 0
C 36 CT1 operation type 0: Heater burnout detection 0
tIM.1 ~ tIM.8 Soak time (for LSP1 to 8) 0.0 to 999.9 or 0 to 9999 0
1: Current value measurement
C 37 CT1 output 0 to 1: Control output 1 to 2 0
Ev Event bank 2 to 4: Event output 1 to 3
C 38 CT1 measurement wait time 30 to 300 ms 30
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting
C 39 CT2 operation type Same as CT1 0
E1 ~ E5 Internal Event 1 to 5 main setting -1999 to +9999 U or 0 to 9999 U* 0 C 40 CT2 output Same as CT1 0
E1.Sb ~ E5.Sb Internal Event 1 to 5 sub-setting 0 C 41 CT2 measurement wait time Same as CT1 30
E1.Hy ~ E5.Hy Internal Event 1 to 5 hysteresis 0 to 9999* 5 C 42 Control output 1 range 1: 4 to 20 mA 2: 0 to 20 mA 1
E1.On ~ E5.On  Internal Event 1 to 5 ON delay time 0.0 to 999.9 or 0 to 9999 0 C 43 Control output 1 type 0: MV 1: Heat MV 2: Cool MV 3: PV 0
E1.OF ~ E5.OF  Internal Event 1 to 5 OFF delay time 0 4: PV before ratio, bias, and filter
* The number of decimal places changes according to the operation type of the internal event. 5: SP 6: Deviation 7: CT1 current value
8: CT2 current value 9: Invalid 10: SP+MV
Continuous output

PId PID bank C 44 Control output 1 scaling low limit

11: PV+MV
-1999 to +9999 U 0.0
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting C 45 Control output 1 scaling high limit 100.0
P-1 ~ P-8 Proportional band (1 to 8) 0.1 to 999.9 % 5.0 C 46 Control output 1 MV scaling bandwidth0 to 9999 (Valid when control output 1 type is 10 or 11) 200
I-1 ~ I-8 Integration time (1 to 8) 0 to 9999 s (No integral control action when set at "0")* 120 C 47 Control output 2 range Same as control output 1 1
d-1 ~ d-8 Derivative time (1 to 8) 0 to 9999 s (No derivative control action when set at "0")* 30 C 48 Control output 2 type Same as control output 1 3
rE-1 ~ rE-8 Manual reset (1 to 8) -10.0 to +110.0 % 50.0 C 49 Control output 2 scaling low limit Same as control output 1 0
OL-1 ~ OL-8  MV low limit (1 to 8) -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 C 50 Control output 2 scaling high limit Same as control output 1 1000
OH-1 ~ OH-8  MV high limit (1 to 8) -10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 C 51 Control output 2 MV scaling bandwidthSame as control output 1 200
P-1C ~ P-8C Cool-side proportional band (1 to 8) 0.1 to 999.9 % 5.0 C 64 Communication type 0: CPL 1: Modbus/ASCII 2: Modbus/RTU 0
I-1C ~ I-8C Cool-side integration time (1 to 8) 0 to 9999 s (No integral control action when set at "0")* 120 3: PLC-Link communication
d-1C ~ d-8C Cool-side derivative time (1 to 8) 0 to 9999 s (No derivative control action when set at "0")* 30 C 65 Station address 0 to 127 (Communication is disabled when set at "0".) 0
OL.1C ~ OL.8C  Cool-side MV low limit (1 to 8) -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 C 66 Transmission speed (bps) 0: 4800 1: 9600 2: 19200 3: 38400 2
OH.1C ~ OH.8C  Cool-side MV high limit (1 to 8) -10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 C 67 Data format (Data length) 0: 7 bits 1: 8 bits 1
C 68 Data format (Parity) 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity 2: None parity 0
* The number of decimal places changes according to the setting for C23 (integral time and derivative time decimal point position).
C 69 Data format (Stop bit) 0: 1 bit 1: 2 bits 0
PArA Parameter bank C 70  Communication minimum response time 1 to 250 ms
Key operation type 0: Standard type 1: Special type
3
0
C 71 
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting C 72 [MODE] key function 0: Invalid 1: AUTO/MANUAL selection 1
CtrL Control method 0: ON/OFF control 1: Fixed PID 0 or 1 2: RUN/READY selection
At.OL MV low limit at AT -10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 3: AT execution/stop instructions
Control

4: LSP group selection 5: Release all DO latches

At.OH MV high limit at AT -10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0
6: Invalid 7: User-defined bit 1 selection 8: Invalid
dIFF ON/OFF control differential 0 to 9999 U 5
C 73  MODE display setup Bit 0: AUTO/MANUAL display (Enabled: +1) 255
OFFS  ON/OFF control operating point offset -1999 to +9999 U 0
(Sum of the weighting) Bit 1: RUN/READY display (Enabled: +2)
FL PV filter 0.0 to 120.0 s 0.0 Bit 2: Invalid
PV rA  PV ratio 0.001 to 9.999 1.000 Bit 3: AT Stop/Start display (Enabled: +8)
bI PV bias -1999 to +9999 U 0 Bit 4: Release all DO latches display (Enabled: +16)
CyU  Time proportional cycle unit 1 0: Unit of 1 s 1: Fixed at 0.5 s 0 Bit 5: User-defined bit 1 ON/OFF display (Enabled: +32)
2: Fixed at 0.25 s 3: Fixed at 0.1 s Bit 6 to 7: Invalid
Key operation & display

Cy Time proportional cycle 1 5 to 120 s or 1 to 120 s (5 to 120 s when output includes 10 or 2 C 74  PV/SP display setup Bit 0: PV display (Enabled: +1) 15
relay output) (Sum of the weighting) Bit 1: SP display (Enabled: +2)
tPO Time proportional minimum Set value: 0 0 Bit 2: LSP group number display (Enabled: +4)
ON/OFF time 1 If either one of the conditions below is true, 250 ms applies. Bit 3 to 7: Invalid
Otherwise, 1 ms applies. C 75  MV display setup Bit 0: MV display (Enabled: +1) 15
·M V1 is set for relay output or event output in DO (Sum of the weighting) Bit 1: Heat MV/cool MV display (Enabled: +2)
assignment. Bit 2: Invalid
· Time proportional cycle is 10 s or longer. Bit 3: AT progress display (Enabled: +8)
Set value: 1–250 Bit 4 to 7: Invalid
If MV1 is set for relay output or event output in DO C 76  EV display setup 0: Not displayed 0
Time proportional output

assignment, (Operation display) 1: Set value of Internal event 1 is displayed

1–49: 50 ms applies. 2: Set values of Internal event 1 to 2 are displayed
50–250: The set value applies. 3: Set values of Internal event 1 to 3 are displayed
CyU2  Time proportional cycle unit 2 0: Unit of 1 s 1: Fixed at 0.5 s 0 C 77  Event remaining time display setup 0: Not displayed 0
2: Fixed at 0.25 s 3: Fixed at 0.1 s (Operation display) 1: Internal event 1 is displayed
Cy2 Time proportional cycle 2 5 to 120 s or 1 to 120 s (5 to 120 s when output includes 10 or 2 2: Internal event 1 to 2 is displayed
relay output) 3: Internal event 1 to 3 is displayed
tPo2 Time proportional minimum Set value: 0 0 C 78  CT input current value display setup 0: Not displayed 1
ON/OFF time 2 If either one of the conditions below is true, 250 ms applies. (Operation display) 1: CT1 current value is displayed
Otherwise, 1 ms applies. 2: CT1 to 2 current values are displayed
·M V2 is set for relay output or event output in DO assignment. C 79 User level 0: Simple configuration 0
· Time proportional cycle is 10 s or longer. 1: Standard configuration
Set value: 1–250 2: Advanced configuration
If MV2 is set for relay output or event output in DO
assignment, C 80  Status indicator 0: Not used 0
1–49: 50 ms applies. 1: Flashing while data is sending through RS-485
50–250: The set value applies. communication.
 Time proportional cycle mode 2: Flashing while data is receiving through RS-485
tP.ty 0: Controllability aiming type 0 or 1
Key operation & display

communication.
1: Operation end service life aiming type (Only ON/OFF
3: Logical OR of all DI statuses
operation within Time proportional cycle)
4: Invalid (OFF)
SPU  SP up ramp (U/min) 0.0 to 999.9 U (No ramp when set at 0.0 U) 0.0
SP  Number of CT1 turns
SPd  SP down ramp (U/min) 0.0 C 90 0: 800 turns 1 to 40: CT turns divided by 100 8
U (unit): The smallest unit of an industrial quantity (°C, Pa, L/min, etc.) of a PV range C 91  CT1 number of power wire passes 0: 1 time 1 to 6: Number of times 1

Et Extended tuning bank C 92  Number of CT2 turns 0: 800 turns 1 to 40: CT turns divided by 100 8
C 93  CT2 number of power wire passes Same as CT1 number of power wire passes 1
Display Item Contents Initial value Setting
C 97 PV input failure (under range) type 0: -10 %FS 0
At.ty AT type 0: Normal 1: Immediate response 2: Stable* 1 1: -5 mV (This setting is applicable if C01 (PV input range type)
SP.LG  SP lag constant 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 is set for sensor type B (No.17) or PR40-20 (No. 23))
At-P  AT Proportional Band adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00
C 98 Sampling period 1: 50 ms 2: 100 ms 3: 300 ms 4: 500 ms 1
At-I  AT Integral time adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00
At-d  AT Derivative time adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00
AT.PT  Type of MV switching point at AT 0: Default (2/3 of initial PV and SP) 1: SP 2: PV 0
AT.PV  MV switching point PV in AT -1999 to +9999 U 0
Ctr.A  Control algorithm 0: PID (Conventional PID) 1: Ra-PID (High-performance PID) 0
CLG  Cooling Gain -10.0 to +110.0 % 30.0
* Normal = standard control characteristics, immediate response = control with quick response to external disturbance, stable =
control with less PV fluctuation

D-6
Items marked with  in the tables are displayed if standard configuration or advanced configuration is selected for the user level.
To change the user level, see Changing the user level at the bottom right of this page.
EvCF Event configuration bank LOC Lock bank
Display Item Contents Initial Setting Display Item Contents Initial Setting
value value
E1.C1 ~ E5.C1 Internal event 1 to 5 Configuration 1 See “Event types.” 0 LOC Key lock 0: All settings can be specified. 0
1: M
 ode, event, operation display, SP, UF, lock, manual MV, and
E1.C2 ~ E5.C2 Internal event 1 to 5 Configuration 2 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit (etc.) from the right.
[MODE] key operation can be specified.
1st digit: Direct/Reverse 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0 2: O
 peration display, SP, UF, lock, manual MV, and [MODE] key
operation can be specified.
2nd digit: Standby 0: None 1: Standby 2: Standby + Standby at SP change 0
3: U
 F, lock, manual MV, and [MODE] key operation can be
3rd digit: EVENT state at READY 0: Continue 1: Forced OFF 0 specified.

4th digit: Undefined 0 0 C.LOC  Communication lock 0: Unlocked 1: Locked 0

E1.C3 ~ E5.C3  Internal event 1 to 5 Configuration 3 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit (etc.) from the right. L.LOC  Loader lock 0: Unlocked 1: Locked 0

1st digit: Alarm OR 0: None 1: Alarm direct + OR operation 0 PASS Password display 0 to 15 (5: Password 1A to 2B display) 0
2: Alarm direct + AND operation
PS1A Password 1A 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000
3: Alarm reverse + OR operation
4: Alarm reverse + AND operation PS2A Password 2A 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000
2nd digit: Special OFF 0: As usual 0 PS1b Password 1B 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000
1: When the event set value (main setting) is 0, the event is
PS2b Password 2B 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000
"OFF".
3rd digit: Delay time unit 0: 0.1 s 1: 1 s 2: 1 min 0
Id Instrument information bank
4th digit: Undefined 0 0
Display Item Contents Initial Setting

dI DI assignment bank  ROM ID 16: Fixed

value
Not
Id01
Display Item Contents Initial Setting Applicable
value Id02  ROM Version 1 Not
dI1.1 〜 dI5.1 Internal contact 1 to 5 Operation type 0: No function 0 Applicable
1: LSP group selection (0/+1) Id03  ROM Version 2 Not
2: LSP group selection (0/+2) Applicable
3: LSP group selection (0/+4) Not
Id04  Loader information
4: PID group selection (0/+1) Applicable
5: PID group selection (0/+2)
6: PID group selection (0/+4) Id05  EST information Not
7: RUN/READY selection Applicable
8: AUTO/MANUAL selection Id06  Manufacturing date code (year) Subtract 2000 from the year. Not
9: Invalid 10: AT execution/stop instructions Example: "21" means the year 2021. Applicable
11: Invalid 12: Control action direct/reverse
Id07  Manufacturing date code (month, day) Month + day divided by 100. Not
13: SP Ramp enabled/disabled
Example: "12.01" means the 1st day of December. Applicable
14: PV Hold
15: PV Maximum value hold Id08  Serial No. Not
16: PV Minimum value hold Applicable
17: Timer Stop/Start Not
Id09  Model No.
18: Release/continue all DO latches Applicable
19: Advance 20: SP Step Hold
Id10  Model Information Not
dI1.2 ~ dI5.2  Internal contact 1 to 5 Input bit operation 0: Not used (Default input) 0 Applicable
1: Function 1 ((A and B) or (C and D))
Id11  Production site code Not
2: Function 2 ((A or B) and (C or D))
Applicable
3: Function 3 (A or B or C or D)
4: Function 4 (A and B and C and D) FP01 ～ FP16  Advanced function password 1 to 16 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000

dI1.3 ~ dI5.3  Internal contact 1 to 5 Input assignment 0: Normally open (normally off = 0) 0, 2–5
A 1: Normally closed (normally on = 1)
2: DI1 3: DI2 4 to 9: Invalid
10 to 14: Internal event 1 to 5
Precautions for setup
dI1.4 ~ dI5.4  Internal contact 1 to 5 Input assignment 15 to 17: Invalid 18 to 21: User-defined bit 1 to 4 0
B 22: MANUAL 23: READY 24: Invalid • The type of automatic tuning can be changed by At.ty (AT type) in
25: AT (Auto-Tuning) 26: During SP ramp
dI1.5 ~ dI5.5  Internal contact 1 to 5 Input assignment 27: Invalid 0 the extended tuning bank. Specify the setting in accordance with
28: All alarm
C
29: PV alarm the control characteristics.
30: Invalid
dI1.6 ~ dI5.6  Internal contact 1 to 5 Input assignment 31: [MODE] key status 0
D 32: Event output 1 terminal status

dI1.7 ~ dI5.7  Internal contact 1 to 5 Polarity A to D

33: Control output 1 terminal status

“1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit (etc.) from the right.
Memo
1st digit: Polarity A 0: Direct 0
1: Reverse
2nd digit: Polarity B 0
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
4th digit: Polarity D 0
dI1.8 ~ dI5.8  Internal contact 1 to 5 Polarity 0: Direct 1: Reverse 0
dI1.9 ~ dI5.9  Internal contact 1 to 5 Internal event No. 0: All internal events 0
assignment 1 to 5: Internal event No.

dO DO assignment bank
Display Item Contents Initial Setting
value
Ot1.1 ~ Ot2.1  Control output 1 to 2, event 0: Default output 0
Ev1.1 ~ Ev3.1 output 1 to 3 Operation type 1: MV ON/OFF status 1
2: MV ON/OFF status 2
3 to 6: Function 1 to 4 Changing the user level
Ot1.2 ~ Ot2.2  Control output 1 to 2, event 0: Normally open (normally off = 0) 2–4, 14, 15
Ev1.2 ~ Ev3.2 output 1 to 3 Output assignment A 1: Normally closed (normally on = 1) The user level can be selected from three options with C79. The number
2 to 6: Internal Event 1 to 5

Ot1.3 ~ Ot2.3  Control output 1 to 2, event

7 to 13: Invalid
0
of available displays and settings decreases in the order: advanced 
14: MV ON/OFF status 1
Ev1.3 ~ Ev3.3 output 1 to 3 Output assignment B 15: MV ON/OFF status 2 standard  simple. All items are displayed when advanced configuration is
16,17: Invalid 18: DI1 19: DI2 20 to 25: Invalid
Ot1.4 ~ Ot2.4  Control output 1 to 2, event 26 to 30: Internal contact 1 to 5 31 to 33: Invalid 0
selected.
34 to 37: User-defined bit 1 to 4 38: MANUAL
Ev1.4 ~ Ev3.4 output 1 to 3 Output assignment C

1 2
39: READY 40: Invalid 41: AT (Auto-Tuning)

Ot1.5 ~ Ot2.5  Control output 1 to 2, event

42: During SP ramp 43: Invalid 44: Alarm
45: PV alarm 46: Invalid 47: [MODE] key status 0
Press [MODE] Hold down [PARA]
Ev1.5 ~ Ev3.5 output 1 to 3 Output assignment D 48: Event output 1 terminal status
49: Control output 1 terminal status
once to show the for 2 s or longer
operation display, again. C01 is shown
A--M C 01
Ot1.6 ~ Ot2.6  Control output 1 to 2, event output 1 to “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit (etc.) from the right.
Ev1.6 ~ Ev3.6 3 Polarity A to D
and then hold down on the upper
1st digit: Polarity A 0: Direct 0
2nd digit: Polarity B
1: Reverse
0 AUTO [PARA] for 2 s or 1 display.
3rd digit: Polarity C 0 longer.
4the digit: Polarity D 0
The screen
Ot1.7 ~ Ot2.7  Control output 1 to 2, event 0: Direct 0
Ev1.7 ~ Ev3.7 output 1 to 3 Polarity 1: Reverse for specifying
Ot1.8 ~ Ot2.8
Ev1.8 ~ Ev3.8
 Control output 1 to 2, event
output 1 to 3 Latch
0: None 1: Latch (Latch at ON)
2: Latch (Latch at OFF except for initialization at power ON)
0 parameters is
shown with a--M or
UF User function bank r--r on the upper
Display Item Contents Initial
value
Setting display.

3 4
UF-1 ~ UF-8  User function 1 to 8 - -
Press [PARA] several Press [ ], [ ],
times to change to or [ ]. The lower
c79 (user level). display flashes.
C 79 0
C 79 0002
Change to the
desired setting by
pressing [ ] or [ ].
Do not press any
0: S imple (initial
key for 2 s. The new
value)
1: Standard
value stops flashing
2: Advanced and is now set.

D-7
 PV input range table Event types
Thermocouple RTD Direct action Reverse action
Operation : ON/OFF changes at the value : ON/OFF changes at the value
C0 1 Sensor Range Range C0 1 Sensor Range Range Setting
type : ON/OFF changes when the value : ON/OFF changes when the value
Setting type (Celsius) (Fahrenheit) Setting type (Celsius) (Fahrenheit)
is exceeded is exceeded
1 K -200 to +1200 °C -300 to +2200 °F 41 Pt100 -200 to +500 °C -300 to +900 °F
No event 0 Always OFF Always OFF
2 K 0 to 1200 °C 0 to 2200 °F 42 JPt100 -200 to +500 °C -300 to +900 °F
PV high limit 1
3 K 0.0 to 800.0 °C 0 to 1500 °F 43 Pt100 -200 to +200 °C -300 to +400 °F HYS ON ON HYS
4 K 0.0 to 600.0 °C 0 to 1100 °F 44 JPt100 -200 to +200 °C -300 to +400 °F Main setting Main setting
PV PV
5 K 0.0 to 400.0 °C 0.0 to 700.0 °F 45 Pt100 -100.0 to +300.0 °C -150 to +500 °F
PV low limit 2 ON HYS ON
6 K -200.0 to +400.0 °C -300 to +700 °F 46 JPt100 -100.0 to +300.0 °C -150 to +500 °F HYS
9 J 0.0 to 800.0 °C 0 to 1500 °F 51 Pt100 -50.0 to +200.0 °C -50.0 to +400.0 °F Main setting Main setting
10 J 0.0 to 600.0 °C 0 to 1100 °F 52 JPt100 -50.0 to +200.0 °C -50.0 to +400.0 °F PV PV
11 J -200.0 to +400.0 °C -300 to +700 °F 53 Pt100 -50.0 to +100.0 °C -50.0 to +200.0 °F PV hogh/low 3 HYS
ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON
13 E 0.0 to 600.0 °C 0 to 1100 °F 54 JPt100 -50.0 to +100.0 °C -50.0 to +200.0 °F limit
Main setting* Sub-setting* Main setting* Sub-setting*
14 T -200.0 to +400.0 °C -300 to +700 °F 63 Pt100 0.0 to 200.0 °C 0.0 to 400.0 °F PV PV
15 R 0 to 1600 °C 0 to 3000 °F 64 JPt100 0.0 to 200.0 °C 0.0 to 400.0 °F
Deviation 4 HYS ON
16 S 0 to 1600 °C 0 to 3000 °F 67 Pt100 0.0 to 500.0 °C 0.0 to 900.0 °F ON HYS
high limit
17 B 0 to 1800 °C 0 to 3300 °F 68 JPt100 0.0 to 500.0 °C 0.0 to 900.0 °F SP+Main setting SP+Main setting
PV PV
18 N 0 to 1300 °C 0 to 2300 °F
19 PL II 0 to 1300 °C 0 to 2300 °F DC voltage / DC current Deviation 5
ON HYS HYS ON
low limit
20 WRe5-26 0 to 1400 °C 0 to 2400 °F C0 1 Sensor SP+Main setting SP+Main setting
Range
21 WRe5-26 0 to 2300 °C 0 to 4200 °F Setting type PV PV
23 PR40-20 0 to 1900 °C 0 to 3400 °F 84 0 to 1 V The scaling range is -1999 Deviation 6 HYS ON HYS
to +9999. The number of
ON HYS HYS ON
24 DIN U -200.0 to +400.0 °C -300 to +700 °F 86 1 to 5 V high/low
decimal places is changeable. limit Main Sub-
25 DIN L -100.0 to +800.0 °C -150 to +1500 °F 87 0 to 5 V Main Sub-
setting setting setting setting
88 0 to 10 V SP SP
PV PV
89 0 to 20 mA
Deviation 7 HYS ON
: Initial value 90 4 to 20 mA ON HYS
high limit
(Final SP SP+Main setting SP+Main setting
PV PV
Alarm codes reference)
Deviation 8
ON HYS HYS ON
low limit
Alarm Description Cause Corrective action SP+Main setting SP+Main setting
code*1 (Final SP
PV PV
reference)
AL01 PV input error Sensor burnout, incorrect wiring Check the wiring.
Deviation 9 HYS ON HYS
(over range) ON HYS HYS ON
Incorrect settings for PV range type, Check the PV range type (C01) and high/low
etc. other settings. limit (Final Main Sub- Main Sub-
SP reference) setting setting setting setting
AL02 PV input error Sensor burnout, incorrect wiring Check the wiring. SP SP PV
PV
(under range)
Incorrect settings for PV range type, Check the PV range type (C01) and Heater 1 16 HYS ON HYS
ON HYS HYS ON
etc. other settings. burnout/
Overcurrent Main setting* Sub-setting* Main setting* Sub-setting*
AL03 Reference junction Measurement range error in terminal Make sure that the ambient
CT1 when output is ON CT1 when output is ON
compensation (cold junction temperature at reference junction temperature is within the
Input errors

compensation) error compensation specifications of this product. OFF before measuring CT1 current OFF before measuring CT1 current

RTD input error Sensor burnout, incorrect wiring Check the wiring.
Heater 1 17 HYS ON ON HYS
shortcircuit
AL11 Current transformer (CT) Current input exceeding the high • Use a current transformer with a Main setting Main setting
input error (over range)*2 limit of the display range number of turns that matches the CT1 when output is OFF CT1 when output is OFF
display range. OFF before measuring CT1 current OFF before measuring CT1 current
• Check the number of CT turns and
the setting. Heater 2 18 HYS ON HYS
ON HYS HYS ON
• Check the setting and the number burnout/
of times the power wire passes Overcurrent Main setting* Sub-setting* Main setting* Sub-setting*
through the CT. CT2 when output is ON CT2 when output is ON
Incorrect wiring Check the wiring. OFF before measuring CT2 current OFF before measuring CT2 current
Heater 2 19 HYS ON ON HYS
AL70 A/D conversion error A/D conversion unit failure Turn the power off and then on
again. shortcircuit
AL74 Nonvolatile memory error Temporary communication error, Main setting Main setting
If the alarm is triggered when the
corruption of data written, or failure power is turned on again, replace CT2 when output is OFF CT2 when output is OFF
AL80 Nonvolatile memory not of this device OFF before measuring CT2 current
initialized
the device. OFF before measuring CT2 current
Alarm 23 ON if there is an alarm, OFF if there is an alarm,
AL81 Setting value area error*3 (status) otherwise OFF otherwise ON
AL82 Adjustment value area error*3 : Initial value
AL83 Internal system error * If the main setting is greater than the sub-setting, operations are performed with the settings
automatically swapped.
AL84 Setting value initialization Turn the power off and then on
error again.
Instrument errors

AL95 Setting value error

If the alarm is triggered after Event types other than the above
turning the power on again, the
problem can be corrected with the Operation Operation Operation
following procedure:
Type Setting Type Setting Type Setting
• Initialize the set point
• Write the setting again SP high limit 10 MV high/low limit 15 MANUAL (status) 25
If this procedure does not correct
SP low limit 11 Loop diagnosis 1 20 AT in execution (status) 27
the problem, replace the device.
SP high/low limit 12 Loop diagnosis 2 21 During SP ramp 28
AL96 Adjustment value error Turn the power off and then on
again. MV high limit 13 Loop diagnosis 3 22 Control action (status) 29
If the alarm is triggered after MV low limit 14 READY (status) 24 Timer (status) 32
turning the power on again, the
problem can be corrected with the
following procedure:
•R estore the adjusted value*4 If
this procedure does not correct
the problem, replace the device.

*1 M
 ultiple alarms may occur at the same time. If the corrective action for one of the alarms says that
the device should be replaced, it should be replaced.
*2 The error occurred because of CT input 1, 2, or both.
*3 This error may occur when updating the firmware.
*4 If the area in memory for restoring the adjustment value has been corrupted, the value cannot be
restored.

D-8
Chapter 1. Overview
1-1 Overview
This is a compact controller (48 × 48 mm mask) with the features below.

• LED display for excellent visibility

• Easy setting by [MODE], [PARA], and digit-change keys on the front panel.

• Input type: thermocouples (K, J, E, T, R, S, B, N, PLII, WRe5-26, PR40-20, DIN U,

DIN L), resistance temperature detectors (Pt100, JPt100), current signals (4–20 or
0–20 mA DC), voltage signals (0–1, 1–5, 0–5, or 0–10 V DC).

• Control output type: relay, voltage pulse, current. These signals are assigned to
control outputs 1 and 2 according to the model No. that the customer orders.

• Heating and cooling control using control output 2 and event relays

• ON/OFF control and PID control

• According to the specified model number, the 3 event outputs, 2 event

outputs with independent contacts, 2 CT inputs, 2 digital inputs, and RS-485
communication can be combined.

• Loader connector as a standard feature

• Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F can be used for easy reading and writing
of parameters by connecting the included USB loader cable.
With the SLP-C1F, the user can specify settings in a table format, operate this
device, and monitor the control situation on the trend screen. There is no need to
create programs for communicating with a host device.

• This product is compliant with the IEC Directive and is CE-marked

(compliant with EN 61010-1, EN 61326-1 standards)

1-1
Chapter 1. Overview

„ Model Selection Table

Model selection of this device is shown below.

Basic model Control PV Add'l proc.

Installation Power Options Specifications
No. output input 1 2
            Digits
C 1 M Basic model No.
T Screw terminal block
Control output 1 Control output 2
R 0 Relay output None
(C.O. contacts)
V 0 Voltage pulse output No
(for SSR drive)
V C Voltage pulse output Current output
(for SSR drive)
V V Voltage pulse output Voltage pulse output
(for SSR drive) (for SSR drive)
C 0 Current output None
C C Current output Current output
T Thermocouple input (K, J, E, T, R, S, B, N, PL II,
WRe5/26, PR40/20, DIN U, DIN L)
R RTD input (Pt100, JPt100)
L DC voltage/current
(0–1 V, 1–5 V, 0–5 V, 0–10 V DC; 0–20 mA DC,
4–20 mA DC)
A AC power supply (100–240 V)
0 0 None
0 1 3 event relay outputs
0 2 3 event relay outputs,
2 current transformer inputs, 2 digital inputs
0 3 3 event relay outputs,
2 current transformer inputs, RS-485 comm.
0 4 2 event relay outputs (independent contacts)
0 5 2 event relay outputs (independent contacts),
2 current transformer inputs, 2 digital inputs
0 6 2 event relay outputs (independent contacts),
2 current transformer inputs, RS-485 comm.
0 9 RS-485 communication
0 None
D With inspection report
Y With traceability certificate
0 None
A UL-compatible model (available soon)
F UL compatible model
Fahrenheit temperature supportted (available
soon)

1-2
 Chapter 1. Overview

„ Accessories
Name Qty. Notes
Mounting bracket 1 When replacing, use model 84515488-001.
Gasket 1 When replacing, use model 84515487-001.
User’s manual 1 Document No. CP-UM-5964JEC

„ Optional parts
Name Model No. Notes
Mounting bracket 84515488-001 For maintenance (qty.: 1)
Gasket 84515487-001 For maintenance (qty. 20)
Dedicated hard cover 84515988-001
Dedicated terminal cover 84515888-001
L-shaped plug adapter 81441057-001
Current transformer QN206A* 800 turns, hole diameter: 5.8 mm
QN212A* 800 turns, hole diameter: 12 mm
Smart Loader Package SLP-C1FJA0 With USB loader cable
SLP-C1FJA1 Without USB loader cable
USB loader cable 81441177-001

* Not UL-certified

1-3
Chapter 1. Overview

1-2 Names and Functions of Parts

„ Model C1M and its console

Display

Operation panel

(14)
(1)

(2)

(3)
(4)
(5) (9) (10) (11) (12)
(13)

(6)

(7) (8)

(1) Upper display: Shows PV (present temperature, etc.) or items that can be set.
(2) [MODE] key: Shows the operation display.
If it is held down for 1 second or longer, the preset operation (initial setting: AUTO/MANUAL
selection) can be executed.
(3) [PARA] key: Switches the display.
(4) [<], [∨], and [∧] keys: Used for incrementing/decrementing numeric values and shifting between digits of a
number.
(5) MAN mode indicator: Lights up in MANUAL mode.
(6) RDY mode indicator: Lights up in READY (control stop) mode.
(7) Event indicator: Lights up when the corresponding event relay output is ON.
(8) Control output indicator: Lights up when the corresponding control output is ON.
(9) Status indicator: Lights up according to the setting of the status indicator (by default, not used).
(10) AT indicator: Flashes during AT execution.
(11) Slope display Shows the operation status during a step operation.
(12) Lower display: Shows the SP (set temperature, etc.) or other settings.
(13) Loader connector: Connected to the PC using the USB loader cable included with the Smart Loader Package.
(14) Protective film: Protects the surface. Remove the protective film before use.

1-4
 Chapter 1. Overview

„ Terminals

Terminals

Terminals: Used to connect the power, inputs, outputs, etc.

M3 screws are used. For terminal connections, use crimp terminal lugs
compatible with M3 screws.
The tightening torque of the terminal screws is 0.6 ± 0.1 N·m.

1-5
Chapter 2. Outline of Functions
2-1 Input/Output Configuration

Other

Analog
PV Input PV output
processing Control processing processing Control outputs 1–2
(ON/OFF control, (current output)
PID control)
Internal
Digital inputs 1–2 contacts
processing
Control outputs 1–2
(relay output,
voltage pulse output)
Internal event Digital
CT processing output
CT inputs 1–2 processing processing
Event outputs 1–3
Other (relay output)

Other

z PV input
The range and the sensor used for the PV input can be selected. Selectable options
vary depending on the PV input type (T: thermocouple, R: resistance temperature
detector, L: DC voltage/current) specified by the model number (digit ).

z Control output
If R (relay output) or V (voltage pulse output) is specified by the model number
(digits  and ), ON/OFF control output or time proportional output can
be selected. For time proportional output, the time proportional cycle can be
specified. If C (current output) is specified by the model number (digits  and ),
continuous output (analog output) is available, and scaling of the output can be set.
For models with two control outputs, heating and cooling control can be used and
is simple to set up.

z Event output
For models with optional event outputs (digits  and ), the alarm or control
mode set for the event operation type is output as digital output (DO).

z Digital input
For models with optional digital inputs (digits and ), the functions specified by
DI assignment can be switched.

z Current transformer input

For models with optional current transformer inputs (digits  and ), the heater
burnout alarm can be output from the event output terminals.

2-1
Chapter 2. Outline of Functions

2-2 Key Operation

Various displays and settings can be called up to the console using keys.

There are two key operation modes, standard and special, which can be selected in the setup bank.

Display transitions and use of keys in each mode are shown below.

„ Standard mode
If C71 (key operation mode) in the setup bank is set to 0, the keys operate in
standard mode. In this mode, items that can be set are displayed in the order shown
below.

Operation settings Mode Setup

SP 5-95 AUTO/MANUAL 5-11 PV input range type 5-2
LSP No. 5-34 RUN/READY 5-11
Step No., step remaining time 5-38 AT stop/start selection 5-12 PV input failure (under range) type 5-9
MV 5-96 Release all DO latches 5-13 Sampling cycle 6-24
Heat MV 5-96 User-defined bit 1 5-13
Cool MV 5-96 Event configuration
AT progress 5-96 SP Internal event configuration 1 5-62
CT1 current 5-98 LSP group 1 SP 5-33 Internal event configuration 2 5-63
CT2 current 5-98 PID group number (for LSP 1) 6-4
Internal event 1 main setting 5-65 Internal event 5 configuration 2 5-63
Internal event 1 sub-setting 5-65 Ramp (for LSP 8) 5-44 Internal event 5 configuration 3 5-64
Timer remaining time 1 5-97 Soak time (for LSP 8) 5-44
Internal event 2 main setting 5-65 DI assignment
Internal event 2 sub-setting 5-65 Event Internal contact 1 operation type 5-48
Timer remaining time 2 5-97 Internal event 1 main setting 5-65 Internal contact 1 Input bit operation 5-51
Internal event 3 main setting 5-65 Internal event 1 sub-setting 5-65
Internal event 3 sub-setting 5-65 Internal event 1 hysteresis 5-65 Internal contact 5 polarity 5-53
Timer remaining time 3 5-97 Internal contact 5 internal event No. assignment 5-50
Internal event 5 ON delay time 5-66
User function (enabled) Internal event 5 OFF delay time 5-66 DO assignment
User function 1 5-99 Control output 1 operation type 5-71
User function 2 5-99 PID Control output 1 output assignment A 5-72
User function 3 5-99 Proportional band 1 5-21
User function 4 5-99 Integral time 1 5-21 Event output 3 polarity 5-74
User function 5 5-99 Derivative time 1 5-21 Event output 3 latch 5-74
User function 6 5-99 Manual reset 1 5-21
User function 7 5-99 User function
Cool-side MV low limit 8 5-21 User function 1 5-99
Cool-side MV high limit 8 5-21 User function 2 5-99

Parameter User function 7 5-99

Control method 5-16 User function 8 5-99
MV low limit at AT 5-24
MV high limit at AT 5-24 Lock
ON/OFF control differential 5-20 Key lock 5-103
Communication lock 5-103
SP up ramp 5-36
SP down ramp 5-36 Password 1B 5-104
Password 2B 5-104
Extended tuning
AT type 5-24 Instrument information
SP lag constant 5-27 ROM ID 6-40
Note: T he number on the right of ROM version 1 6-40
the setting items indicates the Control algorithm 6-18
page that gives the explanation Cooling gain 6-18 Advanced function password 15 6-41
of the item. Advanced function password 16 6-41

2-2
 Chapter 2. Outline of Functions

Display at power-on

After power-on:
all on  all off  sequential on and off  operation display
(sequence takes about 9 s)

If no key press for 3 min

If no key press for 3 min
Press [MODE]
2-second press of Press [MODE] 2-second press of
2-second press of [PARA]
[PARA] [PARA]
Operation settings Parameter settings Setup bank, etc., settings

PV/SP display AUTO/MANUAL Set PV input

switch range type

Press [PARA] Press [PARA] Press [PARA]

MV display RUN/READY switch Set reference junction

compensation

Press [PARA] Press [PARA] Press [PARA]

Other displays/settings Other settings Other settings

(press [PARA] repeatedly) (press [PARA] repeatedly) (press [PARA] repeatedly)

Press [PARA] Press [PARA] Press [PARA]

The displays and settings shown in this figure are illustrative examples. They may differ depending on the model and settings.

Handling Precautions
• 6 - 1 Operation Settings (p. 6-1)
6 - 2 Parameter Settings (p. 6-3)
6 - 3 Setup Bank, etc., Settings (p. 6-19)
(for details on operation settings, parameter settings, and setup
bank settings, etc.)
• If [<] is pressed while holding down [PARA], various displays/settings can
be navigated in reverse order. However, the keys can be used together
this way only for a maximum of 2 seconds.

2-3
Chapter 2. Outline of Functions

„ Special mode
If C71 (key operation mode) in the setup bank is set to 1, the keys operate in special
mode. In this mode, items that can be set are displayed in the order shown below.

Operation settings Bank selection

PV 5-95 Mode Mode
LSP No. 5-34 SP AUTO/MANUAL 5-11
MV 5-96 Event RUN/READY 5-11
Heat MV 5-96 PID AT stop/start selection 5-12
Cool MV 5-96 Parameter Release all DO latches 5-13
AT progress 5-96 Extended tuning User-defined bit 1 5-13
CT1 current 5-98 Setup
CT2 current 5-98 Event configuration SP
Internal event 1 main setting 5-65 DI assignment SP (for LSP1) 5-33
Internal event 1 sub-setting 5-65 DO assignment PID group number (for LSP 1) 6-4
Timer remaining time 1 5-98 User function
Internal event 2 main setting 5-65 Lock Ramp (for LSP 8) 5-44
Internal event 2 sub-setting 5-65 Instrument information Soak time (for LSP 8) 5-44
Timer remaining time 2 5-98
Internal event 3 main setting 5-65
Internal event 3 sub-setting 5-65 Each bank
Timer remaining time 3 5-98
Lock bank
User function (enabled) Key lock 5-103
User function 1 5-99 Communication lock 5-103
User function 2 5-99
User function 3 5-99 Password 1B 5-104
User function 4 5-99 Password 2B 5-104
User function 5 5-99
User function 6 5-99 Instrument info.
User function 7 5-99 ROM ID 6-40
User function 8 5-99 ROM version 1 6-40

Advanced function password 15 6-41

Advanced function password 16 6-41

Note: In the diagram above, the hyphenated number on the right of the items is the page number that gives an explanation
of the item.

2-4
 Chapter 2. Outline of Functions

Display at power-on

Power-on  all on  all off  sequential on and off  operation display

(sequence takes about 9 s)

If no key press for 3 min

If no key press for 3 min
2-second press of
[PARA] Press [MODE] Press [<] Press [MODE]

Operation settings Bank selection display Bank setting display

PV/SP display Select the mode bank Set PV input range type
Press [PARA]
Press [PARA] Press [PARA]
Press [∨] or [∧]

MV display Select the SP bank Set reference junction

compensation.
Press [PARA]
Press [PARA] Press [∨] or [∧] Press [PARA]

Other displays/settings Other banks Other settings

(press [PARA] repeatedly) (press [PARA], [V], [V] repeatedly) (press [PARA] repeatedly)
Press [PARA]
Press [PARA] Press [∨] or [∧] Press [PARA]

2-second press of [PARA]

The display and setting shown in this figure are examples for explanation. They may differ depending on the model and settings.

Handling Precautions
• 6 - 1 Operation Settings (p. 6-1)
6 - 2 Parameter Settings (p. 6-3)
6 - 3 Setup Bank, etc., Settings (p. 6-19)
(for details on operation settings, bank selection, items in banks)
The sections above describe the banks to which the settings belong.
• When operation settings and other items are displayed, if [<] is pressed
while holding down [PARA], various displays/settings can be navigated in
reverse order. However, the keys can be used together this way only for a
maximum of 2 seconds.

2-5
Chapter 2. Outline of Functions

„ How to set data

(1) Press [PARA] until the desired item is displayed.
Display transitions and the use of [PARA] are described on pages 2-3 and
2-5.

When configuring C01 (PV input When switching between RUN

range type) in the setup bank and READY by the r--r parameter

(2) Press [<], [∨], or [∧].

>> If the lower display shows numbers, the value in the 1st digit will start
flashing (blinking). If it shows characters, they will all start flashing.
For numbers, the flashing digit can be shifted and the flashing value can be
incremented/decremented using [<], [∨], and [∧].
For characters, the entire flashing expression can be changed using [∨] and
[∧].

The 1st digit of 0001 is rUn is flashing

flashing

(3) Release the key and wait.

>> The new value stops flashing after 2 seconds and is now set.

2-6
 Chapter 2. Outline of Functions

Handling Precautions
• If a value does not flash after [<], [∨], or [∧] is pressed, the value cannot be
changed.
For example, if the RUN/READY selection is set in the DI assignment bank,
the device keys cannot be used to switch between RUN and READY.
• If pressing [∨] does not change the flashing value, press [∧], and vice versa.
• If [PARA] is pressed while the display is flashing, this device shows the
next item without making any changes. If [MODE] is pressed while the
display is flashing, this device shows the operation display without
making any changes.
• The manipulated value (MV) displayed in MANUAL mode continues
flashing even if you release the key. In this case, the flashing value is
being output as the MV.

„ Using the [MODE] key

When the operation display is shown, press [MODE] for 1 second or longer to
execute the switch that is set by C72 ( [MODE] key function) in the setup bank.

The figures on the right show an example of

pressing [MODE] when C72 is set to 2 (RUN/
READY selection).

(1) If [MODE] is pressed when the PV and SP are

displayed in READY mode, the lower display
shows rUn flashing.

(2) If [MODE] is held down for 1 second or longer,

the mode will switch from READY to RUN,
and rUn stops flashing.

(3) When you release [MODE], the operation display

is shown again.

2-7
Chapter 2. Outline of Functions

Handling Precautions
• If C72 ([MODE] key function) in the setup bank is set to 0 (invalid), or if the
specified switching operation is disabled, switching using [MODE] is not
possible.
• If you press [MODE] when the screen for specifying settings (parameters,
setup items, etc.) is displayed, this device shows the operation display,
but continuing to press [MODE] will not change the setting. In this case,
release [MODE] temporarily and then press it again.

„ User level
The user level can be selected from three options (simple, standard, advanced) with
C79 (user level) in the setup bank.

Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings (for items that are displayed
according to the user level)

Handling Precautions
• If the user level is changed, the displayed items will change but settings
that have been made will remain valid. For example, if you set the user
level to 2 (standard configuration) or 3 (advanced configuration) in order
to configure advanced functions and then return the setting to 1 (simple
configuration), the settings available for 2 and 3 will not be displayed, but
the new settings will apply to the advanced functions.

2-8
 Chapter 2. Outline of Functions

2-3 Operation Modes

The transitions between operation modes are shown below.

RUN + AUTO mode

RUN/READY READY + AUTO mode
AT stopped switching

AT stopped
AT running

AUTO/MANUAL AUTO/MANUAL
switching switching

RUN + MANUAL mode RUN/READY READY + MANUAL mode

switching
AT stopped AT stopped

RUN: The process is being controlled.

READY: The process is not being controlled.

AUTO: Automatic operation (this device automatically determines the MV)

MANUAL: Manual operation (the user can change the MV manually)

AT: Auto tuning (this device automatically sets the PID constants by generating limit cycles)

2-9
Chapter 3. Installation

WARNING
To prevent electrical shock, this device must be installed in a location that is only accessible to
people with appropriate knowledge about electrical safety. Install this device inside a control
panel that cannot be opened without the use of a key or tool.
Do not use this device in an environment with conductive contamination, or with dry non-
conductive contamination which can become conductive due to condensation, etc.
Otherwise, problems such as tracking phenomena may damage parts, resulting in fire.
Before removing, mounting, or wiring this device, be sure to turn off the power to this device
and all connected devices. After wiring this device, attach the separately sold terminal cover
(model No. 84515888-001). Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock.
Do not touch live parts such as the power terminals. There is a danger of electric shock.

Do not disassemble this device. There is a danger of electric shock or device failure.

WARNING
Use this device within the operating ranges given in the specifications (for temperature,
humidity, voltage, vibration, shock, mounting direction, atmosphere, etc.). Otherwise, there is
a danger of fire or device failure.
Do not block the ventilation holes. There is a danger of fire or device failure.

Do not allow wire clippings, metal shavings, water, etc., to enter the case of this device. There
is a danger of fire or device failure.

3-1
Chapter 3. Installation

„ Installation location
Install this device as specified in Operating conditions (p. 14-5) and in a location
that meets the following criteria:

• Common mode voltage of all I/O except for the supply power and relay contact outputs:
voltage to ground of 30 VRMS max., 42.4 V peak max., and 60 V DC max.

• Neither high nor low temperature/humidity

• No sulfide gas or other corrosive gases

• Little dust or soot

• Protected from direct sunlight, wind, and rain

• Little mechanical vibration or shock

• Not close to high voltage lines, welding machines, or other sources of electrical
noise

• At least 15 meters away from the high voltage ignition device for a boiler, etc.

• No strong magnetic fields

• No flammable liquids or gases

• Indoors

„ Mounting precautions
Pay attention to the following when mounting this device:

• Do not block the ventilation holes.

• When using fans or cooling equipment, make sure the air does not directly blow
on this device.

• Mount this device horizontally with the back not raised or lowered more than 10°.

• Use a rigid panel whose thickness is no more than 8 mm.

• Do not tighten screws too tightly because the case may be deformed.

3-2
 Chapter 3. Installation

„ External dimensions
 Unit: mm
5.5 65

48 Mounting bracket (included) Terminal screw

M3

44.8
48

59.6
„ Panel cutout dimensions
For a panel-mounted model, open a hole in the panel as shown below.
 Unit: mm
+0.5
30 min. 45 +0.5
0 (48×N−3) 0
+0.5

+0.5
0

0
45

45
50 min.

(N: number of mounted units)

Independent mounting Gang mounting

Handling Precautions
• The maximum allowable ambient temperature for gang-mounted
products: 50 °C (two units), 45 °C (three or more units)
• When waterproofing and dust proofing are required, mount the units
individually. If units are gang mounted, waterproofing and dust proofing
performance cannot be maintained.
• Leave a space of at least 50 mm above and below this device.

3-3
Chapter 3. Installation

„ Mounting method
• Mount this device horizontally with the back not raised or lowered more than 10°.

• Use a rigid panel whose thickness is no more than 8 mm.

z Waterproof mounting
Tools: Phillips-head screwdriver
Mounting bracket

Panel cutout Screws for

mounting bracket
Gasket (included)*
* Used only for waterproof
mounting Catch

Model C1M

ax.
mm
ess:8m
n
thick
Plate

Panel

(1) Place the gasket on the terminal side of this device and slide it to the back of
the console.

(2) Insert this device from the front of the panel.

(3) Attach the mounting bracket from behind the panel.

(4) Push the mounting bracket onto the panel until the catches of the bracket are
fully engaged with the grooves in this device.

(5) Tighten the screws at the top and bottom of the bracket.

Handling Precautions
• To secure the bracket to the panel, tighten the screws of the supplied
mounting bracket until the bracket can no longer move, and then further
tighten each screw by only half a turn. Excessive tightening of the screws
may deform the case.
• If units are gang mounted, waterproofing and dust proofing performance
cannot be maintained.

3-4
 Chapter 3. Installation

z Standard mounting
For normal mounting (not waterproof/dustproof), skip step 1 of the above
procedure and use step 2 and the rest of the procedure.

Handling Precautions
• To secure the bracket to the panel, tighten the screws of the supplied
mounting bracket until the bracket can no longer move, and then further
tighten each screw by only half a turn. Excessive tightening of the screws
may deform the case.

z Attaching the hard cover

The separately sold hard cover can be attached to the console.

It is useful for preventing accidental changing of the settings and to protect a device
that is installed in a poor installation environment. The display can be viewed with
the cover on.

To use the keys, remove the cover.

Items required: hard cover, part No. 84515988-001 (sold separately)

Model C1M

Hard cover

(1) Mount the C1M in a panel as shown in the figure above.

(2) Set the two protrusions on the top of the hard cover into the two dents on the
top of the C1M.

(3) Push the bottom of the hard cover onto the C1M until it clicks into place.

3-5
Chapter 4. Wiring
4-1 Wiring

WARNING
To prevent electrical shock, this device must be installed in a location that is only accessible to
people with appropriate knowledge about electrical safety. Install this device inside a control
panel that cannot be opened without the use of a key or tool.
Do not use this device in an environment with conductive contamination, or with dry non-
conductive contamination which can become conductive due to condensation, etc. Otherwise,
problems such as tracking phenomena may damage parts, resulting in fire.
Be sure to use the fuse described in the specifications for the power wiring of this device.
Otherwise, tracking phenomena or parts failure due to other factors may cause fire.

Be sure to check that the device has been correctly wired before turning on the power.
Incorrect wiring of this device may cause device failure and also lead to a dangerous accident.

Before removing, mounting, or wiring this device, be sure to turn off the power to this device
and all connected devices. After wiring this device, attach the separately sold terminal cover
(model No. 84515888-001). Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock.
Do not touch live parts such as the power terminals. There is a danger of electric shock.

CAUTION
Wire this device correctly in compliance with applicable standards, and use the power source
and installation methods specified in this user’s manual. Otherwise, there is a danger of fire,
electric shock, or device failure.
Do not allow wire clippings, metal shavings, water, etc., to enter the case of this device. There
is a danger of fire or device failure.

Firmly tighten the terminal screws to the torque listed in the specifications. Insufficient
tightening may result in fire or electric shock.

Do not use unused terminals as relay terminals. There is a danger of fire, electric shock, or
device failure.

Use the relays within the recommended service life. Otherwise, there is a danger of fire or
device failure.

Use an appropriate overcurrent protection device (fuse, circuit breaker, etc.) with a sufficient
breaking capacity for lines to which the relays of this device are connected to protect the
circuits. Otherwise, there is a danger of fire or device failure.
If there is a risk of a power surge caused by lightning, use a surge absorber (surge protector).
Otherwise, there is a danger of fire or device failure.

4-1
Chapter 4. Wiring

„ Symbols used in the terminal wiring label

The following table shows the meaning of the symbols used in the terminal wiring
label on the side of the device.

Symbol Description
∼ AC
Caution: risk of electrical shock
Caution: risk of device failure, electric
shock, or fire due to wrong wiring
Check the wiring and the wiring diagram.

„ Wiring precautions
Pay attention to the following when wiring this device.

• Before wiring this device, verify its model No. and terminal Nos., which are
written on the wiring diagram on the side of the device.

• Wire the power lines separately from input/output signal lines.

Keep them at least 50 cm away from each other.
Do not pass these two types of wiring through the same conduit or wiring duct.

• Do not use any terminals as relay terminals.

• Fasten to the correct tightening torque.

• To separately turn the power supply of this device on and off in instrumentation
where current signals are input to multiple devices (including this device)
connected in series, use the separately sold resistor (model No. 81401325) and
set the range type to voltage.

• Connect a terminating resistor (120 Ω) to both ends of the RS-485 transmission

line.
However, if terminal resistance is not specified for other devices connected
to the same transmission line, do not connect the resistor. If they do specify a
resistor, use the highest resistance value specified, at least 120 Ω.

• Make sure that devices and equipment connected to this device have reinforced
insulation or double insulation suitable for their operating voltage and for this
device’s power.

• Attach the cover after wiring work.

Terminal cover

4-2
 Chapter 4. Wiring

• Remove the protective film from the LCD before use.

• Use 16–22 AWG cables.

• Be careful not to allow crimp terminals to touch adjacent terminals.

• Connect no more than two crimp terminal lugs to the same terminal screw.
Bend the crimp terminal lugs in advance.

• Use crimp terminal lugs compatible with M3 screws.

Recommended crimp terminal lug:
V1.25-MS3, manufactured by J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd.

5.8 mm
max.

5.5–7.6 mm

4-3
Chapter 4. Wiring

z Wiring
Control outputs (–)
CT inputs (–) Event outputs (–)

  
  
  
  
  
  

DI/Comm. (–) Power supply ()

PV inputs (–)

• Control outputs (–) • PV inputs (–) • Power supply ()

NO Do not
1 USE 4 11
AC
RELAY

Relay 2 Thermocouple 5 12

NC 3 6

1 Resistance 4 • CT inputs (–)

V.pulse

B
Voltage pulse temperature 13
2 5
detector B CT1
Do not
3 (RTD) 6 CT input 14
USE A
CT2
1 4 15
0-20mA V.pulse

Voltage pulse 1 DC current mA

2 5
Current 2 DC voltage V
3 6 • DI/comm. (–)
1 16
V.pulse V.pulse

2
Voltage pulse 1 Digital input
2 • Event outputs (–) 1
17
Voltage pulse 2
3 7 COM
18
1 DA
1 Relay 8 16
0-20mA

Current (common 2 RS-485 DB

2 9 comm. 17
contacts)
Do not 3
USE 3 10 SG 18

1 7
0-20mA 0-20mA

Current 1
1
2 Relay 8
Current 2
(independent
3 contacts) 9
2
10

4-4
 Chapter 4. Wiring

z Recommended crimp terminal lugs

Use crimp terminal lugs compatible with M3 screws.

B
A
C

Mounting Compatible Terminal dimensions Compatible J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd.

method screw (mm) wire size Model No. (reference)
A B C
C1MT M3 6.1 5.8 5.5–7.6 0.3–1.2 mm2 V1.25-MS3
max. (round terminals)
(for panel 22–16 AWG
mounting) V1.25 B3A
(Y terminals)

Handling Precautions
• If this device is installed where there is considerable vibration or shock, be
sure to use round crimp terminal lugs to prevent wires from coming off
the terminals.
• Be careful not to allow crimp terminal lugs to touch adjacent terminals.

„ Connecting open collector outputs to digital inputs

Model C1M

5V

16

17

18

4-5
Chapter 4. Wiring

„ RS-485 communication connections

z If the system includes 3-wire devices only
Model C1M (slave station)

DA(+)
16
DB(−)
17
Master station SG
Shielded 18
cable
+

SG Model C1M (slave station)

Shielded
cable DA(+)
16
FG
DB(−)
17
SG
18

Important Terminating resistor

• Connect a terminating resistor (120 Ω, 1/2 W or more recommended) to both

ends of the RS-485 transmission line.
• However, if terminal resistance is not specified for other devices connected
to the same transmission line, do not connect the resistor. If they do specify a
resistor, use the highest resistance value specified, at least 120 Ω.

Handling Precautions
• Do not connect DA (+) to DB (–). Doing so might damage this device.
• Ground only one end of the shielded cable.
• Be sure to connect the signal ground (SG) terminals to each other.
Otherwise, communication may be unreliable.

4-6
 Chapter 4. Wiring

z If the system includes 5-wire devices only

Model C1M (slave station)

DA(+)
16
DB(−)
17
Master station SG
Shielded 18
cable
+

−
+

−
Model C1M (slave station)
SG
Shielded
cable DA(+)
FG 16
DB(−)
17
SG
18

Important Terminating resistor

• Connect a terminating resistor (120 Ω, 1/2 W or more recommended) to both

ends of the RS-485 transmission line.
• However, if terminal resistance is not specified for other devices connected
to the same transmission line, do not connect the resistor. If they do specify a
resistor, use the highest resistance value specified, at least 120 Ω.

Handling Precautions
• Do not short DA (+) and DB (–). Doing so might damage this device.
• Ground only one end of the shielded cable.
• Be sure to connect the signal ground (SG) terminals to each other.
Otherwise, communication may be unreliable.

4-7
Chapter 4. Wiring

„ Connecting solid state relays (SSR)

To drive the SSR, controllers with voltage pulse outputs must be used. Specify a
model No. that includes “V0,” “VC,” or “VV” (codes for control output).

An SSR can be roughly categorized as either a constant-current SSR or a resistance

SSR. The following describes how to connect each type.

z Constant-current SSR
Check the following specifications of your SSR and the specification of the voltage
pulse output of the C1M.

• Input current (maximum): If it is below the maximum current allowed for the
voltage pulse output, the SSRs can be connected in parallel.

• Operating voltage: Check that the voltage between the voltage pulse output
terminals is within the specified range.

1. Azbil’s PGM10N or PGM10F

This example shows the calculation for the connection of this device and the
PGM10N015.
For connection with other models, check the specifications of the model.

• Input current:
Since the input current is 10 mA or less, up to two units (10 mA × 2 = 20 mA <
24 mA [maximum allowable current]) can be connected in parallel.

• Operating voltage:
The input voltage of the SSR is 3.5 to 30 V. Therefore, the voltage between the
terminals is within the specified range.

Voltage between terminals (two PGM10N units)

= Voltage when open − Internal resistance × Total drive current
= 19 V DC ±15 % − 18 Ω ±0.5 % × 20 mA
≈16 to 21 V

Connection diagram
Model C1M
+ + +
− − −
PGM10N/PGM10F PGM10N/PGM10F

Number of connectable units

SSR Connection V0/VC model VV model
PGM10N Parallel 2 units max. 4 units max.*
PGM10F Parallel 2 units max. 4 units max.*

* Two units per output

4-8
 Chapter 4. Wiring

2. Omron’s G3PA, G3PE-_ _ _B, G3NA

• Input current:
Since the input current is 7 mA or less, up to three units (7 mA × 3 = 21 mA <
24 mA [maximum allowable current]) can be connected in parallel.

• Operating voltage:
The rated voltage is 5–24 V DC or 12–24 V DC. Therefore, the voltage between
the terminals is within the specified range.

Voltage between terminals (three G3PA units)

= Voltage when open − Internal resistance × Total drive current
= 19 V DC ±15 % − 18 Ω ±0.5 % × 21 mA
≈ 16 to 21 V

Connection diagram
Model C1M

+ + + +
− − − −
G3PA G3PA G3PA

Number of connectable units

SSR Connection V0/VC model VV model
G3PA Parallel 3 units max. 6 units max.*
G3PE-_ _ _B Parallel 3 units max. 6 units max.*
G3NA Parallel 3 units max. 6 units max.*

* Three units per output

4-9
Chapter 4. Wiring

z Resistance SSR
Connect an external resistor in series as needed so that the voltage between the
input terminals of the SSR is within the specified range.

Example: when connecting two SSRs

Connection diagram
External resistance R1

Model C1M 3 4 3 4

R0 +
R2 Vf R2 Vf
V
−

When connecting n units of the SSR, the voltage between the terminals of the SSR
can be calculated by the expression below:

((V × R2) + Vf × (R0 + R1)) ÷ (R0 + R1 + n × R2)

When n = 2 and external resistance R1 = 680 Ω, the result is:

V: 19 V ±15 %
R0: 18 Ω ±0.5 %
R1: 680 Ω
R2: 260 Ω
Vf: 1.1 V

Voltage between terminals

= ((19 × 260) +1.1 × (18 + 680)) ÷ (18 + 680 + 2 × 260)
≈ 4.7 V

If the input voltage range of the SSR is 3–6 V, it can operate.

4-10
 Chapter 4. Wiring

„ Connecting a current output device

When the power of this device is turned off, its current input circuit is
disconnected.

When connecting a current output device to multiple C1M units whose power can
be turned on and off individually, use the separately sold resistor (81401325) and
specify a voltage input range.

Current output device Model C1M

+ 4–20 mA +
250 Ω 1–5 V

− −

Model C1M
+
250 Ω 1–5 V

„ Noise suppression measures

Use a single-phase instrument power supply to minimize the effect of electrical
noise on this device.

If there is a large amount of electrical noise from the power supply, use an isolation
transformer and a line filter.

(Azbil’s line filter model No.: 81442557-001)

Use a CR filter for quick-rising noise.

(Azbil’s CR filter model No.: 81446365-001)

Handling Precautions
• If anti-noise measures are taken, do not bundle primary and secondary
power lines of the isolation transformer together, and do not put them in
the same conduit or duct.

4-11
Chapter 4. Wiring

4-2 Cables
For thermocouple input, connect the unshielded wires of the thermocouple to the PV input terminals.
If a thermocouple with a terminal block is used, or if the wiring distance is long, use compensating lead wires for
connection with the terminals of this device.

Use shielded compensating lead wires.

• F
 or inputs and outputs other than thermocouples, use JCS 4364 cables for low-
power instruments or the equivalent (generally called twisted shielded cable for
instrumentation use).
The following cables are recommended.
Fujikura Dia Cable Ltd. 2 cores IPEV-S-0.9 mm2×1P
3 cores ITEV-S-0.9 mm2×1T
Sumiden HST Cable Co., Ltd. 2 cores JKPEV-S-0.9 mm2×1P

Note: The model No. of the recommended cable may change without notice, so please
contact the manufacturer.

• If there is relatively little electromagnetic induction noise, shielded multi-core

microphone cables (MVVS) can be used.

4-12
Chapter 5. Functions
5-1 PV Input
The following is a functional block diagram for PV input.

For thermocouple For RTD For DC voltage/current

PV input range type PV input range type PV input range type
(Setup bank: C01) (Setup bank: C01) (Setup bank: C01)

Reference junction compensation PV square root extraction dropout

(cold junction compensation) (Setup bank: C09)
(Setup bank: C03)

Decimal point position,

PV range low limit,
PV range high limit
(Setup bank: C04 to C06)

PV low and high limit alarm

PV before applying ratio, bias, filter

PV ratio (Parameter bank: rA)

PV bias (Parameter bank: bI)

PV filter (Parameter bank: FL)

PV low/high limits

PV hold
(DI assignment bank: operation type: dI1.1 to 3.1)

PV

5-1
Chapter 5. Functions

„ PV input range type

For thermocouple and resistance temperature detector, the sensor type and the
temperature range can be selected.

For DC voltage and DC current, the signal type can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

PV input range type See the PV input range table. Differs depending on Simple,
(setup bank) C 01 the PV input type*
specified by the
standard,
advanced
model No.

* For T (thermocouple) = 1, for R (RTD) = 41, for L (DC voltage/current) = 88

z PV input range table (thermocouple)

C01 Sensor type Range (Celsius)*1 C04 C04 C04 initial
setting display*2 setting value*3
range
1 K −200 to +1200 °C - (Fixed) 0
2 K 0 to 1200 °C - (Fixed) 0
3 K 0.0 to 800.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
4 K 0.0 to 600.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
5 K 0.0 to 400.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
6 K −200.0 to +400.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
9 J 0.0 to 800.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
10 J 0.0 to 600.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
11 J −200.0 to +400.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
13 E 0.0 to 600.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
14 T −200.0 to +400.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
15 R*4 0 to 1600 °C - (Fixed) 0
16 S*4 0 to 1600 °C - (Fixed) 0
17 B*5 0 to 1800 °C - (Fixed) 0
18 N 0 to 1300 °C - (Fixed) 0
19 PLII 0 to 1300 °C - (Fixed) 0
20 WRe5-26 0 to 1400 °C - (Fixed) 0
21 WRe5-26 0 to 2300 °C - (Fixed) 0
23 PR40-20*6 0 to 1900 °C - (Fixed) 0
24 DIN U −200.0 to +400.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
25 DIN L −100.0 to +800.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0

*1. If the display range is exceeded, this device continues displaying the maximum or
minimum value that can be displayed.
*2. C04 is the setting of the decimal point position of the PV.
*3. C04 is reset to the initial value when C01 is changed.
*4. Accuracy Below 200 °C: ±9 °C
*5. Accuracy Below 260 °C: ±80 °C (reference value), 260 °C to below 600 °C: ±12 ° C, 600 °C to
below 1000 °C: ±6 °C, 1000 °C or more: ±4.5 °C. Temperatures below 20 °C are not displayed.
*6. Accuracy Below 400 °C: not specified, 400 °C to below 1100 °C: ±40 °C, 1100 °C or more:
±12 °C.

5-2
 Chapter 5. Functions

C01 Sensor type Range (Fahrenheit)*1 C04 C04 C04 initial

setting display*2 setting value*3
range
1 K −300 to +2200 °F - (Fixed) 0
2 K 0 to 2200 °F - (Fixed) 0
3 K 0 to 1500 °F - (Fixed) 0
4 K 0 to 1100 °F - (Fixed) 0
5 K 0.0 to 700.0 °F ✓ 0–1 0
6 K −300 to +700 °F - (Fixed) 0
9 J 0 to 1500 °F - (Fixed) 0
10 J 0 to 1100 °F - (Fixed) 0
11 J −300 to +700 °F - (Fixed) 0
13 E 0 to 1100 °F - (Fixed) 0
14 T −300 to +700 °F - (Fixed) 0
15 R*4 0 to 3000 °F - (Fixed) 0
16 S*4 0 to 3000 °F - (Fixed) 0
17 B*5 0 to 3300 °F - (Fixed) 0
18 N 0 to 2300 °F - (Fixed) 0
19 PLII 0 to 2300 °F - (Fixed) 0
20 WRe5-26 0 to 2400 °F - (Fixed) 0
21 WRe5-26 0 to 4200 °F - (Fixed) 0
23 PR40-20*6 0 to 3400 °F - (Fixed) 0
24 DIN U −300 to +700 °F - (Fixed) 0
25 DIN L −150 to +1500 °F - (Fixed) 0

*1. If the display range is exceeded, this device continues displaying the maximum or
minimum value that can be displayed.
*2. C04 is the setting of the decimal point position of the PV.
*3. C04 is reset to the initial value when C01 is changed.
*4. Accuracy Below 200 °C: ±9 °C
*5. Accuracy Below 260 °C: ±80 °C (reference value), 260 °C to below 600 °C: ±12 ° C, 600 °C to
below 1000 °C: ±6 °C, 1000 °C or more: ±4.5 °C. Temperatures below 20 °C are not displayed.
*6. Accuracy Below 400 °C: not specified, 400 °C to below 1100 °C: ±40 °C, 1100 °C or more:
±12 °C.

5-3
Chapter 5. Functions

z PV input range table (RTD)

C01 Sensor type Range (Celsius)*1 C04 C04 C04 initial

setting display*2 setting value*3
range
41 Pt100 −200 to +500 °C - (Fixed) 0
42 JPt100 −200 to +500 °C - (Fixed) 0
43 Pt100 −200 to +200 °C - (Fixed) 0
44 JPt100 −200 to +200 °C - (Fixed) 0
45 Pt100 −100.0 to +300.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
46 JPt100 −100.0 to +300.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
51 Pt100 −50.0 to +200.0 °C ✓ 0–1 1
52 JPt100 −50.0 to +200.0 °C ✓ 0–1 1
53 Pt100 −50.0 to +100.0 °C ✓ 0–1 1
54 JPt100 −50.0 to +100.0 °C ✓ 0–1 1
63 Pt100 0.0 to 200.0 °C ✓ 0–1 1
64 JPt100 0.0 to 200.0 °C ✓ 0–1 1
67 Pt100 0.0 to 500.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0
68 JPt100 0.0 to 500.0 °C ✓ 0–1 0

*1. If the display range is exceeded, this device continues displaying the maximum or
minimum value that can be displayed.
*2. C04 is the setting of the decimal point position of the PV.
*3. C04 is reset to the initial value when C01 is changed.

C01 Sensor type Range (Fahrenheit)*1 C04 C04 C04 initial

setting display*2 setting value*3
range
41 Pt100 −300 to +900 °F - (Fixed) 0
42 JPt100 −300 to +900 °F - (Fixed) 0
43 Pt100 −300 to +400 °F - (Fixed) 0
44 JPt100 −300 to +400 °F - (Fixed) 0
45 Pt100 −150 to +500 °F - (Fixed) 0
46 JPt100 −150 to +500 °F - (Fixed) 0
51 Pt100 −50.0 to +400.0 °F ✓ 0–1 0
52 JPt100 −50.0 to +400.0 °F ✓ 0–1 0
53 Pt100 −50.0 to +200.0 °F ✓ 0–1 0
54 JPt100 −50.0 to +200.0 °F ✓ 0–1 0
63 Pt100 0.0 to 400.0 °F ✓ 0–1 0
64 JPt100 0.0 to 400.0 °F ✓ 0–1 0
67 Pt100 0.0 to 900.0 °F ✓ 0–1 0
68 JPt100 0.0 to 900.0 °F ✓ 0–1 0

*1. If the display range is exceeded, this device continues displaying the maximum or
minimum value that can be displayed.
*2. C04 is the setting of the decimal point position of the PV.
*3. C04 is reset to the initial value when C01 is changed.

5-4
 Chapter 5. Functions

z PV input range table (DC voltage/current)

C01 Sensor type Range*1 C04 C04 C04 initial
setting display*2 setting value*2
range
84 0–1 V The scaling range is −1999 to ✓ 0–3 0
86 1–5 V +9999. ✓ 0–3 0
87 0–5 V ✓ 0–3 0
88 0–10 V ✓ 0–3 0
89 0–20 mA ✓ 0–3 0
90 4–20 mA ✓ 0–3 0

*1. If the display range is exceeded, this device continues displaying the maximum or
minimum value that can be displayed.
*2. C04 is the setting of the decimal point position of the PV.
*3. C04 is not reset to the initial value when C01 is changed.

Handling Precautions
• When the range No. is set, the initial setting for the PV decimal point position
and the range that are shown in the tables above apply. PV decimal point
position (p. 5-7) (for details on PV decimal point position)
• Be sure to specify the correct setting for C01 according to the sensor type
and range. Otherwise, abnormal output may occur due to a large error in
temperature.
• Chapter 14. Specifications (for the accuracy of each PV input range type)

„ Temperature unit
When the PV input range type is thermocouple or RTD, the temperature unit can be
selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Temperature unit (Setup bank) 0: Celsius (˚C) 0 Simple,
C 02 1: Fahrenheit (˚F)
standard,
advanced

• When the PV input range type is thermocouple or RTD, the display and setting
can be configured.

5-5
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Reference junction compensation (cold junction compensation)

If the PV input type is thermocouple, either one of the options below can be selected:

• This device does reference junction compensation (cold junction compensation).

• This device does not do reference junction compensation (cold junction

compensation) because an external cold junction compensation device (ice bath,
etc.) is used.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Reference junction compensation 0: Internal compensation (by this device) 0 Advanced
(cold junction compensation) C 03 1: External compensation (by another
(setup bank) device)

„ PV square root extraction dropout

If the PV input type is DC voltage/current, a dropout value can be set so that the
result of the PV square root extraction used to convert the pressure (differential
pressure) into the flow becomes “0.”

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

PV square root extraction dropout 0.0 %: P
 V square root extraction is 0.0 % Advanced
(setup bank) C 09 not performed.
0.1 to 100.0 %

• If the PV input type is DC voltage/current, this item is displayed and the setting
can be changed.

• Details of PV square root extraction

The calculation input in % and the calculation result in % are expressed as PVin
and PVout, respectively.
If the PV input is greater than or equal to the PV square root extraction dropout
value and is less than 100.0 %, the calculation formula will be:
PVout = √PVin / 100 × 100
If the PV input is more than 0.0 % and is smaller than the PV square root
extraction dropout value, PVout = 0.0 %.
If the PV input is 0.0 % or less, or 100.0 % or more, the PV square root is not
extracted, so PVout = PVin.
Output after square root extraction (PVout)

100 % FS

Y = Xin/100 ×100

0 PVin
0 100 %FS
Dropout value (0.1–100.0 %, variable)

5-6
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ PV decimal point position

If the PV input type is DC voltage/current, or if some thermocouple or RTD range
types are selected, the decimal point position of the PV input can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

PV decimal point position 0: No decimal point 0 Simple,
(setup bank) C 04 1: 1 digit after the decimal point
standard,
advanced
2: 2 digits after the decimal point
3: 3 digits after the decimal point

Handling Precautions
• This setting also applies to other parameters, including those listed
below.
• SP
• SP low limit / high limit
• SP up ramp / down ramp
• PV range low limit / high limit
• Event setting and continuous output setting related to PV
• Event setting and continuous output setting related to SP
• Event settings and continuous output settings related to deviation
(absolute deviation)
• ON/OFF control differential
• ON/OFF control operating point offset
• MV switching point PV in AT

Note
• PV input range type (p. 5-2) (for whether this item is displayed for a
certain C01 setting. The setting range and initial value also vary depending
on the setting.)

5-7
Chapter 5. Functions

„ PV range low/high limit

If the PV input type is DC voltage/current, scaling of the PV input can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

PV range low limit If the PV input type is DC voltage/current: 0 Simple,
(setup bank) C 05 −1999 to +9999 (no decimal point)
standard,
advanced
−199.9 to +999.9 (1 digit after the decimal point)
PV range high limit 1000
(setup bank) C 06 −19.99 to +99.99 (2 digits after the decimal point)
−1.999 to +9.999 (3 digits after the decimal point)
If the PV input type is thermocouple or RTD:
the low and high limits of the specified PV input
range

• If the PV input type is thermocouple or RTD, this item is displayed but the setting
cannot be changed.

• If the PV input type is DC voltage/current, this item is displayed and the setting
can be changed. The following figures show the relationship between the PV
input and the PV according to the range low and high limit settings.

PV PV
High limit High limit

Low limit Low limit

Input (%) Input (%)
−10 0 100 110 −10 0 100 110
Low limit < high limit Low limit > high limit

„ PV ratio and PV bias

The PV ratio and PV bias can be set to compensate the PV.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

PV ratio 0.001 to 9.999 1.000 Standard,
(parameter bank) RA advanced

PV bias −1999 to +9999 U 0U Simple,

(parameter bank) BI standard,
advanced

• Details of PV ratio/bias calculation

When the input is PVin, the result is PVout, the PV ratio is RA, and the PV bias BI,
the formula will be:

PVout = (PVin × RA) + BI

5-8
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ PV low limit alarm threshold

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level
PV input failure (under range) 0: −10 % FS 0 Simple,
type C 97 1: −
 5 mV (valid only when C01 (PV input
standard,
advanced
(setup bank) range type) is set to 17 or 23.)

This setting is valid when C01 (PV input range type) is set to 17 (sensor type: B)
or 23 (sensor type: PR40-20). If 1 (−5 mV) is set, the PV low limit alarm is not
triggered when the sensor is connected normally.

The PV low limit alarm is triggered if the sensor is connected in the wrong
direction. PV limiting and PV low/high limit alarm (p. 5-10) (for the lowest PV
that can be displayed)

„ PV filter
The PV filter is a first-order lag filter used if the PV fluctuates sharply and
repeatedly out of control or if it flutters due to noise, etc. The larger the setting is,
the less frequently the PV changes.

Under normal circumstances, keep the filter at its initial value of 0.0.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

PV filter 0.0: No filter 0.0 s Simple,
(parameter bank) FL 0.1 to 120.0 s
standard,
advanced

OUT = OUTLAST + (IN − OUTLAST) / (T/Ts + 1)

IN: Input to the filter T: Filter setting (s)
OUT: Current filter calculation output Ts: Sampling cycle
OUTLAST: Previous filter calculation output (select from 0.05, 01, 0.3, 0.5 s)

„ PV hold
If the PV display is fluctuating, the display can be held steady in one of three ways
by assigning “PV hold,” “PV max. hold,” or “PV min. hold” to a digital input (DI).

PV hold:
The PV at a certain time is displayed and not updated.

PV max. hold:
The maximum PV is displayed.
The maximum PV is updated only if a new PV is greater than the displayed value.

PV min. hold:
The minimum PV is displayed.
The minimum PV is updated only if a new PV is smaller than the displayed value.

When the PV from a certain time, the maximum PV, or the minimum PV is being
displayed, the PV on the upper display flashes (blinks).

5-9
Chapter 5. Functions

„ PV limiting and PV low/high limit alarm

The PV low and high limits are specified for each PV input range No. In principle,
−10 % FS is the low limit and +110 % FS is the high limit of the PV.

Operation when a PV input error occurs (p. 11-4)

The PV is limited to falling within the range.

If the PV before the PV ratio, PV bias, and PV filter are applied is greater than the
PV high limit, a PV high limit alarm (AL01) is generated. If it is less than the PV
low limit, a PV low limit alarm (AL02) is generated.

Handling Precautions
• If the temperature unit is Fahrenheit, the PV low limit for ranges 41–44 is
−235 °F.
A PV low limit alarm (AL02) is generated between −300 and −235 °F,
which is within the PV range.
To control a process below −235 °F, set the output operation at PV alarm
(C15) to “0” (continue the control calculation) or set the temperature unit
(C02) to “0” (Celsius (°C)).
Note that if the output operation at PV alarm (C15) is set to “0” (continue
the control calculation), control will continue also when an abnormality
such as a PV high limit alarm (AL01) occurs.

PV range No. Range PV low limit PV high limit

41, 42 −300 to +900 °F −235 °F +1020 °F
43, 44 −300 to +400 °F −235 °F +470 °F

5-10
 Chapter 5. Functions

5-2 Mode
The user can switch AUTO/MANUAL modes and RUN/READY modes, stop or start the AT (auto tuning), release
all DO (digital output) latches, and turn on or off user-defined bit 1.

„ AUTO/MANUAL mode
AUTO and MANUAL modes can be switched.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

AUTO/MANUAL (mode bank) Simple,
A--M
AUtO(0): AUTO mode AUtO
standard,
MAn(1): MANUAL mode
advanced

• After a switch between AUTO and MANUAL modes, the display returns to the
operation display.

• If the operation type of any of internal contacts 1 to 5 is set to AUTO/MANUAL,

A--M (AUTO/MANUAL) is displayed but the setting cannot be changed with the
keys.

• If CtrL (control method) is set to 0 (ON/OFF control), AUTO mode will apply.
A--M (AUTO/MANUAL) is not displayed and the setting cannot be changed with
the keys.

• If “Bit 0: AUTO/MANUAL display” of C73 (mode display setup) is set to 0

(disabled), A--M (AUTO/MANUAL) is not displayed and the setting cannot be
changed with the keys.

„ RUN/READY mode
RUN and READY modes can be switched.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

RUN/READY (mode bank) Simple,
r--r
rUn(0): RUN mode rUn
standard,
rdy(1): READY mode
advanced

• If the operation type of any of internal contacts 1 to 5 is set to RUN/READY, r--r

(RUN/READY) is displayed but the setting cannot be changed with the keys.

• If “Bit 1: RUN/READY display” of C73 (mode display setup) is set to 0 (disabled),

r--r (RUN/READY) is not displayed and the setting cannot be changed with the
keys.

5-11
Chapter 5. Functions

„ AT (automatic tuning) stop/start

AT can be started or stopped.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

AT (Auto-Tuning) stop/start Simple,
AT
At.OF(0): AT stop At.OF
(mode bank) standard,
At.On(1): AT start
advanced

• AT stops in MANUAL or READY mode.

• If a PV high limit error (AL01) or PV low limit error (AL02) occurs, AT stops.

• If the operation type of any of internal contacts 1 to 5 is set to AT stop/start, At

(AT stop/start) is displayed but the setting cannot be changed with the keys.

• If CtrL (control method) is set to 0 (ON/OFF control), At (AT stop/start) is

not displayed and the setting cannot be changed with the keys. If CtrL (control
method) is changed to 0 (ON/OFF control) while AT is running, AT stops.

• If “Bit 3: AT stop/start display” of C73 (mode display setup) is set to 0 (disabled),

At (AT stop/start) is not displayed and the setting cannot be changed with the
keys.
AT (automatic tuning) (p. 5-24), 5 - 4 AT (Automatic Tuning) Function
(p. 5-28) (for details on AT)

„ AT error
AT status can be monitored, and if it ends abnormally, the error can be cleared by
this setting.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Auto tuning error Simple,
At.Er
Er.OF(0): Normal Er.OF
(mode bank) standard,
Er.On(1): Abnormal
advanced

• After executing the AT start operation, if AT does not start, or if it stops without
changing the PID constants, At.Er (auto tuning error) will be set to Er.On
(abnormal).

• The error can be reset to Er.OF (normal) by any of the following operations.

• Change the setting of At.Er (auto tuning error) to Er.OF (normal).

• Try executing AT again until it ends normally.
• Turn the power off and then back on.
• AT (automatic tuning) (p. 5-24), 5 - 4 AT (Automatic Tuning) Function
(p. 5-28) (for details on AT)

5-12
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Release all DO (digital output) latches

Whether to release all DO (digital output) latches can be set.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Release all DO (digital output) Simple,
do.Lt
Lt.On(0): Latch continue Lt.On
latches (mode bank) standard,
Lt.OF(1): Latch release
advanced

• If the operation type of any of internal contacts 1 to 5 is set to 18 (release/

continue all DO latches), doLt (release all DO latches) is displayed but the setting
cannot be changed with the keys.

• If “Bit 4: release all DO latches display” of C73 (mode display setup) is set to 0
(disabled), doLt (release all DO latches) is not displayed and the setting cannot be
changed with the keys.

„ User-defined bit 1
User-defined bit 1 can be turned on or off.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

User-defined bit 1 Simple,
Udb.1
db.Of(0): User defined bit 1 is OFF. db.Of
standard,
(mode bank) db.On(1): User defined bit 1 is ON.
advanced

• There are four user-defined bits, 1 to 4, but only user-defined bit 1 can be turned
on or off using the keys.

• A function (operation) can be set for user-defined bit 1 in the DI assignment

bank.

• If “Bit 5: user-defined bit 1 ON/OFF display” of C73 (mode display setup) is set to
0 (disabled), Udb.1 (user-defined bit 1) is not displayed and the setting cannot be
changed.

5-13
Chapter 5. Functions

5-3 Control
Functional block diagrams for control (ON/OFF control, PID control, Ra-PID control, heating/cooling control, etc.)
are shown below.

„ ON/OFF control
Control method: ON/OFF control
(Parameter bank: CTRL = 0 must be set)

PV SP (target value)
Output at PV alarm
(Setup bank: C16)
ON/OFF control operation ON when C16 > 0.0 %
(Setup bank: C14. Parameter bank: DIFF, OFFS) OFF when C16 ≤ 0.0 %

C15 = 0 or
C15 = 1 and AL01/AL02 not triggered
C15 = 1 and AL01/AL02 triggered

Output at READY
(Setup bank: C17)
RUN mode ON when C17 > 0.0 %
OFF when C17 ≤ 0.0 %

READY mode

MV ON/OFF status 1

5-14
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ PID control, Ra-PID control, heating/cooling control

Control method: PID control
(Parameter bank: CTRL = 1 must be set)

Heat/cool control
(Setup bank: C26)
Heat/cool control is used
Heat/cool control is not used

Control action (direct/reverse) setting in the DI assignment bank

(DI assignment bank: dI 1.1 to dI5.1)

No Yes

Control action (direct/reverse) DI logical function

(Setup bank: C14) (DI assignment bank)

AT will not be used AT will be used

Selected PID group Selected PID group

SP (target value) SP (target value)
PV PV

SP lag constant
(Extended tuning bank: SP.LG)

PID control operation AT calculation

(Extended tuning bank: CTR.A, (Extended tuning bank: AT.TY, AT.PT, AT.PV)
Setup bank: C21, C22,
PID bank: P-1 - 8, I-1 - 8, D-1 - 8, RE-1 - 8
P-1C - 8C, I-1C - 8C, D-1C - 8C) MV high and low limits at AT
(Parameter bank: AT.OL, AT.OH)
AT stopped AT running

MV high and low limits Output at PV alarm

(PID bank: OL-1 - 8, OH-1 - 8) (Setup bank: C16)
* When using heating/cooling control,
the low limit is 0 % and the high limit is 100 %.

C15 = 0 or
C15 = 1 and AL01/AL02 not triggered C15 = 1 and AL01/AL02 triggered

Output at READY
READY mode (Setup bank: C17)
READY mode

Manual MV
AUTO mode (Setup bank: C19, C20)
MANUAL mode

Heating/cooling output calculation

(Setup bank: C26, C28
Extended tuning bank: CLG )

MV high and low limits for heating Output at READY for heating MV high and low limits for cooling Output at READY for cooling
(PID bank: OL-1 - 8, (Setup bank: C17) (PID bank: OL-1C - 8C, (Setup bank: C18)
OH-1 - 8) OH-1C - 8C)

Mode other than READY + AUTO READY + AUTO mode Mode other than READY + AUTO READY + AUTO mode

MV (manipulated variable) Heating MV = MV ON/OFF status 1 Cooling MV = MV ON/OFF status 2

5-15
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Control method
There are two control methods.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control method 0: ON/OFF control 0 or 1 Simple,
(parameter bank) CTRL 1: PID control
standard,
advanced

• If relay (R0) is selected for control output by the model No., the initial value is 0.
For other models, the initial value is 1.

„ Control action and heating/cooling control

Direct/reverse of the control action and whether to use the heating/cooling control
can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control action (direct/reverse) 0: Heating control (reverse action) 0 Simple,
(setup bank) C 14 1: Cooling control (direct action)
standard,
advanced
Heat/cool control 0: Not used 0 Simple,
(setup bank) C 26 1: Use (individual PID)
standard,
advanced
2: Use (shared PID)

• If CtrL (control method) is set to 1 (PID control), C26 (heat/cool control) is

displayed and the setting can be changed.

• If C26 (heat/cool control) is set to 0 (not used), C14 (control action) is displayed
and the setting can be changed.

• If C26 (heat/cool control) is set to 0 (not used), C20 (preset MANUAL value) and
C22 (initial output of PID control) will change to 0.0.

• If the setting of C26 (heat/cool control) is changed from 0 (not used) to another
setting, C20 (preset MANUAL value) will change to 50.0 and C22 (initial output
of PID control) will change to 50.0.

• If C26 (heat/cool control) is set to 2 (use (shared PID)), At.OL (MV low limit at
AT) will change to 50.0 and At.OH (MV high limit at AT) will be 100.0.

• If C26 (heat/cool control) is changed from 2 (use (shared PID)) to another setting,
At.OL (MV low limit at AT) will change to 0.0 and At.OH (MV high limit at AT)
will be 100.0.

• Reverse action (heating control) is a control that reduces (or turns off) the MV
when the PV increases.
Direct action (cooling control) is a control that increases (or turns on) the MV
when the PV increases.

5-16
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Special control output

The control output when the PV is abnormal and when the device is in READY
mode and can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Output operation at PV alarm 0: Continue the control calculation 0 Advanced
(setup bank) C 15 1: O
 utput the value set for “Output at PV
alarm”
Output at PV alarm −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Advanced
(setup bank) C 16
Output at READY (Heat) −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Standard,
(setup bank) C 17 advanced

Output at READY (Cool) −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Standard,

(setup bank) C 18 advanced

• If CtrL (control method) is set to 1 (PID control) and C26 (heat/cool control) is
set to 1 or 2, C18 (output at READY (Cool)) is displayed and the setting can be
changed.

• When the PV is abnormal, AL01 or AL02 occurs.

„ Operation when switched to MANUAL mode

The control output when the mode is switched from AUTO to MANUAL can be
set.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Output operation at changing 0: Bumpless transfer 0 Standard,
AUTO/MANUAL C 19 1: Preset
advanced
(setup bank)
Preset MANUAL value −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 or 50.0 % Standard,
(setup bank) C 20 advanced

• If C19 (output operation at changing AUTO/MANUAL) is set to 0 (bumpless

transfer), the MV when switched from AUTO to MANUAL is retained.
If 1 (preset) is set, the MV is changed to the value set by C20 (preset MANUAL
value) when the mode is switched from AUTO to MANUAL.

• If CtrL (control method) is set to 1 (PID control), C19 (output operation at

changing AUTO/MANUAL) and C20 (preset MANUAL value) are displayed and
the settings can be changed.

• The initial value of C20 (preset MANUAL value) is 0.0 when C26 (heat/cool
control) is set to 0 (not used), and 50.0 when the setting is 1 or 2 (use).

Handling Precautions
• If the mode is MANUAL at power ON, the MV will be the value set by C20
(preset MANUAL value).

5-17
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Initial output type (mode) of PID control

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level
Initial output type (mode) of 0: Automatic 0 Advanced
PID control C 21 1: Not initialized
(setup bank)
2: Initialize (if a new SP is set)

• If CtrL (control method) is set to 1 (PID control), this item is displayed and the
setting can be changed.

• When PID groups are switched according to a change in the SP or the SP group,
the MV may be stuck at the low or high limit, and the PV may not change or may
overshoot. PID control initialization is useful in preventing these problems.

• If 0 (automatic) is set:
When the SP value is changed or SP groups are switched, whether the PID
control must be initialized or not is determined automatically, and it is initialized
only when necessary.

• If 1 (not initialized) is set:

PID control is not initialized when the SP is changed or SP groups are switched.
This setting is useful if the continuity of the MV is important when the SP is
changed or SP groups are switched.

• If 2 (initialize) is set:
PID control is always initialized when the SP is changed or SP groups are
switched. This setting is useful if it is important that, when the SP is changed or
SP groups are switched, the MV increases or decreases quickly according to the
relationship between the PV and SP.

5-18
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Initial output of PID control

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level
Initial output of PID control −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 or 50.0 % Advanced
(setup bank) C 22
• If CtrL (control method) is set to “1” (PID control), this item is displayed and the
setting can be changed.

• This value is used for PID control immediately after the operation mode is
changed from READY to RUN, or after RUN mode is activated when the power
is turned on. This value greatly affects the MV when the mode is switched.

• If the setting for C26 (heat/cool control) is changed, the value will be reset
automatically. If it is changed to 1 or 2 (use), 50.0 % will apply. If it is changed to 0
(not used), 0.0 % will apply.

„ Integral time and derivative time decimal point position

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level
Integral time and derivative 0: No decimal point 0 Advanced
time decimal point position C 23 1: 1 digit after the decimal point
(setup bank)
2: 2 digits after the decimal point
3: 3 digits after the decimal point

• If CtrL (control method) is set to 1 (PID control), this item is displayed and the
setting can be changed.

• If 0 is set, the integral time and derivative time settings will be from 0 to 9999 s.

• If 1 is set, the integral time and derivative time settings will be from 0.0 to 999.9 s.

5-19
Chapter 5. Functions

„ ON/OFF control
The settings related to ON/OFF control can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

ON/OFF control differential 0 to 9999 U 5U Simple,
(parameter bank) DIFF standard,
advanced
ON/OFF control operating point −1999 to +9999 U 0U Advanced
offset
(parameter bank)
OFFs
• If CtrL (control method) is set to 0 (ON/OFF control), dIFF (ON/OFF control
differential) and OFFS (ON/OFF control operating point offset) are displayed and
the settings can be changed.

• The operation of ON/OFF control is shown below.

ON dIFF dIFF ON
SP+OFFS SP+OFFS
PV PV
Heating control (reverse action) Cooling control (direct action)

The meaning of the symbols in the diagram:

: ON/OFF changes at the value

: ON/OFF changes when the value is exceeded

• Example of how to use the ON/OFF control differential and the ON/OFF control
operating point offset:
In heating control with SP = 200 °C, if you want to turn off the output when the
temperature is 205 °C or higher and turn on the output when the temperature
falls below 190 °C, set the differential to 15 °C and the offset to 5 °C.
In cooling control with SP = 10 °C, if you want to turn off the output when the
temperature is 5 °C or lower and turn on the output when the temperature is
above 10 °C, set the differential to 5 °C and the offset to −5 ° C.

Handling Precautions
• dIFF (ON/OFF control differential) and OFFS (ON/OFF control operating
point offset) should be set so that the output is turned on or off within
the PV range. PV input range type (p. 5-2) (for details on the PV
range)

5-20
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ PID control
The settings related to PID control can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Proportional band 0.1 to 999.9 % 5.0 % Simple,
(PID bank) P-1 standard,
advanced
Integration time 0 to 9999 U 120 s
(PID bank) I-1 (0 = no integral operation)
Derivative time 0 to 9999 U 30 s
(PID bank) D-1 (0 = no derivative operation)
Manual reset −10.0 to +110.0 % 50.0 %
(PID bank) RE-1
MV low limit −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Standard,
(PID bank) OL-1 advanced

MV high limit −10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 %

(PID bank) OH-1
Cool-side proportional band 0.1 to 999.9 % 5.0 % Simple,
(PID bank) P-1C standard,
advanced
Cool-side integration time 0 to 9999 U 120 s
(PID bank) I-1C (0 = no integral operation)
Cool-side derivative time 0 to 9999 U 30 s
(PID bank) D-1C (0 = no derivative operation)
Cool-side MV low limit −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Standard,
(PID bank) OL1C advanced

Cool-side MV high limit −10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 %

(PID bank) OH1C
• If CtrL (control method) is set to “1” (PID control), this item is displayed and the
setting can be changed.

• The abbreviations for “Cool-side proportional band,” “Cool-side integration

time,” and “Cool-side derivative time” are displayed and the settings can be
changed if C26 (heat/cool control ) is set to 1 (use (individual PID)).

• The abbreviations for “Cool-side MV low limit” and “Cool-side MV high limit”
are displayed and the settings can be changed if C26 (heat/cool control ) is set to 1
or 2 (use).

• In heating/cooling control, if “integration time” (I-1) or “cool-side integration

time” (I-1C) is 0 seconds, no integration is performed. Manual reset (rE-1) is
used for both heating and cooling.

• rE-1 (manual reset) is displayed if the integration time setting for either heating
or cooling is “0.”

• If the integration time for either heating or cooling is 0 seconds, both integration
times are processed as 0 seconds.

• If the MV low limit is greater than the MV high limit, the low limit and the high
limit are automatically interchanged.

5-21
Chapter 5. Functions

z PID control operation initialization

PID control operation is initialized when:

• PID control starts after RUN + MANUAL modes are switched to RUN + AUTO
modes

• PID control starts after READY + AUTO modes are switched to RUN + AUTO
modes

• PID control starts after the value set for “Output at PV alarm” is output

• PID control starts after AT ends normally

• PID control starts after AT ends abnormally

• The settings below are changed in RUN + AUTO modes:

Control method
Heat/cool control
Control operation
Sampling cycle
Control algorithm

• PID control is initialized according to the setting for “Initial output type (mode)
of PID control” (C21) in RUN + AUTO modes

„ Heating/cooling control
The dead zone and cooling gain can be set for heating/cooling control.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Heat/Cool control dead zone −100.0 to +100.0 % 0.0 % Simple,
(setup bank) C 28 standard,
advanced
Cooling gain −10.0 to +110.0 % 30.0 % Advanced
CLg
Heating/cooling control operations are as follows.

• C28 (heat/cool control dead zone) is displayed and the setting can be changed if
C26 (heat/cool control) is set to 1 or 2 (use).

• If C26 (heat/cool control ) is set to 1 (use (individual PID)), heating PID values
apply when the MV is 50 % or more, and cooling PID values apply when the MV
is less than 50 %.

• CLG (cooling gain) is displayed and the setting can be changed if C26 (heat/cool
control) is set to 2 (use (shared PID)).

• Set CLG (cooling gain) to a higher value to boost the cooling capability, and set it
to a lower value to decrease the cooling capability.

5-22
 Chapter 5. Functions

Note

z Heating/cooling output
If C26 (heat/cool control ) is set to 1 (use (individual PID)), the heating and cooling
MVs shown in the figures below are output in accordance with the setting for
“Heat/cool control dead zone.”
Dead zone
100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 %

Cooling Heating Cooling Heating

MV MV MV MV

0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 %

0.0 % 50.0 % 100.0 % MV 0.0 % 50.0 % 100.0 % MV

When the dead zone is 0.0 % When the dead zone is more than 0.0 %

Dead zone absolute value

100.0 % 100.0 %

Cooling Heating
MV MV

0.0 % 0.0 %

0.0 % 50.0 % 100.0 % MV

When the dead zone is less than 0.0 %

The figure below shows the relationship between the MV low limit, MV high limit,
cooling MV low limit, and cooling MV high limit.

MV low limit ≤ heating MV ≤ MV high limit

Cooling MV low limit ≤ cooling MV ≤ cooling MV high limit

5-23
Chapter 5. Functions

„ AT (automatic tuning)
The following settings can be specified for AT.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

MV low limit at AT −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 % Simple,
(parameter bank) AT.OL standard,
advanced
MV high limit at AT −10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 %
(parameter bank) AT.OH
AT type 0: Normal (regular control characteristics) 1
(extended tuning bank) AT.TY 1: Immediate response (to disturbance)
2: Stable (minimal PV fluctuation)
AT proportional band adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00 Advanced
(extended tuning bank) AT-P
AT integral time adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00
(extended tuning bank) AT-i
AT derivative time adjust 0.00 to 99.99 1.00
(extended tuning bank) AT-d
Type of MV switching point at 0: Default (2/3 of the deviation of the initial PV 0
AT At.Pt from the initial SP)
(extended tuning bank) 1: SP
2: PV
MV switching point PV in AT −1999 to +9999 U 0
At.Pv
• If CtrL (control method) is set to “1” (PID control), this item is displayed and the
setting can be changed.

• The MV when AT is executed can be limited by “MV low limit at AT” (At.OL) /
“MV high limit at AT” (At.OH).

• If C26 (heat/cool control ) is set to 0 (not used), the MV is limited by both “MV
low limit at AT” (At.OL) / “MV high limit at AT” (At.OH) and by “MV low limit”
(OL-1) / “MV high limit” (OH-1) for the PID constants.

• If C26 (heat/cool control) is set to 1 or 2 (use),

• The MV is limited by “MV low limit at AT” (At.OL) / “MV high limit at AT”
(At.OH).

• The heating MV is limited by “MV low limit” (OL-1 to 8) / “MV high limit”
(OH-1 to 8).

• The cooling MV is limited by “cool-side MV low limit” (OL.1C to 8C) / “cool-

side MV high limit” (OH.1C to 8C).

• “AT type” (At.ty) is used to calculate the PID constants that are appropriate for
the control characteristics of the equipment by AT.
1 (immediate response): adjustment for speed-oriented applications, such as a
process where the PV directly reflects heating by a heater.
2 (stable): adjustment for stability-oriented applications, such as a process where
the PV indirectly reflects heating by a heater.

5-24
 Chapter 5. Functions

The following graph illustrates the differences in control results using PID constants
calculated with each AT type.
PV
AT type = 1 (immediate response)

SP
AT type = 0 (normal)

AT type = 2 (stable)
Time

Difference in PV change when SP is changed

• “AT proportional band adjust” (At-P), “AT integral time adjust” (At-I), “AT
derivative time adjust” (At-d):
The PID constants calculated with AT are multiplied by these factors before being
written to the PID constant settings. Note that values within the setting range of
the PID constants will be written.

• “Type of MV switching point at AT” is a setting for changing the MV switching

point during AT.

0 (default): A new MV applies when the PV passes the two-thirds point in the
amount of PV deviation from the SP at the start of AT.

1 (SP): A new MV applies when the PV passes the SP at the start of AT.

2 (PV): A
 new MV applies when the PV passes the setting for “MV switching
point PV in AT.”
PV PV PV

SP SP
1/3
SP
2/3 MV switching
point PV in AT

Unstable Stable Unstable Stable Unstable Stable

cycle cycle cycle
AT start Succeeded Time Succeeded Time AT start Succeeded Time

Type of MV switching point at AT = 0 (default) Type of MV switching point at AT = 1 (SP) Type of MV switching point at AT = 2 (PV)

Note
• If you want to execute AT only for heating PID constants when C26 (heat/
cool control ) is set to 1 (use (individual PID)), the settings should satisfy:
50.0 % < MV low limit at AT (At.OL) < MV high limit at AT (At.OH)
If you want to execute AT only for cooling PID constants, the settings should
satisfy:
MV low limit at AT (At.OL) < MV high limit at AT (At.OH) < 50.0 %

AT (automatic tuning) stop/start (p. 5-12)

5 - 4 AT (Automatic Tuning) Function (p. 5-28) (for details on AT)

5-25
Chapter 5. Functions

Handling Precautions
• If C26 (heat/cool control) is set to 2 (use (shared PID), execute AT with
settings that satisfy:
50.0 % < MV low limit at AT (At.OL) < MV high limit at AT (At.OH)
• If you change a setting such as PV input range type or linear scaling
low/high limit while AT is running, AT may not end. Do not change any
settings other than At (AT stop/start selection) while AT is running.
• If you want to execute AT only for heating PID constants when C26 (heat/
cool control) is set to 1 (use (individual PID), the settings should satisfy:
50.0 % < MV low limit at AT (At.OL) < MV high limit at AT (At.OH)
• If you want to execute AT only for cooling PID constants when C26 (heat/
cool control) is set to 1 (use (individual PID), the settings should satisfy:
MV low limit at AT (At.OL) < MV high limit at AT (At.OH) < 50.0 %

„ Ra-PID
Ra-PID (RationaLOOP control function) reduces instability when the response to
disturbance is improved by the high-precision control logic. The following settings
are available.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control algorithm 0: PID (conventional PID) 0 Standard,
(extended tuning bank) CTR.A 1: Ra-PID (high-performance PID)
advanced

• If CtrL (control method) is set to “1” (PID control), this item is displayed and the
setting can be changed.

5-26
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ SP lag
The SP lag is a filter function to prevent sudden changes in the SP used in control
operations when the SP changes. Use the setting below for SP lag.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

SP lag constant 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 Advanced
(extended tuning bank) SP.LG (0.0 = no effect)

• If CtrL (control method) is set to “1” (PID control), this item is displayed and the
setting can be changed.

• The function of SP.LG (SP lag constant):

If 0.0 is set: The SP lag function has no effect.
If 0.1 or more is set: The larger the constant, the smaller the amount of MV
change when the SP is changed, and the more strongly overshoot is suppressed.

• When the SP changes, the initial output value of the filter function that is input to
the PID control operation is reset as follows.

• Reset to the SP when PID control starts after RUN + MANUAL modes are
switched to RUN + AUTO modes

• Reset to the PV when PID control starts after READY + AUTO modes are
switched to RUN + AUTO modes

• Reset to the PV when PID control starts after the value set for “Output at PV
alarm” is output

• Reset to the SP when PID control starts after AT ends normally

• Reset to the PV when PID control starts after AT ends abnormally
• Reset to the PV if the settings below are changed in RUN + AUTO modes:
Control method
Heat/cool control
Control operation
Sampling cycle
Control algorithm

• Reset to the PV if PID control is initialized according to the setting for “Initial
output type (mode) of PID control” (C21) in RUN + AUTO modes

5-27
Chapter 5. Functions

5-4 AT (Automatic Tuning) Function

Use the AT function if:

• You want to set CtrL (control method) to 1 (PID control) and set PID constants automatically.

• The rise of PV is slow or the overshoot is large.

AT function is available if CtrL (control method) is set to 1 (PID control).

„ How to start AT
(1) Check that the PV input and the actuators (heater power, etc.) are ready for
control.

(2) Check that the RDY mode indicator is off, which indicates that the device is
in RUN mode. If the RDY mode indicator is on and the device is in READY
mode, change the mode to RUN.

(3) Check that the MAN mode indicator is off, which indicates that the device is in
AUTO mode. If the MAN mode indicator is on and the device is in MANUAL
mode, change the mode to AUTO.

(4) Set At (AT stop/start) in the mode bank to At.On (AT start).

„ How to stop AT
AT ends automatically. To stop AT while it is running, set At (AT stop/start) in the
mode bank to At.OF (AT stop).

AT can also be stopped by changing the mode to READY or MANUAL.

z Display while AT is running

During AT, the AT indicator flashes. When AT and the calculation of PID constants
are done, the AT indicator turns off.

AT indicator

5-28
 Chapter 5. Functions

z Operation while AT is running

During AT, PID constants are calculated using limit cycles.

(1) A limit cycle operation is performed using the MV switching point specified
by “Type of MV switching point at AT”
During AT, two values are output repeatedly. One of the values is “MV low
limit” (OL-1 to 8) or “MV low limit at AT”(At.OL), whichever is greater, and
the other is “MV high limit” (OH-1 to 8) or “MV high limit at AT” (At.OH),
whichever is smaller.

(2) When the limit cycle has stabilized, the PID constants are changed, and AT
ends.

If C26 (heat/cool control ) is set to 1 (use (individual PID)), AT is executed using

both heating and cooling MVs.

In the first half, the MV changes to its low and high limits. In the second half, it
changes within a relatively narrow range.

If C26 (heat/cool control ) is set to 2 (use (shared PID)), AT is executed using only
heating MV.

The figures below illustrates AT with the following settings:

C26 (heat/cool control ) = 1 (use (individual PID), heating/cooling control dead
zone = 0.0 %, MV low limit = 0.0 %, MV high limit = 100.0 %
MV (%)
100.0

50.0

0.0
Time
Heating MV (%)
100.0

50.0

0.0
Time
Cooling MV (%)
100.0

50.0

0.0
Time
PV

AT in progress
SP
Switching
point

Time

5-29
Chapter 5. Functions

Handling Precautions
• Before starting AT, check that the PV input and the actuators (heater power,
etc.) are ready for control.
• If CtrL (control method) is set to 0 (ON/OFF control), AT cannot start. Change
the control method setting to 1 (PID control).
• Conditions for starting AT:
• The device is in RUN and AUTO modes.
• No PV input error has occurred.
• The setting for “MV switching point PV in AT” is within the PV input range.
AT (automatic tuning) (p. 5-24) (for “Type of MV switching point at AT”)
PV input range type (p. 5-2) (for the PV input range)
• If any of the following is detected during AT, AT will stop without changing the
PID constants:
• Switch to READY mode
• Switch to MANUAL mode
• PV error
• Change in the setting of “control method,” “heat/cool control,” “control
operation” (only when “heat/cool control” is set to 0 (not used)), “sampling
cycle,” and “control algorithm”
• Change in the setting of “MV low limit” (OL-1 to 8), “MV low limit at AT” (At.OL),
“MV high limit” (OH-1 to 8), or “MV high limit at AT” (At.OH) that would prevent
change in the two-value output during AT
• For forcible termination of AT by At (AT stop/start selection) in the mode bank
or by the internal contacts to which the function to stop/start AT is assigned,
see the section below:
5 - 7 Digital Input (DI) / Internal Contacts (p. 5-47)
If AT is forced to stop, At.Er (auto tuning error) is set to Er.On (abnormal). At.Er
(auto tuning error) can be reset to Er.OF (normal)) by any of the following
operations.
• Change the setting of At.Er (auto tuning error) to Er.OF (normal).
• Try executing AT again until it ends normally.
• Turn the power off and then back on.
• If C26 (Heat/cool control) is set to 2 (Use (shared PID)), specify "MV low limit at
AT" (at.ol) / "MV high limit at AT" (at.oh) and "MV low limit" (ol-1 to 8) / "MV
high limit" (oh-1 to 8) so that both values that are output to the MV are 50 %
or more.
• If C26 (heat/cool control) is set to 1 (use (individual PID)),
• The MV is limited by “MV low limit at AT” (At.OL) / “MV high limit at AT” (At.OH).
• The heating MV is limited by “MV low limit” (OL-1 to 8) / “MV high limit” (OH-1
to 8) for the PID constants.
• The cooling MV is limited by “cool-side MV low limit” (OL.1C to 8C) / “cool-side
MV high limit” (OH.1C to 8C).

5-30
 Chapter 5. Functions

• If the two values are close, the PV may not change even if the MV has changed
during AT.
In this case, AT may not end. If this happens, stop AT manually, reset the MV
low and high limits, and then start AT again.
• The number of limit cycles from the start to the end of AT and how long the AT
takes differ depending on the process being controlled.
• If AT always fails, instead of using it, set the PID constants manually.
• The progress of AT can be checked on the operation display.
Operation settings (p. 6-1)
• If C26 (heat/cool control ) is set to 0 (not used) or 2 (use (shared PID)), a value
indicating the progress of AT is displayed. It starts with 4 and is decremented
to 0, which means that AT is complete.
If C26 (heat/cool control ) is set to 1 (use (individual PID)), AT starts at 7,
decreases by increments of 1, and finishes at 0.
The AT progress value indicates the number of steps remaining until AT ends.
It does not indicate the time until AT ends.
• Depending on the process being controlled, it may not be possible to obtain
suitable PID constants. In such a case, set the PID constants manually.
• Do not change any settings other than At (AT stop/start selection) while AT is
running.
AT (automatic tuning) stop/start (p. 5-12), AT (automatic tuning) (p. 5-24)
(for details on AT)

5-31
Chapter 5. Functions

5-5 SP
The following is a functional block diagram for the SP. 5 - 6 Step operation (p. 5-38) (for step operation)

LSP system group

(Setup bank: C30)

For one LSP group For two or more LSP groups

LSP1 LSP group selection in DI assignment bank

(SP bank: SP1) (DI assignment bank: dI1.1 to dI5.1)

No Yes

LSP group No. DI logical function

(Operation settings: LSP No.) (DI assignment bank)

LSP1–8
(SP bank: SP1 - SP8)

Present LSP

SP ramp unit (Setup bank: C32)

SP up and down ramps (Parameter bank: SPU, SPd)

SP ramp enabling/disabling setting in the DI assignment bank

(DI assignment bank: dI1.1 to dI8.1)

SP low and high limits

(Setup bank: C07, C08)

SP

Note
• A local set point (LSP) is a set point stored in this device.
A set point given by an external analog input is called a remote set point (RSP) .
This device does not provide an RSP function.

5-32
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Specifying the SP using operation settings

The SP for the LSP group (LSP1 to 8) that is being used can be specified.

During an SP ramp, the SP that is displayed will be different from the LSP group SP,
but when the setting is being changed using the keys, the value specified for the LSP
group will be displayed.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

SP PV is shown SP low limit to high limit 0U Simple,
on the upper standard,
(operation settings)
display. advanced

• If “Bit 1: SP display” of C74 (PV/SP display setup) is set to 1 (enabled), this item is
displayed and the setting can be changed.

„ Number of LSP groups

The number of LSP groups to be used can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

LSP system group 1 to 8 1 Simple,
(setup bank) C 30 standard,
advanced

„ LSP1 to 8
The SP for up to eight LSP groups can be specified individually.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

SP SP low limit to high limit 0U Simple,
(SP bank) SP-1 standard,
advanced
SP-2
SP-3
SP-4
SP-5
SP-6
SP-7
SP-8
• SPs for as many LSP groups as are specified by C30 (LSP system group) are
displayed for setting.

5-33
Chapter 5. Functions

„ LSP group No.

The LSP group to display can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

LSP No. The rightmost digit shows the number. 1 Simple,
(operation settings) LSP From 1 to the number set for “LSP system
standard,
advanced
group”

• This item is displayed if C30 (LSP system group) is set to 2 or more and “Bit 2:
LSP group No. display” of C74 (PV/SP display setup) is set to 1 (enabled).

• If this item is displayed and if LSP group selection is not specified in DI

assignment, the setting can be changed.

„ Specifying LSP group selection by DI assignment

In the DI assignment bank, LSP group selection can be set for internal contacts 1 to 5.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

DI assignment 0: No function 0 Advanced
Internal contact 1 to 5 DI1.1 1: LSP group selection (0/+1) Standard,
0
Operation type
(DI assignment bank)
DI2.1 2: LSP group selection (0/+2)
3: LSP group selection (0/+4)
advanced

0
DI3.1 4–20: other functions
0
DI4.1
0
DI5.1
• Details of LSP group selection by internal contact

The LSP group No. set by ON/OFF of internal contacts is shown below.
LSP group selection (0/+1) OFF: 0 ON: 1
LSP group selection (0/+2) OFF: 0 ON: 2
LSP group selection (0/+4) OFF: 0 ON: 4

The LSP group No. is determined by adding 1 to the sum of the LSP group
selection values set by ON/OFF of internal contacts.
For example, if the sum of the values set by internal contacts 1 to 3 is 1, the LSP
group No. will be 2.

• If the number of LSP groups is 1, this item can be displayed and the setting can be
changed, but LSP group selection by DI assignment is invalid.

5-34
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ SP ramp unit
The time unit of the SP ramp can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

SP ramp unit 0: 0.1 U/s 1 Advanced
(setup bank) C 32 1: 0.1 U/min
2: 0.1 U/h

• 0.1 U means that the setting displayed has one more decimal place than the
number of decimal places set by “PV decimal point position.”

Examples
For a thermocouple input with a range of −200 to + 200 °C: 0.1 U = 0.1 °C

For a DC voltage input with a range of 0.0 to 100.0: 0.1 U = 0.01

SP up ramp / down ramp (p. 5-36) (for the relationship between PV input
ranges with a decimal point and the setting for “PV decimal point position”)

Handling Precautions
• For a DC voltage input or DC current input with the 3-decimal place
setting, 0.1 U = 0.0001.
However, regarding the SP up ramp and SP down ramp settings, all four
values displayed on this device indicate values after the decimal point,
because this device can display only four digits.

5-35
Chapter 5. Functions

„ SP up ramp / down ramp

SP up ramp and down ramp can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

SP up ramp 0.0 U : No ramp 0.0 U Advanced
(parameter bank) SPU 0.1 to 999.9 U
SP down ramp 0.0 U
(parameter bank) SPd (Select the time unit of ramp by “SP ramp
unit.”)

• If the initial value 0.0 U is set, the SP ramp function does not operate. Therefore,
if the up ramp is set to 0.1 U or more and the down ramp is set to 0.0 U, the SP
ramp function operates when the SP is increasing but does not operate when the
SP is decreasing. It is also possible to set the SP ramp function to operate only
when the SP is decreasing.

• The setting for these items has one more decimal place than that of the displayed
PV. For a linear input with the 3-decimal place setting, all four digits that are
displayed are after the decimal point. The time unit of the ramp can be selected
from per second, per minute, and per hour by C32 (SP ramp unit).

Example of the relationship between PV input ranges with a decimal point and
the setting for “PV decimal point position”:

C01 C04 SPU SPD

(PV input range (PV decimal point (SP up ramp) (SP down ramp)
type) position)
2 (0 to 1200 °C) (Fixed) 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9
3 (0.0 to 800.0 °C) 0 (no decimal point) 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9
1 (1 digit after the 0.00 to 99.99 0.00 to 99.99
decimal point)
88 (0 to 10 V) 0 (no decimal point) 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9
1 (1 digit after the 0.00 to 99.99 0.00 to 99.99
decimal point)
2 (2 digits after the 0.000 to 9.999 0.000 to 9.999
decimal point)
3 (3 digit after the 0.0000 to 0.9999 0.0000 to 0.9999
decimal point)

• The ramp starts with the present PV when:

• The power is turned on.

• READY + AUTO modes are switched to RUN + AUTO modes.
• RUN + MANUAL modes are switched to RUN + AUTO modes.

5-36
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ SP low/high limit
The SP low/high limit can be set in order to limit the range of the SP.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

SP low limit (PV range low limit to PV range high limit) PV range low Standard,
(setup bank) C 07 limit advanced

SP high limit (PV range low limit to PV range high limit) PV range high Standard,
(setup bank) C 08 limit advanced

Handling Precautions
• If the setting for C01 (PV input range type) is changed, the SP low/high
limit will be reset (excluding linear ranges)

„ Enabling/disabling SP ramp by DI assignment

In the DI assignment bank, the function to enable or disable the SP ramp can be set
for internal contacts 1 to 5.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

DI assignment 0: No function 0 Simple,
Internal contact 1 to 5 DI1.1 13: Enabling/disabling SP ramp
standard,
advanced
0
Operation type
(DI assignment bank)
DI2.1 1–12, 14–20: other functions

0
DI3.1
0
DI4.1
0
DI5.1
• Details of SP ramp enabling/disabling by internal contacts
SP ramp is enabled or disabled by ON/OFF of internal contacts as shown below.

OFF: SP ramp enabled, ON: SP ramp disabled

Assign SP ramp enabling/disabling to only one internal contact.

• If the SP ramp is disabled while it is running, SP ramping stops and the SP at that
time will be the final SP.

5-37
Chapter 5. Functions

5-6 Step operation

Using up to eight SP groups, a step operation where the SP changes as shown in the figure below can be executed.

Configure a step operation by specifying the LSP, ramp, and time of each step. The PID group No. to use in each step
can also be set.

In each step, the segment where the SP is changing is called the RAMP, and the segment where the SP does not
change is the SOAK.

The RAMP and SOAK segments in step 5 are indicated in the figure below.
SP
Step 5 RAMP segment

Step 5 SOAK segment

Time
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8

Handling Precautions
• A step operation can run in RUN mode. If the mode is changed to READY, step
operation stops at the beginning of step 1.

„ Number of LSP groups

The number of steps in one step operation can be specified by this setting.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

LSP system group 1 to 8 1 Simple,
(setup bank) C 30 standard,
advanced

5-38
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ SP ramp type
Whether to execute a step operation can be set.

What happens when the power is turned off and back on during a step operation can
also be specified with this item. 5 - 6 Step operation (p. 5-38) (for step operation)

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

SP ramp type 0: Standard 0 Advanced
(setup bank) C 31 1: Multi-ramp
2: S tep operation enabled: Step operation
does not resume when the power is turned
back on (shifts to READY)
3: S tep operation enabled: Step operation
resumes when the power is turned back on

• Set 2 or 3 to enable step operations.

• 2: If a power failure occurs during a step operation (in RUN mode), when the
power is turned back on, the step operation does not resume (this device enters
READY mode) and the SP returns to its value at the beginning of the step
operation.

• 3: If a power failure occurs during a step operation (in RUN mode), when the
power is turned back on, the step operation resumes from the step that was being
processed when the power failure occurred. However, operation cannot restart
at exactly the same point of time and SP as when the power failure occurred. The
step operation resumes as follows.
If a power failure occurs during a SOAK, the operation will resume from the
beginning of the SOAK. If a power failure occurs during a RAMP and there was
no PV alarm (AL01/AL02), the operation will resume with an SP that is the same
as the PV in that RAMP. If a power failure occurs during a RAMP and there was
a PV alarm (AL01/AL02), the operation will resume with the SOAK that follows
that RAMP.

Handling Precautions
• Operation of the C1M with setting 3 (step operation enabled: the
operation resumes when the power is turned back on) differs from the
setting 3 operation of Azil’s DCP digital program controllers (DCP31/32,
DCP551/552). With the DCP, operation restarts at the point of time in the
RAMP or SOAK that was in progress when the power failure occurred,
and with the SP at that time. With the C1M, operation restarts from the
beginning of the RAMP or SOAK that was in progress.
• If setting 3 is used, pay attention to the number of times data is written
to EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). During a step operation in RUN mode,
every time a RAMP or SOAK segment starts, data is written to EEPROM.
If step operations are repeated with 10-minute or shorter RAMP/SOAK
time, the service life of writing to EEPROM (about 100,000 times) will be
exceeded within 2 years.
• If C31 (SP ramp type) is set to 0 (standard) or 1 (multi-ramp) and if this
device is in RUN mode, when the setting is changed to 2 or 3 (step
operation enabled), this device automatically enters READY mode.

5-39
Chapter 5. Functions

„ SP ramp unit
The unit of the ramp’s slope in a step operation can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

SP ramp unit 0: 0.1 U/s 1 Advanced
(setup bank) C 32 1: 0.1 U/min
2: 0.1 U/h

• 0.1 U means that the setting displayed has one more decimal place than the
number of decimal places set by “PV decimal point position.”

Examples
For a thermocouple input with a range of −200 to + 200 °C: 0.1 U = 0.1 °C

For DC voltage input with a range of 0.0 to 100.0: 0.1 U = 0.01

Handling Precautions
• For DC voltage input or DC current input with the 3-decimal place setting,
0.1 U = 0.0001.
However, regarding the SP up and down settings, all four digits that are
displayed are after the decimal point because this device can display only
four digits.

5-40
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ STEP time unit

The time unit of a SOAK segment in a step operation can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

STEP time unit 0: 0.1 s 0 Advanced
(setup bank) C 33 1: 1 s (the operation display shows min. S)
2: 1 min (the operation display shows h. Min)

• 0: The unit of the soak time setting in the SP bank will be 0.1 s.

• 1: The unit of the soak time setting in the SP bank will be seconds. The time
remaining in the step is displayed in the format MM.SS (minutes.seconds).

• 2: The unit of the soak time setting in the SP bank will be minutes. The time
remaining in the step is displayed in the format HH.MM (hours.minutes).

Handling Precautions
• The time remaining in the step is displayed in the unit set by “STEP time
unit,” regardless of whether the process is in RAMP or SOAK.
• If 1 is set, and the time remaining in the step is more than 99 minutes 59
seconds, 99.99 will be displayed.
• If 2 is set, and the time remaining in the step is more than 99 hours 59
minutes, 99.99 will be displayed.

5-41
Chapter 5. Functions

„ STEP PV start
Whether to start a step operation with the PV and the type of PV start when it is
used can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

STEP PV start 0: No 0 Advanced
(setup bank) C 34 1: Up start
2: Down start

• 0: The step operation starts with SOAK in step 1.

• 1: If the PV is smaller than the SP for LSP 1, the step operation starts with the
up-ramp of step 1 using an SP that is the same as the PV. If the PV is equal to or
greater than the SP for LSP 1, the step operation starts with the SOAK of step 1.

• 2: If the PV is greater than the SP for LSP 1, the step operation starts with the
down-ramp of step 1 using an SP that is the same as the PV. If the PV is equal
to or smaller than the SP for LSP 1, the step operation starts with the SOAK of
step 1.
SP

SP (for LSP1)

Time
READY Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Operation starts with SOAK in step 1

SP

SP (for LSP1)

Slope of step 1 ramp

PV at the start
Time
READY Step 1 Step 1 Step 1

Operation starts with the up-ramp in step 1

5-42
 Chapter 5. Functions

SP

PV at the start
Slope of step 1 ramp

SP (for LSP1)

Time
READY Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Operation starts with the down-ramp in step 1

„ STEP loop
The operation when a step operation ends (loop back, etc.) can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

STEP loop 0: Operation stops (no loop-back) 0 Advanced
(setup bank) C 35 1: Loops back
2: C
 ontinues SOAK with the final step’s SP
(no loop-back)

• 0: This device enters READY mode when the SOAK of the final step ends.

• 1: When the SOAK of the final step ends, step operation is repeated starting with
the RAMP in step 1. In this RAMP, regardless of the setting of C34 (STEP PV
start), the SP of the final step ramps up to the SP for LSP 1. There is no limit on
the number of loops. Therefore, looping will continue until the operation mode is
switched to READY.

• 2: When the SOAK of the final step ends, SOAK continues at the SP of the final
step until the operation mode is switched to READY.

5-43
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Step operation: LSP, PID group No., ramp, soak time

How to change the SP during a step operation and PID group No. can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

LSP (step 1) 0 Simple,
SP-1
SP low limit (C07) to SP high limit (C08)
standard,
(SP bank)
advanced
PID group No. (step 1) 1 to 8 1 Standard,
(SP bank) PID.1 advanced

Ramp (step 1) 0.0 U : No ramp 0.0

(SP bank) RMP.1 0.1 to 999.9 U (Select the time unit of the
ramp by “SP ramp unit.”)
Soak time (step 1) 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0
(SP bank) TIM.1 (when “STEP time unit” = 0.1 s)
0 to 9999 s
(when “STEP time unit” = 1 s)
0 to 9999 min
(when “STEP time unit” = 1 min)
LSP (step 2) Same as step 1 0 Simple,
(SP bank) SP-2 standard,
advanced
PID group No. (step 2) 1 Standard,
(SP bank) PID.2 advanced

Ramp (step 2) 0.0

(SP bank) RMP.2
Soak time (step 2) 0.0
(SP bank) TIM.2
LSP (step 3) Same as step 1 0 Simple,
(SP bank) SP-3 standard,
advanced
PID group No. (step 3) 1 Standard,
(SP bank) PID.3 advanced

Ramp (step 3) 0.0

(SP bank) RMP.3
Soak time (step 3) 0.0
(SP bank) TIM.3
LSP (step 4) Same as step 1 0 Simple,
(SP bank) SP-4 standard,
advanced
PID group No. (step 4) 1 Standard,
(SP bank) PID.4 advanced

Ramp (step 4) 0.0

(SP bank) RMP.4
Soak time (step 4) 0.0
(SP bank) TIM.4

5-44
 Chapter 5. Functions

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

LSP (step 5) Same as step 1 0 Simple,
(SP bank) SP-5 standard,
advanced
PID group No. (step 5) 1 Standard,
(SP bank) PID.5 advanced

Ramp (step 5) 0.0

(SP bank) RMP.5
Soak time (step 5) 0.0
(SP bank) TIM.5
LSP (step 6) Same as step 1 0 Simple,
(SP bank) SP-6 standard,
advanced
PID group No. (step 6) 1 Standard,
(SP bank) PID.6 advanced

Ramp (step 6) 0.0

(SP bank) RMP.6
Soak time (step 6) 0.0
(SP bank) TIM.6
LSP (step 7) Same as step 1 0 Simple,
(SP bank) SP-7 standard,
advanced
PID group No. (step 7) 1 Standard,
(SP bank) PID.7 advanced

Ramp (step 7) 0.0

(SP bank) RMP.7
Soak time (step 7) 0.0
(SP bank) TIM.7
LSP (step 8) Same as step 1 0 Simple,
(SP bank) SP-8 standard,
advanced
PID group No. (step 8) 1 Standard,
(SP bank) PID.8 advanced

Ramp (step 8) 0.0

(SP bank) RMP.8
Soak time (step 8) 0.0
(SP bank) TIM.8
• Steps for as many LSP groups as are specified by C30 (LSP system group) are
displayed for setting.
• “PID group No.” is not displayed and the setting cannot be changed if ON/OFF
control is enabled or if “PID group selection” is set as the “Operation type” of any
of internal contacts 1 to 5.
• 0.1 U in “ramp” means that the setting displayed has one more decimal place than
the number of decimal places set by “PV decimal point position.”
• If set to 0.0 U, the RAMP is skipped and the next SOAK begins. If the LSP of two
consecutive steps is the same, the RAMP is skipped and the next SOAK begins.
• If “soak time” is set to 0.0 or 0, the SOAK is skipped and the next RAMP begins.

5-45
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Internal contacts: operation type

Among the internal contact operation types, the following are related to step
operation.

Note
• 5 - 7 Digital Input (DI) / Internal Contacts (p. 5-47) (for functions of
internal contacts)

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal contact 1 operation 0 to 20 0 Simple,
type DI1.1 0: No function
standard,
advanced
(DI assignment bank)
7: RUN/READY
Internal contact 2 operation 0
type DI2.1 19: Advance

(DI assignment bank) 20: SP step hold

Internal contact 3 operation 0
type DI3.1 (1–6 and 8–18 are not directly related to
step operation.)
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 4 operation 0
type DI4.1
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 5 operation 0
type DI5.1
(DI assignment bank)

• 7: The operation mode changes to READY when the internal contact turns ON.
The mode changes to RUN when the internal contact turns OFF.
• 19: If the internal contact turns ON in RUN mode during the SOAK, the next
RAMP starts from the beginning. If it turns ON during the RAMP, the next
SOAK starts from the beginning. This is called advance operation.
If an advance operation is executed during the SOAK of the last step, the
operation specified by C35, (STEP loop) applies: switching to READY mode,
looping back to the beginning of the RAMP in step 1, or continuing to SOAK.
• 20: If the internal contact turns ON in RUN mode, the progress of the step stops
(the SP of the step is held steady). If an advance operation is executed in this state,
the process will jump to the beginning of the next RAMP or SOAK and its SP is
also held.

Advance
SP during RAMP SP
RAMP extension
Advance SOAK extension by holding the SP
during SOAK by holding the SP

Time Time
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

DI: DI:
Advance SP step hold

5-46
 Chapter 5. Functions

5-7 Digital Input (DI) / Internal Contacts

The following is a functional block diagram for digital input (DI) and internal contacts.

When not using input bit functions When using input bit functions

Input bit functions are disabled Input assignment

(DI assignment bank: dI1.2 to dI5.2 (input bit function) (DI assignment bank: Input assignment A: dI1.3 to dI5.3,
must be set to “0” (not used)) DI assignment bank: Input assignment B:dI1.4 to dI5.4,
DI assignment bank: Input assignment C: dI1.5 to dI5.5,
DI assignment bank: Input assignment D: dI1.6 to dI5.6)

DI status (ON/OFF) Input assignment polarity

(ON/OFF) (DI assignment bank: Polarity A to D: dI1.7 to dI5.7)

Input bit functions 1 to 4

(DI assignment bank: Input bit function: dI1.2 to dI5.2)

Polarity Function result polarity

(DI assignment bank: dI1.8 to dI5.8) (DI assignment bank: dI1.8 to dI5.8)

Internal contact bit function result

Operation type
(DI assignment bank: dI1.1 to dI5.1)

Internal event No. assignment

(DI assignment bank: dI1.9 to dI5.9)

Internal contact function

Handling Precautions
• There are 5 internal contacts, 1 to 5. The number of digital inputs (0, 1, or 2)
can be selected by specifying the appropriate model No. For models with 2
digital inputs, the operation of these inputs is assigned to internal contacts 1
and 2 when the product is shipped.

5-47
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Operation type
The operation by internal contacts can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal contact 1 operation 0 to 20 0 Simple,
type DI1.1 See the table below for the functions that
standard,
advanced
(DI assignment bank) can be set by these settings.
Internal contact 2 operation 0
type DI2.1
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 3 operation 0
type DI3.1
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 4 operation 0
type DI4.1
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 5 operation 0
type DI5.1
(DI assignment bank)

Handling Precautions
• For operation types 1 to 3 (LSP group selection), the LSP group number
is determined by adding 1 to the sum of the weights (+1, +2, +4) of the
internal contacts that are ON. However, if the number exceeds the setting
for C30 (LSP system group), the value set for C30 will be set as the LSP
group selection.
• For operation types 4 to 6 (PID group selection), the PID group number
is determined by adding 1 to the sum of the weights (+1, 2, 4) of the
internal contacts that are ON. However, if the number exceeds 8, PID
group 8 is selected.
• Do not set 14 (PV hold), 15 (PV max. hold), and 16 (PV min. hold) at the
same time.
• For operation types other than 0 (no function) and 1 to 3 (LSP group
selection), do not set the same operation for multiple internal contacts.
• When using heating/cooling control, do not set 12 (control action (direct/
reverse)).
• If 17 (timer stop/start) is set, specify an internal event No. by “Internal
event No. assignment.”

5-48
 Chapter 5. Functions

The functions that can be assigned by dI settings and the operations are shown
below.

Settings Functions Operation when Operation when

OFF ON
0 No function None None
1 LSP group selection (0/+1) LSP number: +0 LSP number: +1
2 LSP group selection (0/+2) LSP number: +0 LSP number: +2
3 LSP group selection (0/+4) LSP number: +0 LSP number: +4
4 PID group selection (0/+1) PID number: +0 PID number: +1
5 PID group selection (0/+2) PID number: +0 PID number: +2
6 PID group selection (0/+4) PID number: +0 PID number: +4
7 RUN/READY*1 RUN READY
8 AUTO/MANUAL AUTO MANUAL
9 No function None None
10 AT (automatic tuning) stop/start*2 Stops AT. Starts AT.
11 No function None None
12 Control action (direct/reverse) Operates as Reversed operation
configured.
13 SP ramp enabling/disabling Enables SP ramp. Disables SP ramp.
14 PV hold Holds the value. Do not hold the
value.
15 PV max. hold Holds the value. Do not hold the
value.
16 PV min. hold Holds the value. Do not hold the
value.
17 Timer stop/start Stops the timer. Starts the timer.
18 Release all DO latches Continues latches Release latches.
if any.
19 Advance*3 Continues step Proceeds to the
operation. next soak or ramp.
20 SP step hold Continues step SP step hold
operation.

*1. During a step operation, the OFF to ON edge and the ON to OFF edge are used.
*2. The OFF to ON edge and the ON to OFF edge are used.
*3. The OFF to ON edge is used.

5-49
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Internal event No. assignment

If the operation type is set to “timer stop/start,” specify an internal event No. by this
item.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal contact 1 0: All internal events 0 Advanced
Internal event No. assignment DI1.9 1 to 5: Internal event No.
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 2 0
Internal event No. assignment DI2.9
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 3 0
Internal event No. assignment DI3.9
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 4 0
Internal event No. assignment DI4.9
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 5 0
Internal event No. assignment DI5.9
(DI assignment bank)

• This item is displayed and the setting can be changed if the internal contact’s
operation type is set to timer stop/start.

5-50
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Input bit functions

There are four types of input bit functions. With this item, the function to use can
be selected or all functions can be disabled.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal contact 1 input bit 0: Not used (use the default input) 0 Advanced
function DI1.2 1: Function 1, (A and B) or (C and D)
(DI assignment bank)
2: Function 2, (A or B) and (C or D)
Internal contact 2 input bit 0
function DI2.2 3: Function 3, (A or B or C or D)

(DI assignment bank) 4: Function 4, (A and B and C and D)

Internal contact 3 input bit 0
function DI3.2
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 4 input bit 0
function DI4.2
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 5 input bit 0
function DI5.2
(DI assignment bank)

• If 0 is set, input bit functions are not used and the default input is used. The
default input for each internal contact:

Internal contact 1: Digital input (DI) 1

Internal contact 2: Digital input (DI) 2
Internal contact 3: OFF state
Internal contact 4: OFF state
Internal contact 5: OFF state

• An input bit function is a combination of logical functions (AND, OR) for each
of the internal contacts 1 to 5. Functions 1 to 4 have different combinations of
logical functions. The following explains each logical function:

AND function OR function

OFF and OFF = OFF OFF or OFF = OFF
ON and OFF = OFF ON or OFF = ON
ON and ON = ON ON or ON = ON

• OFF may be expressed by contact open (OPEN) or the number 0.

• ON may be expressed by contact closed (CLOSE) or the number 1.

5-51
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Input assignment
The four inputs (A, B, C, D) used for input bit functions can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal contact 1 input assignment A 0: Normally open (normally off = 0) 2 Advanced
(DI assignment bank) DI1.3 1: Normally closed (normally on = 1)
Internal contact 1 input assignment B 0
(DI assignment bank) DI1.4 2: DI1
3: DI2
Internal contact 1 input assignment C 0
(DI assignment bank) DI1.5 4 to 9: Undefined
Internal contact 1 input assignment D 0
(DI assignment bank) DI1.6 10: Internal event 1
11: Internal event 2
Internal contact 2 input assignment A 3
(DI assignment bank) DI2.3 12: Internal event 3

Internal contact 2 input assignment B 13: Internal event 4 0

(DI assignment bank) DI2.4 14: Internal event 5
Internal contact 2 input assignment C 0
(DI assignment bank) DI2.5 15 to 17: Undefined
18: User-defined bit 1
Internal contact 2 input assignment D 0
(DI assignment bank) DI2.6 19: User-defined bit 2
Internal contact 3 input assignment A 4
DI3.3
20: User-defined bit 3
(DI assignment bank) 21: User-defined bit 4
Internal contact 3 input assignment B 0
(DI assignment bank) DI3.4 22: MANUAL mode
23: READY mode
Internal contact 3 input assignment C 0
(DI assignment bank) DI3.5 24: Undefined
Internal contact 3 input assignment D 0
(DI assignment bank) DI3.6 25: AT
26: During SP ramp
Internal contact 4 input assignment A 0
(DI assignment bank) DI4.3 27: Undefined

Internal contact 4 input assignment B 28: All alarm 0

(DI assignment bank) DI4.4 29: PV alarm
Internal contact 4 input assignment C 0
(DI assignment bank) DI4.5 30: Undefined
31: [MODE] key status
Internal contact 4 input assignment D 0
(DI assignment bank) DI4.6 32: Event output 1 terminal status
Internal contact 5 input assignment A 0
DI5.3
33: Control output 1 terminal status
(DI assignment bank)
Internal contact 5 input assignment B 0
(DI assignment bank) DI5.4
Internal contact 5 input assignment C 0
(DI assignment bank) DI5.5
Internal contact 5 input assignment D 0
(DI assignment bank) DI5.6
This item is displayed and the setting can be changed if input bit functions 1 to 4 is
set for the internal contact.

5-52
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Input assignment polarity

Whether to reverse the data assigned to the four inputs (A, B, C, D) used for input
bit functions can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal contact 1 polarity “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 0000 Advanced
(DI assignment bank) DI1.7 (etc.) from the right.
1st digit: Polarity of input assignment A
Internal contact 2 polarity A to D 0000
(DI assignment bank) DI2.7 2nd digit: Polarity of input assignment B
3rd digit: Polarity of input assignment C
Internal contact 3 polarity A to D 0000
(DI assignment bank) DI3.7 4th digit: Polarity of input assignment D

Internal contact 4 polarity A to D 0: Direct 0000

(DI assignment bank) DI4.7 1: Reverse

Internal contact 5 polarity A to D 0000

(DI assignment bank) DI5.7
• This item is displayed and the setting can be changed if input bit functions 1 to 4
is set for the internal contact.

„ Function result polarity

Whether to reverse the results of input bit functions 1 to 4 can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal contact 1 polarity 0: Direct 0 Advanced
(DI assignment bank) DI1.8 1: Reverse
Internal contact 2 polarity 0
(DI assignment bank) DI2.8
Internal contact 3 polarity 0
(DI assignment bank) DI3.8
Internal contact 4 polarity 0
(DI assignment bank) DI4.8
Internal contact 5 polarity 0
(DI assignment bank) DI5.8

5-53
Chapter 5. Functions

„ DI assignment by Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F

When specifying the settings in the DI assignment bank using Smart Loader
Package model SLP-C1F, select [Edit] → [Input/Output port setup] from the input
menu. This will display a screen for easy setup of the input bit function type, input
assignment, input assignment polarity, and function result polarity.

Select an input bit function. Select the setting for the four inputs A to D.
The ladder changes depending on the selected function.

Select whether to reverse assignments A to D. Select whether to reverse the bit function result.

Handling Precautions
• In addition to selecting from the menu, you can also open the [Input/
Output port setup] screen by the following operations.
• Click the I/O port setting icon
• Right-click an input bit function setting
• Press Ctrl + P

5-54
 Chapter 5. Functions

5-8 Internal Events

The result of internal event processing can be output as control outputs or event outputs via the digital output (DO)
processing circuit.

Chapter 2. Outline of Functions (p. 2-1) (for details)

The following is a functional block diagram for internal events.

Operation type
(Event configuration bank, operation type E1.C1 to E5.C1)

Direct/reverse, standby
(event configuration bank, direct/reverse, standby E1.C2 to E5.C2)

Main setting, sub-setting, hysteresis, special OFF

(Event bank, E1 to E5, E1.Sb to E.Sb, E1.Hy to E5.Hy,
Event configuration bank, E1.C3 to E5.C3)

Alarm OR/AND
(Event configuration bank, E1.C3 to E5.C3)

ON delay time, OFF delay time, delay time unit

(Event bank, E1.On to E5.On, E1.OF to E5.OF
Event configuration bank, E1.C3 to E5.C3)

Event state in READY

(Event configuration bank, E1.C2 to E5.C2)

Internal event status

Handling Precautions
• There are 5 internal events numbered 1 to 5. The number of event outputs
(0–3) can be selected by specifying the appropriate model No. When the
product is shipped, the operation results of internal events 1 to 3 are set to
be output from event output terminals 1 to 3. To use the operation results of
internal events 4 to 5, specify the settings in the DO assignment bank.

5-55
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Operation
The operation of internal events is shown below. Operation differs depending on
the type of operation, direct/reverse setting, event main setting, event sub-setting,
hysteresis settings, etc.

Note
• For the meaning of U (unit), see the terminology list in the Appendix.

Operation type Setting Direct action Reverse action

: ON/OFF changes at the value : ON/OFF changes at the value
: ON/OFF changes when the value is exceeded : O
 N/OFF changes when the value is exceeded

No event 0 Always OFF Always OFF

PV high limit 1
HYS ON ON HYS
Main setting PV Main setting PV

PV low limit 2
ON HYS HYS ON
Main setting PV Main setting PV

PV high and low 3

ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS
limits
Main setting*1 Sub-setting*1 PV Main setting*1 Sub-setting*1 PV

Deviation high limit 4

HYS ON ON HYS
SP+Main setting PV SP+Main setting PV

Deviation low limit 5

ON HYS HYS ON
SP+Main setting PV SP+Main setting PV

Deviation high and 6

ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS
low limits
Main setting Sub-setting Main setting Sub-setting
SP PV SP PV

Deviation high limit 7

HYS ON ON HYS
(final SP reference) SP+Main setting SP+Main setting PV
PV
When not during an SP ramp: same as the direct action When not during an SP ramp: same as the reverse action
of the deviation high limit. of the deviation high limit.
During an SP ramp: the operation is different in that the During an SP ramp: the operation is different in that the
final SP is used instead of the present SP. final SP is used instead of the present SP.

Deviation low limit 8

ON HYS HYS ON
(Final SP reference) SP+Main setting PV SP+Main setting PV
When not during an SP ramp: same as the direct action
When not during an SP ramp: same as the reverse action
of the deviation low limit.
of the deviation low limit.
During an SP ramp: the operation is different in that the
During an SP ramp: the operation is different in that the
final SP is used instead of the present SP.
final SP is used instead of the present SP.

5-56
 Chapter 5. Functions

Operation type Setting Direct action Reverse action

: ON/OFF changes at the value : ON/OFF changes at the value
: ON/OFF changes when the value is exceeded : O
 N/OFF changes when the value is exceeded

Deviation high and 9

low limits ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS

(Final SP reference) Main setting Sub-setting Main setting Sub-setting

SP PV SP PV

When not during an SP ramp: same as the direct action When not during an SP ramp: same as the reverse action
of the deviation high and low limits. of the deviation high and low limits.
During an SP ramp: the operation is different in that the During an SP ramp: the operation is different in that the
final SP is used instead of the present SP. final SP is used instead of the present SP.

SP high limit 10
HYS ON ON HYS
Main setting Main setting
SP SP
SP low limit 11
ON HYS HYS ON
Main setting SP Main setting SP

SP high and low limits 12

ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS

Main setting*1 Sub-setting*1 Main setting* Sub-setting*1

1

SP SP

MV high limit 13
HYS ON ON HYS
Main setting Main setting
MV MV

MV low limit 14
ON HYS HYS ON
Main setting Main setting
MV MV

MV high and low 15

limits ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS
Main setting*1 Sub-setting*1 Main setting*1 Sub-setting*1
MV MV

Heater 1 burnout/ 16
ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS
overcurrent*2
Main setting* 1
Sub-setting* 1
Main setting*1 Sub-setting*1
CT1 when output is ON CT1 when output is ON
OFF before measuring CT1 current OFF before measuring CT1 current

Heater 1 short 17
HYS ON ON HYS
circuit*2
Main setting Main setting
CT1 when output is OFF CT1 when output is OFF
OFF before measuring CT1 current OFF before measuring CT1 current

Heater 2 burnout/ 18
ON HYS HYS ON HYS ON HYS
overcurrent*2
Main setting* 1
Sub-setting* 1 Main setting* 1
Sub-setting*1
CT2 when output is ON CT2 when output is ON
OFF before measuring CT2 current OFF before measuring CT2 current

Heater 2 short 19
HYS ON ON HYS
circuit*2
Main setting Main setting
CT2 when output is OFF CT2 when output is OFF
OFF before measuring CT2 current OFF before measuring CT2 current

*1. If the main setting is greater than the sub-setting, operations are performed with the settings automatically swapped.
5-57
Chapter 5. Functions

Operation type Setting Direct action Reverse action

Loop diagnosis 1 20 Turns on if the PV does not change according to the increase or decrease of the MV.
Use this setting to detect a failure of the actuator, etc.
l Settings
• Main setting: MV
• Sub-setting: PV
• ON delay time: diagnosis time
l Operation specifications
Turns ON if the PV set for the sub-setting (condition 1) is not reached within the diagnosis
time (ON delay time)(condition 3) even though the MV greater than the main setting is
retained (condition 2).
l Note
To set the ON delay time, the user level (C79) should be set to “Advanced configuration.”
The ON delay time is set to 0.0 s when the product is shipped.
For heating control For cooling control

PV PV Area meeting cond. 1

Sub- HYS Sub-
setting Area meeting
cond. 1 setting

HYS

Time Time

MV Area meeting cond. 2 MV Area meeting cond. 2

Main Main
setting setting

Cond. 3 Time Cond. 3 Time

ON delay time ON delay time
ON ON
EV EV
Time Time
If cond. 1 & 2 are met, ON delay starts If cond. 1 & 2 are met, ON delay starts

*2. If the event type is burnout/overcurrent or short circuit of heater 1 or 2, there is no event detection from the time the
power is turned on until the CT input current is measured for the first time. During this period, the internal event output
is OFF regardless of the direct/reverse setting for the event. To prevent a reverse-acting event’s output from turning OFF
at power-on, set as follows.
Example of settings
Select the direct action for the event of burnout/overcurrent or short circuit of heater 1/2, and set the output
operation polarity of the terminal (event terminal or control output terminal) that outputs the event to “reverse” in the
DO assignment bank.
CT event (direct action)
Reverse DO output

Normally open (0)

Normally open (0)

Normally open (0)

5-58
 Chapter 5. Functions

Operation type Setting Direct action Reverse action

Loop diagnosis 2 21 Turns on when the PV does not change according to the increase or decrease of the MV.
Use this setting to detect a failure of the actuator, etc.
l Settings
• Main setting: MV
• Sub-setting: the amount of the change in the PV from the time when the MV exceeds the
value set for the main setting
• ON delay time: diagnosis time
l Operation specifications
Turns ON if the PV does not reach the value obtained by adding (subtracting) the sub-
setting value to the PV when the MV exceeds the main setting (condition 1) within the
diagnosis time (ON delay time)(condition 3) even though an MV greater than the main
setting is retained (condition 2).
l Note
To set the ON delay time, the user level (C79) should be set to “advanced configuration.”
The ON delay time is set to 0.0 s when the product is shipped.
For heating control For cooling control

PV PV
HYS
Area meeting Sub-setting Reference Sub-setting
(if 0 or more) PV Area meeting (if 0 or more)
Reference cond. 1
cond. 1
PV HYS

Time Time
Area meeting cond. 2 Area meeting cond. 2
MV MV
Main Main
setting setting

Cond. 3 Time
Cond. 3 Time
ON delay time ON delay time
ON ON
EV EV
Time
Time
If cond. 1 & 2 are met, ON delay starts If cond. 1 & 2 are met, ON delay starts

5-59
Chapter 5. Functions

Operation type Setting Direct action Reverse action

Loop diagnosis 3 22 Turns on when the PV does not change according to the increase or decrease of the MV.
Use this setting to detect a failure of the actuator, etc.
l Settings
• Main setting: the amount of a change in the PV from the time when the MV reaches the
high limit (100 %) or the low limit (0 %)
• Sub-setting: the absolute value of deviation (PV−SP) that will turn off the event
• ON delay time: diagnosis time
• OFF delay time: time from power-on to event OFF
l Operation specifications
In a direct operation of heating control, the event turns ON if:
• The amount of PV increase after the diagnosis time (ON delay time) elapses after the MV
reaches the high limit is smaller than the main setting.
• The amount of PV decrease after the diagnosis time (ON delay time) elapses after the MV
reaches the low limit is smaller than the main setting.
In a reverse operation of cooling control, the event turns ON if:
• The amount of PV decrease after the diagnosis time (ON delay time) elapses after the MV
reaches the high limit is smaller than the main setting.
• The amount of PV increase after the diagnosis time (ON delay time) elapses after the MV
reaches the low limit is smaller than the main setting.
The conditions below have priority over the conditions above, and if any of these conditions
is met, the event will turn OFF.
• The absolute value of deviation (PV−SP) is smaller than the sub-setting
However, after the absolute value of deviation exceeds the sub-setting, the event turns
OFF if the absolute value of deviation becomes smaller than the value obtained by
subtracting the hysteresis from the sub-setting.
• The time from the start of operation after power-on is less than the OFF delay time
l Note
To set the ON and OFF delay times, the user level (C79) should be set to “advanced
configuration.”
The ON and OFF delay times are set to 0.0 s when the product is shipped.
For heating control For cooling control
Reference PV Main setting
PV PV (if 0 or more)
HYS Area Main setting Area HYS
Reference Area meeting (if 0 or more) meeting
Area
cond.1 cond.1 Main setting
PV meeting meeting
cond.1 HYS Reference HYS cond.1 (if 0 or more)
PV
Main setting Reference
(if 0 or more) PV
Time Time

MV MV
High High
limit Area meeting limit Area meeting Area meeting
cond. 2 cond. 2 cond. 2
Area meeting
Low cond. 2 Low
limit limit
Cond. 3 Time Time
ON delay time Cond. 3 Cond. 3
ON delay time ON delay time

ON ON ON ON
EV EV
Time Time
If cond. 1 & 2 are met, ON delay starts If cond. 1 & 2 are met, ON delay starts

5-60
 Chapter 5. Functions

Operation type Setting Direct action Reverse action

Alarm 23 ON when an alarm (alarm code AL01 to AL96) OFF when an alarm (alarm code AL01 to AL96)
occurs, OFF otherwise occurs, ON otherwise
(status)
READY 24 ON in READY mode OFF in READY mode
(status) OFF in RUN mode ON in RUN mode
MANUAL 25 ON in MANUAL mode OFF in MANUAL mode
(status) OFF in AUTO mode ON in AUTO mode
Invalid 26 Always OFF Always ON
AT in execution 27 ON when AT is running OFF when AT is running
(status) OFF when AT stopped ON when AT stopped
During SP ramp 28 ON during SP ramp OFF during SP ramp
OFF when there is no SP ramp or it is ON when there is no SP ramp or it is
completed completed
Control action 29 ON during direct action (cooling) OFF during direct action (cooling)
(status) OFF during reverse action (heating) ON during reverse action (heating)
Invalid 30 Always OFF Always ON
Invalid 31 Always OFF Always ON
Timer 32 The direct and reverse action settings are disabled for timer events.
(status) To use timer events, set the operation type to “timer stop/start” in the DI assignment bank.
Multiple timer events can be controlled by a single internal contact (DI) by setting “internal
event No. assignment” in the DI assignment bank.
l Settings
• ON delay time: Time until the event changes from OFF to ON after the DI changes from
OFF to ON
• OFF delay time: Time until the event changes from ON to OFF after the DI changes from
ON to OFF
l Operation specifications
• Turns ON when DI ON continues for the ON delay time or longer.
• Turns OFF when DI OFF continues for the OFF delay time or longer.
• In other cases, the current status is retained.
DI
ON

ON delay time OFF delay time

ON
Internal event
Time

l Note
To set the ON and OFF delay times, the user level (C79) should be set to “advanced
configuration.”
The ON and OFF delay times are set to 0.0 s when the product is shipped.
“Internal event No. assignment” in the DI assignment bank is set to 0 when the product
is shipped. With this setting, a timer can be started or stopped for all internal events by a
single internal contact (DI).
If the setting is changed to 1 or more, a timer can be started or stopped for one specified
internal event by one internal contact (DI).
To change the setting, the user level (C79) should be set to “advanced configuration.”

5-61
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Operation type
The operation type can be set for internal events.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal event 1 configuration 1 0: No event 0 Simple,
Operation type E1.C1 1: PV high limit standard,
advanced
(event configuration bank) 2: PV low limit
3: PV high and low limits
4: Deviation high limit
Internal event 2 configuration 1 5: Deviation low limit 0
Operation type E2.C1 6: Deviation high and low limits
7: Deviation high limit (final SP reference)
(Event configuration bank)
8: Deviation low limit (final SP reference)
9: Deviation high and low limits (final SP
reference)
Internal event 3 configuration 1 0
Operation type E3.C1 10: SP high limit
11: SP low limit
(event configuration bank)
12: SP high and low limits
13: MV high limit
14: MV low limit
Internal event 4 configuration 1 0
Operation type E4.C1 15: MV high and low limits
16: Heater 1 burnout/overcurrent
(event configuration bank) 17: Heater1 short circuit
18: Heater 2 burnout/overcurrent
19: Heater 2 short circuit
Internal event 5 configuration 1 0
Operation type E5.C1 20: Loop diagnosis 1
21: Loop diagnosis 2
(event configuration bank) 22: Loop diagnosis 3
23: Alarm (status)
24: READY (status)
25: MANUAL (status)
26: Invalid
27: AT in execution (status)
28: During SP ramp (status)
29: Control direct action (status)
30: Invalid
31: Invalid
32: Timer (status)
33: Invalid

5-62
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Direct/reverse, standby, and READY mode operation

Direct/reverse, standby, and READY mode operation that is associated with
operation type can be set.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal event 1 configuration 2 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 0000 Simple,
(event configuration bank) E1.C2 (etc.) from the right. standard,
advanced
1st digit: Direct/reverse setting
Internal event 2 configuration 2 0000
(event configuration bank) E2.C2 0: Direct
1: Reverse
2nd digit: Standby setting
Internal event 3 configuration 2 0000
(event configuration bank) E3.C3 0: None
1: Standby
2: S tandby + standby when the SP is
Internal event 4 configuration 2 0000
(event configuration bank) E4.C4 changed
3rd digit: Event state in READY mode
0: Continues
Internal event 5 configuration 2 0000
(event configuration bank) E5.C5 1: Forced OFF
4th digit: Undefined
0: Undefined

• If internal event configuration 1 operation type is set to 0 (no event), internal

event configuration 2 (direct/reverse, standby, event state in READY mode) is not
displayed.

• For the operation of internal events according to the direct/reverse setting,

see Operation (p.5-56 to 5-61.)

Handling Precautions
• The standby function makes it possible to have an event not turn ON
even if the ON conditions (before reversing) are satisfied after this
device’s power has just been turned ON or when the mode is switched
from READY to RUN. The event will turn ON after the OFF conditions are
satisfied if the ON conditions are satisfied again.
• "Standby + standby when the SP is changed" is a function that reactivates
the standby function when the SP or LSP group No. is changed, in
addition to the regular standby function operation. However, if the same
SP is written or if the SP does not change after a change of LSP group No.,
this device will not enter standby mode.
READY When changed from READY to RUN
Event status in READY mode 0: Continues 1: Forced OFF 0: Continues 1: Forced OFF

Standby setting
0: None Normal operation OFF Normal operation Normal operation
1: Standby OFF OFF OFF (standby OFF (standby
status) status)
2: S tandby + standby when the SP is OFF OFF OFF (standby OFF (standby
changed status) status)

5-63
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Alarm OR, special OFF, delay time unit

Alarm OR, special OFF, and delay time unit associated with operation type can be set.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal event 1 configuration 3 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 0000 Advanced
(event configuration bank) E1.C3 (etc.) from the right.
1st digit: Alarm OR setting
0: None
Internal event 2 configuration 3 0000
(event configuration bank) E2.C3 1: Alarm direct + OR operation
2: Alarm direct + AND operation
3: Alarm reverse + OR operation
4: Alarm reverse + AND operation
Internal event 3 configuration 3 0000
(event configuration bank) E3.C3 2nd digit: Special OFF setting
0: No special OFF
1: If the main setting for the event is
Internal event 4 configuration 3 0, the event is OFF. 0000
(event configuration bank) E4.C3 3rd digit: Delay time unit setting
0: 0.1 s
1: 1 s
Internal event 5 configuration 3 0000
(event configuration bank) E5.C3 2: 1 min
4th digit: Undefined
0: Undefined

• If internal event configuration 1 operation type is set to 0 (no event), internal

event configuration 3 (alarm OR, special OFF, delay time unit) is not displayed.

The relationship between the alarm OR setting, alarm occurrence, and internal
event ON/OFF is shown below.

Alarm OR setting Alarm occurrence Internal event Internal event

status before alarm status after alarm
OR processing OR processing
None No OFF OFF
No ON ON
Yes OFF OFF
Yes ON ON
Alarm direct + OR No OFF OFF
operation No ON ON
Yes OFF ON
Yes ON ON
Alarm direct + AND No OFF OFF
operation No ON OFF
Yes OFF OFF
Yes ON ON
Alarm reverse + OR No OFF ON
operation No ON ON
Yes OFF OFF
Yes ON ON
Alarm reverse + AND No OFF OFF
operation No ON ON
Yes OFF OFF
Yes ON OFF

5-64
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Main setting, sub-setting,hysteresis

The main setting, sub-setting, and hysteresis associated with operation type can be set.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal event 1 main setting −1999 to +9999 0 Simple,
(event bank) E1 The number of decimal places in the PV standard,
advanced
changes according to the operation type.
For some operation types, the range is
0–9999.
Internal event 1 sub-setting −1999 to +9999 0
(event bank) E1.sb The number of decimal places in the PV
changes according to the operation type.
For some operation types, the range is
0–9999.
Internal event 1 hysteresis 0 to 9999 5
(event bank) E1.HY The number of decimal places in the PV
changes according to the operation type.
Internal event 2 main setting Same as internal event 1 main setting 0
(event bank) E2
Internal event 2 sub-setting Same as internal event 1 sub-setting 0
(event bank) E2.sb
Internal event 2 hysteresis Same as internal event 1 hysteresis 5
(event bank) E2.HY
Internal event 3 main setting Same as internal event 1 main setting 0
(event bank) E3
Internal event 3 sub-setting Same as internal event 1 sub-setting 0
(event bank) E3.sb
Internal event 3 hysteresis Same as internal event 1 hysteresis 5
(event bank) E3.HY
Internal event 4 main setting Same as internal event 1 main setting 0
(event bank) E4
Internal event 4 sub-setting Same as internal event 1 sub-setting 0
(event bank) E4.sb
Internal event 4 hysteresis Same as internal event 1 hysteresis 5
(event bank) E4.HY
Internal event 5 main setting Same as internal event 1 main setting 0
(event bank) E5
Internal event 5 sub-setting Same as internal event 1 sub-setting 0
(event bank) E5.sb
Internal event 5 hysteresis Same as internal event 1 hysteresis 5
(event bank) E5.HY
• If internal event configuration 1 operation type is set to 0 (no event), internal
event main setting, sub-setting, and hysteresis are not displayed.

• For the operation of internal events according to the main setting, sub-setting,
and hysteresis, see Operation (p.5-56 to 5-61.)

5-65
Chapter 5. Functions

„ ON delay time, OFF delay time

ON delay is a function that delays the timing at which the internal event status is
changed from OFF to ON.

OFF delay is a function that delays the timing at which the internal event status is
changed from ON to OFF.

Note that, if the operation type is set to 20 (loop diagnosis 1), 21 (loop diagnosis 2),
22 (loop diagnosis 3), or 32 (timer), it operates as a different function.
“ Operation (p.5-56 to 5-61.)

The ON delay time and OFF delay time can be specified by the parameters below.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal event 1 ON delay 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s Advanced
time E1.On (when “delay time unit” = 0.1 s) or 0 s
(event bank) 0 to 9999 s
(when “delay time unit” = something other than 0.1 s)
Internal event 1 OFF delay 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
time E1.Of (when “delay time unit” = 0.1 s) or 0 s
(event bank) 0 to 9999 s
(when “delay time unit” = something other than 0.1 s)
Internal event 2 ON delay 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
time E2.On (when “delay time unit” = 0.1 s) or 0 s
(event bank) 0 to 9999 s
(when “delay time unit” = something other than 0.1 s)
Internal event 2 OFF delay 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
time E2.Of (when “delay time unit” = 0.1 s) or 0 s
(event bank) 0 to 9999 s
(when “delay time unit” = something other than 0.1 s)
Internal event 3 ON delay 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
time E3.On (when “delay time unit” = 0.1 s) or 0 s
(event bank) 0 to 9999 s
(when “delay time unit” = something other than 0.1 s)
Internal event 3 OFF delay 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
time E3.Of (when “delay time unit” = 0.1 s) or 0 s
(event bank) 0 to 9999 s
(when “delay time unit” = something other than 0.1 s)
Internal event 4 ON delay 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
time E4.On (when “delay time unit” = 0.1 s) or 0 s
(event bank) 0 to 9999 s
(when “delay time unit” = something other than 0.1 s)
Internal event 4 OFF delay 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
time E4.Of (when “delay time unit” = 0.1 s) or 0 s
(event bank) 0 to 9999 s
(when “delay time unit” = something other than 0.1 s)

5-66
 Chapter 5. Functions

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Internal event 5 ON delay 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s Advanced
time E5.On (when “delay time unit” = 0.1 s) or 0 s
(event bank) 0 to 9999 s
(when “delay time unit” = something other than 0.1 s)
Internal event 5 OFF delay 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
time E5.Of (when “delay time unit” = 0.1 s) or 0 s
(event bank) 0 to 9999 s
(when “delay time unit” = something other than 0.1 s)

• If internal event configuration 1 operation type is set to 0 (no event), internal

event ON delay time and OFF delay time are not displayed.

5-67
Chapter 5. Functions

5-9 Digital Output (DO)

The following is a functional block diagram for digital output (DO).

MV1 processing:
ON/OFF control output, time proportional
output, heating time proportional output
of heating/cooling control
MV2 processing:
Cooling time proportional output of
heating/cooling control
(Parameter bank: Cy, Cy2, tP.ty)

MV1 and MV2 control output status

When using the default output When using control output When using output assignment

Default output Control output Output assignment

(DO assignment bank: Ot1.1, Ot2.1, (DO assignment bank: Ot1.1, Ot2.1, (DO assignment bank: Ot1.1,
Ev1.1 to Ev3.1 must be set to “default Ev1.1 to Ev3.1 must be set to “MV1” or Ot2.1, Ev1.1 to Ev3.1 must be set to
output”) “MV2”) one of functions 1 to 4)

MV1 and MV2 control output MV1 and MV2 control output MV1 and MV2 control output
status status status

Internal event status Internal event status

Output from each DO (terminal) Output from each DO (terminal) Output assignment and polarity
Control output: MV1 (DO assignment bank: Ot1.1, Ot2.1, (DO assignment bank: output
Control output: MV2 Ev1.1, Ev2.1, Ev3.1) assignment A to D: Ot1.2 to Ot2.6,
Event output 1: internal event 1 Ev1.2 to Ev3.6)
Event output 2: internal event 2
Event output 3: internal event 3

Output bit functions 1 to 4

(DO assignment bank: operation
type: Ot1.1 to Ot2.1, Ev1.1 to Ev3.1)

Function result polarity

(DO assignment bank: polarity:
Ot1.7 to Ot2.7, Ev1.7 to Ev3.7)

Output latch
(DO assignment bank: latch: Ot1.8
to Ot2.8, Ev1.8 to Ev3.8)

Control outputs 1 to 2
Event outputs 1 to 3

5-68
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ MV1/MV2 processing
The time proportional cycle and time proportional cycle mode for MV1 and MV2
can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Time proportional cycle 1 5 to 120 s 10 or 2 s Simple,
(for MV1) CY (when the output includes the relay
output)
standard,
advanced
(parameter bank)
Time proportional cycle 2 1 to 120 s 10 or 2 s
(for MV2) CY2 (when the output does not include the
relay output)
(parameter bank)
Time proportional cycle mode 0: Priority on controllability 0 or 1 Advanced
(parameter bank) TP.TY 1: P
 riority on actuator service life (only
one ON/OFF operation in a time
proportional cycle)
Time proportional minimum 0 to 250 ms 0 Advanced
ON/OFF time 1 (for MV1) TPO
(parameter bank)
Time proportional minimum 0 to 250 ms 0 Advanced
ON/OFF time 2 (for MV2) TPO2
(parameter bank)

• MV1: ON/OFF control output, time proportional output, heating time

proportional output of heating/cooling control
MV2: Cooling time proportional output of heating/cooling control

• In the DO assignment bank, if MV1 is connected to any of relay control output,

voltage pulse control output, or event output, time proportional cycle 1 (Cy) is
displayed and the setting can be changed.

• If heating/cooling control is used and, in the DO assignment bank, if MV2 is

connected to any of relay control output, voltage pulse control output, or event
output, time proportional cycle 2 (Cy2) is displayed and the setting can be
changed.

• The initial value of time proportional cycle 1 (Cy) is 2 if the control output 1 is a
voltage pulse output, and 10 otherwise.

• The initial value of time proportional cycle 2 (Cy2) is 2 if the control output 2 is a
voltage pulse output, and 10 otherwise.

• The time proportional cycle mode (tP.ty) setting is valid for both MV1 and MV2
time proportional outputs.

• If MV1 is connected to the relay control output or event output in the DO

assignment bank and if time proportional cycle 1 (Cy) is set to shorter than 5 s,
5 s applies.

• If MV2 is connected to the relay control output or event output in the DO

assignment bank and if time proportional cycle 2 (Cy2) is set to shorter than 5 s,
5 s applies.

5-69
Chapter 5. Functions

• The minimum ON/OFF time is the minimum time to maintain the output status
after switching the output ON/OFF. Until this time elapses, the output status is
maintained even if the time to switch ON/OFF comes.

• If time proportional minimum ON/OFF time 1 = 0: If MV1 is connected to

the relay control output or event output in the DO assignment bank, or if time
proportional cycle 1 is 10 s or longer, 250 ms applies. Otherwise, 1 ms applies.

• If time proportional minimum ON/OFF time 1 = 1–250: If MV1 is connected to

the relay control output or event output in the DO assignment bank, and if the
setting is 1–49, 50 ms applies. If the setting is 50–250, the set value applies.

• If time proportional minimum ON/OFF time 2 = 0: If MV2 is connected to

the relay control output or event output in the DO assignment bank, or if time
proportional cycle 2 is 10 s or longer, 250 ms applies. Otherwise, 1 ms applies.

• If time proportional minimum ON/OFF time 2 = 1–250: If MV2 is connected to

the relay control output or event output in the DO assignment bank, and if the
setting is 1–49, 50 ms applies. If the setting is 50–250, the set value applies.

Handling Precautions
• The shorter the time proportional cycle, the better the controllability.
However, when specifying the settings, please take the electrical service
life of the relay into consideration.

5-70
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Operation type
The operation type of control outputs 1–2 and event outputs 1–3 can be specified in
the DO assignment bank.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control output 1 operation type 0: Default output 0 Advanced
(DO bank) Ot1.1 1: MV1
Control output 2 operation type 0
(DO bank) Ot2.1 2: MV2
3: Function 1, (A and B) or (C and D)
Event output 1 operation type 0
(DO bank) Ev1.1 4: Function 2, (A or B) and (C or D)
5: Function 3, (A or B or C or D)
Event output 2 operation type 0
(DO bank) Ev2.1 6: Function 4, (A and B and C and D)

Event output 3 operation type 0

(DO bank) Ev3.1
• If relay output or voltage pulse output is set as the control output by the model
No., the operation type setting of control outputs 1–2 (ot1.1 to ot2.1) is displayed
and can be changed.

• If a model with event relay outputs is used, the operation type setting of event
outputs 1–3 (Ev1.1 to Ev3.1) is displayed and can be changed.

• MV1: ON/OFF control output, time proportional output, heating time

proportional output of heating/cooling control
MV2: Cooling time proportional output of heating/cooling control

• When set to 0 (default output), the following will be output:

Control output 1: MV1 control output status

Control output 2: MV2 control output status
Event output 1: Internal event 1 processing result
Event output 2: Internal event 2 processing result
Event output 3: Internal event 3 processing result

• An output bit function is a combination of logical functions (AND, OR) for

each of the control outputs and event outputs. Functions 1 to 4 have different
combinations of logical operations. The following explains each logical function:

AND function OR function

OFF and OFF = OFF OFF or OFF = OFF
OFF and ON = OFF OFF or ON = ON
ON and OFF = OFF ON or OFF = ON
ON and ON = ON ON or ON = ON

5-71
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Output assignment
The four inputs (A, B, C, D) used for output bit functions can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control output 1 output assignment A 0: Normally open (normally off = 0) 14 Advanced
(DO assignment bank) Ot1.2 1: Normally closed (normally on = 1)
Control output 1 output assignment B 0
(DO assignment bank) OT1.3 2: Internal event 1
3: Internal event 2
Control output 1 output assignment C 0
(DO assignment bank) OT1.4 4: Internal event 3
5: Internal event 4
Control output 1 output assignment D 0
(DO assignment bank) OT1.5 6: Internal event 5

Control output 2 output assignment A 7 to 13: Undefined 15

(DO assignment bank) OT2.2 14: MV ON/OFF status 1
Control output 2 output assignment B 15: MV ON/OFF status 2 0
(DO assignment bank) OT2.3 16 to 17: Undefined
Control output 2 output assignment C 0
(DO assignment bank) OT2.4 18: DI1
19: DI2
Control output 2 output assignment D 0
(DO assignment bank) OT2.5 20 to 25: Undefined
26: Internal contact 1
Event output 1 output assignment A 2
(DO assignment bank) EV1.2 27: Internal contact 2
28: Internal contact 3
Event output 1 output assignment B 0
(DO assignment bank) EV1.3 29: Internal contact 4

Event output 1 output assignment C 30: Internal contact 5 0

(DO assignment bank) EV1.4 31 to 33: Undefined
Event output 1 output assignment D 0
EV1.5
34: User-defined bit 1
(DO assignment bank) 35: User-defined bit 2
Event output 2 output assignment A 3
(DO assignment bank) EV2.2 36: User-defined bit 3
37: User-defined bit 4
Event output 2 output assignment B 0
(DO assignment bank) EV2.3 38: MANUAL mode
39: READY mode
Event output 2 output assignment C 0
(DO assignment bank) EV2.4 40: Undefined

Event output 2 output assignment D 41: AT (Auto-Tuning) 0

(DO assignment bank) EV2.5 42: During SP ramp
Event output 3 output assignment A 4
EV3.2
43: Undefined
(DO assignment bank) 44: Alarm (AL01 to AL96)
Event output 3 output assignment B 0
(DO assignment bank) EV3.3 45: PV alarm (AL01 to AL03)
46: Undefined
Event output 3 output assignment C 0
(DO assignment bank) EV3.4 47: [MODE] key status
48: Event output 1 terminal status
Event output 3 output assignment D 0
(DO assignment bank) EV3.5 49: Control output 1 terminal status

5-72
 Chapter 5. Functions

• If relay output or voltage pulse output is set as the control output by the model
No. and if one of functions 1 to 4 is set for the operation type of control outputs
1–2 (ot1.1 to ot2.1), the output assignment A–D setting of control outputs 1–2
(ot1.2 to ot2.5) is displayed and can be changed.

• If a model with event relay outputs is used and if one of functions 1 to 4 is set for
the operation type of event outputs 1–3 (ev1.1 to ev3.1), the output assignment
A–D setting of event outputs 1–3 (ev1.2 to ev3.5) is displayed and can be changed.

„ Output assignment polarity

Whether to reverse the data assigned to the four inputs (A, B, C, D) used for output
bit functions can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control output 1 polarity A to D “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 0000 Advanced
(DO assignment bank) OT1.6 (etc.) from the right.

Control output 2 polarity A to D 0000

OT2.6
1st digit: Polarity of output assignment A
(DO assignment bank) 2nd digit: Polarity of output assignment B
Event output 1 polarity A to D 0000
(DO assignment bank) EV1.6 3rd digit: Polarity of output assignment C
4th digit: Polarity of output assignment D
Event output 2 polarity A to D 0000
(DO assignment bank) EV2.6 0: Direct

Event output 3 polarity A to D 1: Reverse 0000

(DO assignment bank) EV3.6
• If relay output or voltage pulse output is set as the control output by the model
No. and if one of functions 1 to 4 is set for the operation type of control outputs
1–2 (ot1.1 to ot2.1), the polarity A–D setting of control outputs 1–2 (ot1.6 to
ot2.6) is displayed and can be changed.

• If a model with event relay outputs is used and if one of functions 1 to 4 is set for
the operation type of event outputs 1–3 (ev1.1 to ev3.1), the polarity A–D setting
of event outputs 1–3 (ev1.6 to ev3.6) is displayed and can be changed.

Handling Precautions
• Depending on the conditions, the output relay may turn on and off
quickly and repeatedly. To prevent this, observe the following:
• If 49 (control output 1 terminal status) is set for any of control output 1
output assignments A to D (Ot1.2 to Ot1.5), do not set 1 (reverse) as the
output assignment polarity for the same letter.
• If 48 (event output 1 terminal status) is set for any of event output 1
output assignments A to D (EV1.2 to EV1.5), do not set 1 (reverse) as the
output assignment polarity for the same letter.

5-73
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Function result polarity

Whether to reverse the results of output bit functions 1 to 4 can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control output 1 polarity 0: Direct 0 Advanced
(DO assignment bank) OT1.7 1: Reverse
Control output 2 polarity 0
(DO assignment bank) OT2.7
Event output 1 polarity 0
(DO assignment bank) EV1.7
Event output 2 polarity 0
(DO assignment bank) EV2.7
Event output 3 polarity 0
(DO assignment bank) EV3.7
• If relay output or voltage pulse output is set as the control output by the model
No. and if one of functions 1 to 4 is set for the operation type of control outputs
1–2 (ot1.1 to ot2.1), the polarity setting of control outputs 1–2 (ot1.7 to ot2.7) is
displayed and can be changed.

• If a model with event relay outputs is used and if one of functions 1 to 4 is set for
the operation type of event outputs 1–3 (ev1.1 to ev3.1), the polarity setting of
event outputs 1–3 (ev1.7 to ev3.7) is displayed and can be changed.

„ Latch
Whether to latch the output when it is ON or OFF can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control output 1 latch 0: Do not latch 0 Advanced
(DO assignment bank) OT1.8 1: Latch when ON
Control output 2 latch 0
(DO assignment bank) OT2.8 2: Latch when OFF (except for initialization
at power-on)
Event output 1 latch 0
(DO assignment bank) EV1.8
Event output 2 latch 0
(DO assignment bank) EV2.8
Event output 3 latch 0
(DO assignment bank) EV3.8
• If relay output or voltage pulse output is set as the control output by the model
No. and if one of functions 1 to 4 is set for the operation type of control outputs
1–2 (ot1.1 to ot2.1), the latch operation setting of control outputs 1–2 (ot1.8 to
ot2.8) is displayed and can be changed.

• If a model with event relay outputs is used and if one of functions 1 to 4 is set
for the operation type of event outputs 1–3 (ev1.1 to ev3.1), the latch operation
setting of event outputs 1–3 (ev1.8 to ev3.8) is displayed and can be changed.

5-74
 Chapter 5. Functions

• To release the latches, do any of the following operations: turn the power off and
then back on, set “release all DO latches” (do.Lt) to Lt.OF (latch release) using the
keys or communication, or change the above latch setting in the DO assignment
bank to 0 (do not latch).

Handling Precautions
• When output assignments A–D are set to “14” (MV ON/OFF status 1) or
“15” (MV ON/OFF status 2), [Latch] can be set to “1” (latch when ON) or “2”
(latch when OFF) only if the ROM version is 1.01 or later.

„ DO assignment by Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F

When specifying the settings in the DO assignment bank using Smart Loader
Package model SLP-C1F, select [Edit] → [Input/Output port setup] from the
input menu. This will display a screen for easy setup of the output bit function
type, output assignment, output assignment polarity, function result polarity, and
whether to latch the output.
Select an output bit function. Select the setting for the Select whether to reverse
The ladder changes depending on the selected function. four outputs A to D. the bit function result.

Select whether to reverse assignments A to D. Select whether to latch the output state.

Handling Precautions
• In addition to selecting from the menu, you can also open the [Input/
Output port setup] screen by the following operations.
• Click the I/O port setting icon
• Right-click an output bit function setting
• Press Ctrl + P

5-75
Chapter 5. Functions

5 - 10 Application Examples
This section gives examples of applications that use the assignment function of this device.

„ Applications using the assignment function

This section gives examples of settings using Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F.
To use the assignment function, set the user level to “Advanced (High function)” first.

z Example 1: Output OR of heater burnout and PV high limit alarm

Overview: Set the PV high limit for internal event 1.
Set heater burnout for internal event 2.
Output the OR of the above outputs to the EV1 relay.
(1) Select [Event] under [Standard] and set [1: PV high limit] for [Internal event 1].
(2) In the same manner, set [16: Heater 1 burnout/overcurrent] for [Internal
event 2].

5-76
 Chapter 5. Functions

(3) Select [DO Assignment] under [Option], right-click the operation type field of
[EV1], and select [Input/Output port setup].

(4) On the [Input/Output port setup] screen, configure the settings as shown
below.

(A) Select [Function 1] to output the OR of two operations.

(B) Select [Internal event 1 (setting = 1: PV high limit)] for output assignment A.

(C) I n the same manner, select [Internal event 2 (setting = 16: heater 1
burnout/overcurrent] for output assignment C.

(D) Select [Normally closed (normally on = 1)] for output assignments B and D.
(A)

(D)
(B)

(C)

5-77
Chapter 5. Functions

z Example 2: Start operation by switching to RUN mode with an external switch, and stop operation
by automatically switching to READY mode 30 minutes after the set point is reached.

Temperature

Set point

30 min Time
Control ON Control OFF

z Explanation

Timer start condition: AND of the external switch (DI1) and the target temperature
(internal event 2: deviation high limit)

Timer ON delay time: the desired amount of time between the time when the set
point is reached and when operation stops automatically

The mode (RUN/READY) changes depending on the combination of the DI1 status
and timer ON/OFF.

Status Control OFF Operation started, Time elapsed,

timer counting operation stopped
DI1 OFF ON ON
Timer (internal EV2) OFF OFF ON
Internal contact 2 ON OFF ON
status
Mode READY RUN READY

5-78
 Chapter 5. Functions

z Sample settings

• Event

Event Display Internal event 1 Internal event 2

Operation type E _ .C1 32: Timer 4: Deviation high limit
Direct/reverse E _ .C2 ---- 0: Direct
Standby E _ .C2 ---- 0: No standby
Event state in E _ .C2 0: Continues 0: Continues
READY
Alarm OR E _ .C3 0: None 0: None
Special OFF E _ .C3 ---- 0: No special OFF
Delay time unit E _ .C3 2: 1 min 0: 0.1 s
Event main E_ ---- 0
setting (low limit)
Event sub-setting E _ .SB ---- ----
(high limit)
Hysteresis E _ H. Y ---- 5
ON delay time E _ .ON 30 0
OFF delay time E _ .OF 0 0

_: Internal event No.

• DI assignment

DI assignment Display Internal contact 1 Internal contact 2

Operation type DI_ .1 17: Timer stop/start 7: RUN/READY
Input bit function DI_ .2 1: F unction 1, (A and B) or (C 1: F unction 1, (A and B) or (C
and D) and D)
Input assignment DI_ .3 2: DI1 2: DI1
A
Input assignment DI_ .4 11: I nternal event 2 (setting 10: I nternal event 1 (setting
B = 4: Deviation high limit) = 32: Timer (status))
Input assignment DI_ .5 0: N
 ormally open (normally 0: N
 ormally open (normally
C OFF = 0) OFF = 0)
Input assignment DI_ .6 0: N
 ormally open (normally 0: N
 ormally open (normally
D OFF = 0) OFF = 0)
Polarity A DI_ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity B DI_ .7 0: Direct 1: Reverse
Polarity C DI_ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity D DI_ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity DI_ .8 0: Direct 1: Reverse
Internal event No. DI_ .9 1 ----
assignment

_ : Internal contact No.

5-79
Chapter 5. Functions

z Key points for configuration

Timer start condition: AND of DI1 and the target temperature (internal event 2:
deviation high limit)

Condition for RUN/ READY mode switching: AND of DI (input A) and the timer
(input B). However, because the mode will be READY when the internal contacts
are ON, the function result is reversed at the final stage of the internal contact 2
processing.

DI assignment (internal contact 1): Input/output port setup

AND of DI1 and deviation high limit event Contacts starting the timer

5-80
 Chapter 5. Functions

DI assignment (internal contact 2): Input/output port setup

AND of DI1 (input A) and Reversed at this point because the mode Contacts switching the
the timer (input B) will be READY when internal contact 2 is ON. mode (RUN/READY)

z Example 3: Simple operation

SP

T2
T1

[MODE] key

z Explanation

When [MODE] is pressed, this device enters RUN mode and the PV starts to
change.

The SP increases (or decreases) according to the ramp setting.

When the final SP is reached and the PV is within a certain range, the timer starts
counting. After T2 hours, this device enters READY mode.

5-81
Chapter 5. Functions

z Sample settings

• Event

Event Display Internal event 1 Internal event 2

Operation type E _ .C1 9: D
 eviation high and low 32: Timer (status)
limits (final SP reference)
Direct/Reverse E _ .C2 1: Reverse ----
Standby E _ .C2 0: No standby ----
Event state in E _ .C2 1: Forced OFF 0: Continues
READY
Alarm OR E _ .C3 0: None 0: None
Special OFF E _ .C3 0: No special OFF ----
Delay time unit E _ .C3 0: 0.1 s 0: 0.1 s
Event main E_ 3 ----
setting (low limit)
Event sub-setting E _ .SB 3 ----
(high limit)
Hysteresis E _ H. Y 9999 ----
ON delay E _ .ON 2 15
OFF delay E_ .OF 0 0

_ : Internal event No.

• DI assignment

DI assignment Display Internal contact 1 Internal contact 2

Operation type DI_ .1 7: RUN/READY 17: Timer stop/start
Input bit function DI_ .2 1: F unction 1, (A and B) or (C 1: Function 1, (A and B) or (C
and D) and D)
Input assignment DI_ .3 18: User-defined bit 1 10: I nternal event 1 (setting
A = 9: Deviation high
and low limits (final SP
reference))
Input assignment DI_ .4 11: I nternal event 2 (setting 26: During SP ramp
B = 32: Timer (status))
Input assignment DI_ .5 0: N ormally open (normally 18: User-defined bit 1
C OFF = 0)
Input assignment DI_ .6 0: N ormally open (normally 11: I nternal event 2 (setting
D OFF = 0) = 32: Timer (status))
Polarity A DI_ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity B DI_ .7 1: Reverse 1: Reverse
Polarity C DI_ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity D DI_ .7 0: Direct 0: Direct
Polarity DI_ .8 1: Reverse 0: Direct
Internal event No. DI_ .9 ---- 2
assignment

_ : Internal contact No.

5-82
 Chapter 5. Functions

z Other

C72 ([MODE] key function): 7 (user-defined bit 1 switching)

SP up ramp and down ramp: any

z Key points for configuration

The internal event 1 is a substitute for the guaranteed soak.

Therefore, set the hysteresis of event 1 to “9999” so that the event will not turn OFF
even if the PV fluctuates after it is turned ON.

DI assignment (internal contact 1): Input/output port setup

AND of user-defined bit 1 (input A) Reversed at this point because the mode Contacts switching the
and the timer (input B) will be READY when internal contact 2 is ON. mode (RUN/READY)

5-83
Chapter 5. Functions

DI assignment (internal contact 2): Input/output port setup

Guaranteed soak conditions (RAMP has ended and the SP is within the deviation of the final SP)

Timer remains ON when counting ends to prevent it from restarting Contacts starting the timer
when the PV changes.

5-84
 Chapter 5. Functions

5 - 11 Continuous output
The following is a functional block diagram for continuous output.

Output range type (Setup bank: C42, C47)

Output type (Setup bank: C43, C48)

Output scaling low/high limit (Setup bank: C44, C45, C49, C50)

Continuous output (current output)

„ Output range
The output range can be set for the current output.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control output 1 range 1: 4 to 20 mA 1 Simple,
(setup bank) C 42 2: 0 to 20 mA
standard,
advanced
Control output 2 range 1
(setup bank) C 47
• These items are displayed and the settings can be changed if current output is set
as the control output.

5-85
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Output type
The type of current output can be set.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control output 1 type 0: MV 0 Simple,
(setup bank) C 43 1: Heating MV (for heating/cooling control)
standard,
advanced
2: Cooling MV (for heating/cooling control)
3: PV

Control output 2 type 4: PV (before applying ratio, bias, filter) 3

(setup bank) C 48 5: SP
6: Deviation (PV − SP)
7: CT1 current
8: CT2 current
9: Invalid
10: SP+MV
11: PV+MV

• These items are displayed and the settings can be changed if current output is set
as the control output.

• The MV scaling width is used for calculation of SP + MV and PV + MV.

MV scaling width (p. 5-88) (for details)

5-86
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Output scaling low/high limit

Output scaling low and high limits can be set for the current output.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control output 1 scaling low limit −1999 to +9999 0.0 Simple,
(setup bank) C 44 The number of decimal places changes
standard,
advanced
Control output 1 scaling high limit according to the output type. 100.0
(setup bank) C 45 Either of the following units is used
Control output 2 scaling low limit depending on the output type. 0
(setup bank) C 49 Output type = 0–2: % (of the MV)
Control output 2 scaling high limit Output type = 3–6: same as the PV (°C, etc.) 1000
(setup bank) C 50 Output type = 7–8: A (current)

• These items are displayed and the settings can be changed if current output is set
as the control output.

• The relationship between the output type and the output based on the output
scaling low and high limit settings is shown in the figure below.

Output (%) Output (%)

110 110
100 100

0 0
−10 Input −10 Input
Low limit High limit High limit Low limit
Low limit < high limit Low limit > high limit

However, in the 0–20 mA range the output is 0–110 %.

5-87
Chapter 5. Functions

„ MV scaling width
If the output type is set to either SP + MV or PV + MV, the output can be made
continuous by adding the change in the MV to the SP or PV.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Control output 1 MV scaling width 0 to 9999 200 Simple,
(setup bank) C 46 The number of decimal places and the
standard,
advanced
Control output 2 MV scaling width unit are the same as the PV. 200
(setup bank) C 51
• These items are displayed and the settings can be changed if the output type of
control output 1 or 2 is set to SP + MV or PV + MV.

• The value calculated by the following expression is output according to the output
scaling low and high limit settings.

SP + MV: (MV − 50.0) / 100.0 × MV scaling width + SP

PV + MV: (MV − 50.0) / 100.0 × MV scaling width + PV
↑ SP
Output (%)
110
100

Change in
output due
to the MV

MV
scaling width

0
−10
Input →
Scaling low limit 0 % 50 % 100 % Scaling high limit

Change in the MV
When the output type is SP + MV

Handling Precautions
• This function is used when the continuous output from the C1M is connected
to the remote SP (RSP) input of another controller for the purpose of cascade
control in which the C1M operates as the master and another controller
operates as a slave. Set the width of the RSP that changes in conjunction with
the change in the MV (0−100 %) of the C1M as the MV scaling width.

5-88
 Chapter 5. Functions

5 - 12 Current Transformer (CT) Input

There are two types of current values input from the CT input terminals.

• Current when output ON: Used for heater burnout/overcurrent events. It can be displayed as CT current.

• Current when output OFF: Used for heater short-circuit events. It cannot be displayed.

If C36 or C39 (CT operation type) is set to 0 (heater burnout detection):

Current when output ON: The CT current measured when the output specified by “CT output” is ON

Current when output OFF: The CT current measured when the output specified by “CT output” is OFF

If C36 or C39 (CT operation type) is set to 1 (current measurement):

Current when output ON: The CT current measured regardless of whether the output is ON or OFF

Current when output OFF: Always 0.0 A

The following is a functional block diagram for CT input.

CT operation type
(Setup bank: C36, C39)

Heater burnout detection Current measurement

Output status (ON/OFF) monitoring

(Setup bank: C37, C40)

Waiting for measurement

(Setup bank: C38, C41)

Output is ON Output is OFF

Current when output ON

Current when output ON Current when output OFF Current when output OFF = 0 A

Handling Precautions
• The current when the output is ON is used if the operation type of the internal
event is set to heater burnout/overcurrent.
The current when the output is OFF is used if the operation type of the internal
event is set to heater short.

5-89
Chapter 5. Functions

„ CT operation type
Different operations can be set for CT inputs 1 and 2.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

CT1 operation type 0: Heater burnout detection 0 Simple,
(setup bank) C 36 1: Current measurement
standard,
advanced
CT2 operation type 0
(setup bank) C 39
• These items are displayed and the settings can be changed if a model with two CT
inputs is used.

• If current measurement is selected, the current when the output is ON is updated

regardless of the ON/OFF status of the output, and the current when the output is
OFF is always 0.0 A.

„ CT output
When the CT operation type is heater burnout detection, an output whose ON/OFF
is monitored can be specified.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

CT1 output 0: Control output 1 0 Simple,
(setup bank) C 37 1: Control output 2
standard,
advanced
CT2 output 0
(setup bank) C 40 2: Event output 1
3: Event output 2
4: Event output 3

• These items are displayed and the settings can be changed if a model with two CT
inputs is used and the CT operation type is set to heater burnout detection.

„ CT measurement wait time

When the CT operation type is heater burnout detection, the time from the change
in the output ON/OFF status to the start of the current measurement can be set.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

CT1 measurement wait time 30 to 300 ms 30 ms Simple,
(setup bank) C 38 standard,
advanced
CT2 measurement wait time 30 ms
(setup bank) C 41
• These items are displayed and the settings can be changed if a model with two CT
inputs is used and the CT operation type is set to heater burnout detection.

• Current measurement starts when the measurement waiting time elapses after the
change in the ON/OFF status of the monitored output, and it ends when 100 ms
elapses.

5-90
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Number of CT turns / number of CT power wire passes

Different settings can be specified for CT inputs 1 and 2.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Number of CT1 turns 0: 800 8 Advanced
(setup bank) C 90 1–40: CT turns divided by 100
Number of CT1 power wire passes 0: 1 1
(setup bank) C 91 1–6: The set value
Number of CT2 turns 0: 800 8
(setup bank) C 92 1–40: CT turns divided by 100
Number of CT2 power wire passes 0: 1 1
(setup bank) C 93 1–6: The set value

• These items are displayed and the settings can be changed if a model with two CT
inputs is used.

• For the number of turns, set the number of turns of the CT connected to this
device divided by 100.
For example, if the number of CT turns is 400, set 4.
Note that, if 0 is set, 800 turns apply (same result as when 8 is set).

• The optional CTs, models QN206A and QN212A, have 800 turns, so set 8 for
them. For the number of power wire passes, set the number of times that the
power wire passes through the hole in the CT.
For example, if the power wire passes through the hole of the CT twice as shown
below, set 2.
Note that, if 0 is set, 1 applies (same result as when 1 is set).

→ To relay,
power supply, etc.
Power wire
To heater, etc. ←

CT

CT input
Model C1M

5-91
Chapter 5. Functions

Handling Precautions
• Make sure that the current does not exceed the high limit of the CT input that
can be displayed. Exceeding the high limit may cause malfunction.
• If this device detects a current exceeding the high limit of the CT input that
can be displayed, a CT input error alarm (AL11) will be generated. However, if
the current is so large that a malfunction occurs, the CT input error alarm will
not be generated.
• The display range and the current measurement range of the CT input vary
depending on the number of turns and power wire passes of the CT.
Make sure to specify settings that match the number of turns and power wire
passes of the connected CT.
The display range and the current measurement range are calculated using
the expression below.
(The calculation by this device has a margin of error of 0.1 A or less.)
Display range low limit (A) = 0.0
Display range high limit (A) = Number of turns ÷ (16 × number of power
wire passes) × 1.4
Current measurement range low limit (A) = Number of turns ÷ (2000 ×
number of power wire passes)
Current measurement range high limit (A) = Number of turns ÷ (16 ×
number of power wire passes)
The table below shows an example of the display range and the current
measurement range determined by the number of turns and power wire
passes of the CT. The current measurement range is shown in parentheses.

 Number of 100 400 800 1600 4000

turns
Number of
power wire passes
1 0.0 to 8.7 A 0.0 to 35.0 A 0.0 to 70.0 A 0.0 to 140.0 A 0.0 to 350.0 A
(0.1 to 6.2 A) (0.2 to 25.0 A) (0.4 to 50.0 A) (0.8 to 100.0 A) (2.0 to 250.0 A)
2 0.0 to 4.3 A 0.0 to 17.5 A 0.0 to 35.0 A 0.0 to 70.0 A 0.0 to 175.0 A
(0.1 to 3.1 A) (0.1 to 12.5 A) (0.2 to 25.0 A) (0.4 to 50.0 A) (1.0 to 125.0 A)
6 0.0 to 1.4 A 0.0 to 5.8 A 0.0 to 11.6 A 0.0 to 23.3 A 0.0 to 58.3 A
(0.1 to 1.0 A) (0.1 to 4.1 A) (0.1 to 8.3 A) (0.2 to 16.6 A) (0.4 to 41.6 A)

5-92
 Chapter 5. Functions

5 - 13 Display on the Console and Key Operation

What is displayed on the console and the use of the keys can be customized.

„ Key operation mode

There are two key operation modes, standard and special, which can be selected by
the setting below.

2 - 2 Key Operation (p. 2-2) (for details about the two modes)

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Key operation mode 0: Standard 0 Advanced
(setup bank) C 71 1: Special

„ [MODE] key function

The switching operation of the [MODE] key can be selected. Switching occurs when
the key is pressed for 1 second or longer while the operation display is shown.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

[MODE] key function 0: Invalid 1 Simple,
(setup bank) C 72 1: AUTO/MANUAL selection
standard,
advanced
2: RUN/READY selection
3: AT stop/start
4: LSP group selection
5: Release all DO latches
6: Invalid
7: User-defined bit 1
8: Invalid

Handling Precautions
• If CtrL (control method) is set to 0 (ON/OFF control), the AUTO/MANUAL
selection setting is invalid.
• If CtrL (control method) is set to 0 (ON/OFF control), or if the PV high/low
limit alarm is triggered, the AT stop/start setting is invalid.
• If C30 (LSP system group) is set to 1, the LSP group selection setting is
invalid.

5-93
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Mode display setup

Whether to display the mode settings in the mode bank can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Mode display setup Whether to display the settings in the 255 Standard,
(setup bank) C 73 mode bank is determined by the sum of
the weights shown below.
advanced

Bit 0: AUTO/MANUAL display

No: 0, Yes: +1
Bit 1: RUN/READY display
No: 0, Yes: +2
Bit 3: AT stop/start display
No: 0, Yes: +8
Bit 4: DO latch release display
No: 0, Yes: +16
Bit 5: User-defined bit 1 ON/OFF display
No: 0, Yes: +32
Invalid settings: 0, +4, +64, +128

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

AUTO/MANUAL display
RUN/READY display
Undefined
AT stop/start display
Release DO latches display
User-defined bit 1 ON/OFF display
Undefined
Undefined

• If Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F is used, the setting for C73 (mode
display setting) can be specified not only by a numerical value but also by bit
input.

Handling Precautions
• Even if AUTO/MANUAL display is enabled, if CtrL (control method) is
set to 0 (ON/OFF control), the AUTO/MANUAL selection setting is not
displayed.
• Even if AT stop/start display is enabled, if CtrL (control method) is set to
0 (ON/OFF control), the AT stop/start setting is not displayed.

5-94
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ PV/SP display setup

Whether to show PV- and SP-related settings on the operation display can be
selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

PV/SP display setup Whether to show the following items on 15 Standard,
(setup bank) C 74 the operation display is determined by the
sum of the weights shown below.
advanced

Bit 0: PV
No: 0. Yes: +1
Bit 1: SP
No: 0. Yes: +2
Bit 2: LSP group No.
No: 0. Yes: +4
Invalid settings: 0, +8

23 22 21 20

PV display
SP display
LSP group No. display
Undefined

• If Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F is used, the setting for C74 (PV/SP
display setup) can be specified not only by a numerical value but also by bit input.

Handling Precautions
• Even if LSP group No. display is enabled, if C30 (LSP system group) is set to
1, LSP group numbers are not displayed.

5-95
Chapter 5. Functions

„ MV display setup
Whether to show MV-related settings on the operation display can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

MV display setup Whether to show the following items on 15 Standard,
(setup bank) C 75 the operation display is determined by the
sum of the weights shown below.
advanced

Bit 0: MV
No: 0. Yes: +1
Bit 1: Heating MV / cooling MV
No: 0. Yes: +2
Bit 3: AT progress
No: 0. Yes: +8
Invalid settings: 0, +4

23 22 21 20

MV display
Heating/cooling MV display
Undefined
AT progress display

• If Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F is used, the setting for C75 (MV display
setup) can be specified not only by a numerical value but also by bit input.

Handling Precautions
• Even if heating/cooling MV display is enabled, if C26 (heat/cool control) is
set to 0 (not used), the heating/cooling MV is not displayed.
• Even if AT progress display is enabled, the progress is not displayed when
AT is not running.

5-96
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Event display setup

Whether to show the main- and sub-settings of internal events 1–3 on the operation
display can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

EV display setup 0: D
 o not show internal event settings on 0 Standard,
(setup bank) C 76 the operation display advanced
1: S how internal event 1 settings on the
operation display
2: S how internal event 1–2 settings on the
operation display
3: S how internal event 1–3 settings on the
operation display

Handling Precautions
• Even if internal event settings are set to be displayed, they are not
displayed if an internal event operation type that does not require main-
and sub-settings is specified.
• The main- and sub-settings of internal events 4–5 cannot be displayed on
the operation display.

„ Event remaining time display setup

Whether to show the ON/OFF delay remaining time of internal events 1–3 on the
operation display can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Event remaining time display 0: D
 o not show the ON/OFF delay 0 Standard,
setup C 77 remaining time of internal events on
the operation display
advanced
(setup bank)
1: S how the ON/OFF delay remaining time
of internal event 1 on the operation
display
2: S how the ON/OFF delay remaining time
of internal events 1–2 on the operation
display
3: S how the ON/OFF delay remaining time
of internal events 1–3 on the operation
display

Handling Precautions
• The ON/OFF delay remaining time of an internal event whose operation
type is set to “23” or higher can be shown on the operation display by
specifying [Event remaining time display setup] only if the ROM version
is 1.01 or later. With ROM version 1.00, do not change the initial value of
[Event remaining time display setup].
• Even if the internal event remaining time is set to be displayed, it is not
displayed if an internal event operation type that does not require display
of the remaining time is specified.
• The remaining time of internal events 4–5 cannot be displayed on the
operation display.
5-97
Chapter 5. Functions

„ CT input current display setup

Whether to show the CT current on the operation display can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

CT input current display setup 0: Do not show the CT current on the 1 Standard,
(setup bank) C 78 operation display advanced
1: Show the CT1 current on the operation
display
2: Show the CT1 and CT2 currents on the
operation display

• This item is displayed and the setting can be changed if a model with two CT
inputs is used.

„ User level
What is displayed on the console can be restricted by specifying the user level. The
higher the setting, the more displayed items.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

User level 0: Simple 0 Simple,
(setup bank) C 79 1: Standard
standard,
advanced
2: Advanced

„ Status indicator
The function of the status indicator can be selected.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Status indicator 0: Not used (always off ) 0 Advanced
(setup bank) C 80 1: Blinks when sending RS-485
communication data
2: Blinks when receiving RS-485
communication data
3: OR (logical sum) of all DI states
4: Always OFF

5-98
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ User-defined function
Up to eight more settings selected from various settings can be displayed as user-
defined functions 1–8 on the operation display.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

User function 1 Displayed characters are defined for each item. The ---- Standard,
(user function bank) UF-1 following are special cases. advanced

User function 2 ----

(user function bank) UF-2 ---- : Unregistered
User function 3 ----
(user function bank) UF-3 P-_: Proportional band of the PID in use
I-_: Integral time of the PID in use
User function 4 ----
(user function bank) UF-4 d-_: Derivative time of the PID in use
rE-_: Manual reset of the PID in use
User function 5 ----
(user function bank) UF-5 OL-_: MV low limit of the PID in use

User function 6 OH-_: MV high limit of the PID in use ----

(user function bank) UF-6 P-_C: Proportional band for cooling of the PID in use
User function 7 I-_C: Integral time for cooling of the PID in use ----
(user function bank) UF-7 d-_C: Derivative time for cooling of the PID in use
User function 8 ----
(user function bank) UF-8 OL._C: MV low limit for cooling of the PID in use
OH._C: MV high limit for cooling of the PID in use

• Only the settings that can be displayed can be registered.

(Example: Manual reset of the PID constants can be registered when integral time
= 0)

• Items cannot be registered from the console using the parameter number
displayed on the setup screen of Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F.

• To select a parameter, use the keys as follows.

[<]: Displays the first parameter in the next bank.

[∨]: Displays the next parameter.

[∧]: Displays the previous parameter.

Handling Precautions
• The user level required for user-defined functions 1–8 to be shown on the
operation display is “advanced.”

5-99
Chapter 5. Functions

z Specifying user-defined functions

This section gives examples of settings using Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F.
Up to eight user-defined functions (parameters) can be assigned to the [PARA] key.
Set frequently used functions to make the operation of this device easier.
In the example below, the main setting of event 1 is set for UF1.

1. Specifying from the user-defined function screen

To use this function, set the user level to “Standard” or “Advanced (High function)” first.

(1) Select [User Function] under [Option].

(2) Select any of user-defined functions 1–8.

>> The [User Function register] dialog box is displayed.

(3) In [Group select], select [1: Event].

5-100
 Chapter 5. Functions

(4) In [Item select], select [801: Event main setting](low limit).

(3)

(4)

(1)

5-101
Chapter 5. Functions

2. If you find a parameter to set for a user-defined function during configuration

In this case, use the procedure below.

(1) Place the cursor on the parameter you want to register.

(2) Click the [User Function Register] icon.

>> The [User Function register] dialog box is displayed.

(3) Click the radio button for the UF No. to which the parameter should be
registered, and then click [Register].

>> The parameter is now registered.

(2)

(1)

(3)

Note
• The registered parameters can be checked by selecting [User function] under
[Option].

5-102
 Chapter 5. Functions

„ Key lock, communication lock, loader lock

With various lock functions, changing the settings and communication can be
prohibited.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Key lock 0: All settings can be specified. 0 Simple,
(lock bank) LOC 1: M
 ode, event, operation display, SP,
standard,
advanced
UF, lock, manual MV, and [MODE] key
operation can be specified.
2: O
 peration display, SP, UF, lock, manual
MV, and [MODE] key operation can be
specified.
3: U
 F, lock, manual MV, and [MODE] key
operation can be specified.
Communication lock 0: Unlocked 0 Advanced
(lock bank) C.LOc 1: Locked
Loader lock 0: Unlocked 0 Advanced
(lock bank) L.LOc 1: Locked

• If you set a password in addition to the key lock, only the items whose settings
can be changed using the keys (shown in the table above) are displayed.

The parameters shown below can be read and written even if communication lock
or loader lock is enabled.

Bank Parameter
Setup PV decimal point position
Mode AUTO/MANUAL mode selection
RUN/READY mode selection
AT stop/start selection
Release all DO latches
Operation PV
settings SP (target value)
LSP No.
MV (Manipulated Variable)
Heat MV (Manipulated Variable)
Cool MV (Manipulated Variable)
AT progress
Current transformer (CT) input 1 current
Current transformer (CT) input 2 current
Timer remaining time 1
Timer remaining time 2
Timer remaining time 3
Timer remaining time 4
Timer remaining time 5
Step No.*
Step remaining time
Step remaining time (second)
LSP in use
PV before applying ratio,bias,filter
Status Input alarm status

* If the step operation is stopped (READY mode), the step operation No. will be 0.

5-103
Chapter 5. Functions

„ Password
If a password is set (password lock), key-locked items whose settings cannot be
changed using the keys will not be displayed.

Item (bank) Display Description Initial value User level

Password display 0 to 15 0 Simple,
(lock bank) PASS 5: Displays passwords 1A to 2B (0 is set at
standard,
advanced
power-on)
Password 1A 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000
(lock bank) PS1A
Password 2A 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000
(lock bank) PS2A
Password 1B 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000
(lock bank) PS1B
Password 2B 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000
(lock bank) PS2B
• PS1A (password 1A) and PS2A (password 2A) are displayed and the settings can
be changed if PASS (password display) is set to 5 and the two sets of passwords
(1A and 1B, 2A and 2B) match.

• PS1B (password 1B) and Ps2b (password 2B) are displayed and the settings can be
changed if PASS (password display) is set to 5.

• The value set for PS1A (password 1A) is automatically set for PS1B (password 1B).

• The value set for PS2A (password 2A) is automatically set for PS2b (password 2B).

Handling Precautions
• The password function can be used only if the ROM version is 1.01 or
later. With ROM version 1.00, do not change the initial value of [Password
1A/2A/1B/2B].
• Before setting passwords 1A to 2B, decide on two hexadecimal numbers
that will be the passwords, and make a note so that you will remember
them.
• PASS is provided to prevent accidental changing of passwords by
restricting the display conditions of passwords 1A to 2B.
• If you set a value for passwords 1A and 2A and then set a different
value for passwords 1B and 2B, passwords 1A and 2A will no longer be
displayed, and the settings for key lock, communication lock, and loader
lock cannot be changed. This is called a password locked state.
• Settings that cannot be changed due to key lock cannot be displayed in
the password locked state.
• If the password lock cannot be reset, initialize settings from the
[Calibration and checking] screen of Smart Loader Package model SLP-
C1F. In this case, any settings configured by the user will also be initialized
(lost).

5-104
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings
6-1 Operation Settings
Meaning of user level settings
0: Simple configuration, 1: Standard configuration, 2: Advanced configuration

„ Operation settings
Display Item Description Initial User Notes
value level

Upper display: SP SP low limit (C07) to SP high limit (C08) 0 0 Whether to display can be
PV (target value) selected by the PV/SP value
Lower display: display setting (C74).
SP
LSP No. From 1 to the number set for LSP system 1 0 Displayed if LSP system group
LSP1 (the last digit) group (C30, max. = 8) (C30) is set to 2 or more.
The lower display shows the LSP
Lower display:
for the LSP group.
LSP
Whether to display can be
selected by the PV/SP value
display setting (C74).
Step No., step Setting cannot be changed - 0 The time remaining in the step
ST.1- remaining time
The upper display indicates the step No.
(1–8) to the right of ST and tells whether
is displayed in the unit set by
STEP time unit (C33) regardless
(display example) of whether the current process is
the process is ramp-up, ramp-down, or
ramp or soak.
Lower display: soak.
If the unit is 1 s: min.s
Step remaining The lower display shows the remaining
time time for the soak or ramp. If the unit is 1 min: h.min
MV −10.0 to +110.0 % - 0 In ON/OFF control (CtrL = 0),
OUT (Manipulated
Variable)
Setting cannot be changed in AUTO
mode
100.0 is displayed when ON and
0.0 is displayed when OFF.
(the setting does not blink) Whether to display can be
selected by the MV display
Setting can be changed in MANUAL
setting (C75).
mode
(the setting blinks)
Heat MV Setting cannot be changed - 0 Displayed if heat/cool control is
HEAT (Manipulated
Variable)
used (C26 ≠ 0).
Whether to display can be
Cool MV Setting cannot be changed - 0
COOL
selected by the MV display
(Manipulated setting (C75).
Variable)
Upper display: AT progress Setting cannot be changed - 0 Displayed if AT is running
PV (the last digit*) (display continues even after AT
x to 1: AT is running (the value
ends).
AT 1 decrements)
0: AT is complete Whether to display can be
selected by the MV display
setting (C75).
Current transformer Setting cannot be changed - 0 Displayed if a model with two CT
CT1 (CT) input 1 current inputs is used.
Whether to display can be
Current transformer Setting cannot be changed - 0
CT2 (CT) input 2 current
selected by the CT display
setting (C78).
Internal event 1 The range of settings differs depending 0 0 The settings required for
E1 main setting on the operation type of the internal
event.
the internal event type are
displayed.
Internal event 1 0 0
E1.SB sub-setting
0 to 9999 U: An absolute value is set
−199.9 to + 999.9 %: MV
−1999 to +9999 U: Other than the above
Whether to display can be
selected by the event display
setting (C76).

6-1
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Timer remaining Setting cannot be changed - 0 Whether to display can be
T1 time 1
The rightmost digit shows % for ON delay
and L for OFF delay.
selected by the timer remaining
time display setting (C77).

Internal event 2 The range of settings differs depending 0 0 The settings required for
E2 main setting on the operation type of the internal
event.
the internal event type are
displayed.
Internal event 2 0 0
E2.SB sub-setting
0 to 9999 U: An absolute value is set
−199.9 to + 999.9 %: MV
−1999 to +9999 U: Other than the above
Whether to display can be
selected by the event display
setting (C76).
Timer remaining Setting cannot be changed - 0 Whether to display can be
T2 time 2
The rightmost digit shows % for ON delay
and L for OFF delay.
selected by the timer remaining
time display setting (C77).

Internal event 3 The range of settings differs depending 0 0 The settings required for
E3 main setting on the operation type of the internal
event.
the internal event type are
displayed.
Internal event 3 0 0
E3.sb sub-setting 0 to 9999 U: An absolute value is set
−199.9 to + 999.9 %: MV
Whether to display can be
selected by the event display
−1999 to +9999 U: Other than the above setting (C76).
Timer remaining Setting cannot be changed - 0 Whether to display can be
T3 time 3
The rightmost digit shows % for ON delay
and L for OFF delay.
selected by the timer remaining
time display setting (C77).

* The rightmost digit

6-2
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

6-2 Parameter Settings

Meaning of user level settings
0: Simple configuration, 1: Standard configuration, 2: Advanced configuration

„ Mode bank
Bank selection: MODE

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level

AUTO/MANUAL AUtO: AUTO mode AUTO 0 Displayed if the control method

A--M mode selection MAn: MANUAL mode is PID control (CtrL = 1).
Whether to display can be
selected by the mode display
setting (C73).
RUN/READY mode rUn: RUN mode RUN 0 Whether to display can be
R--R selection rdy: READY mode selected by the mode display
setting (C73).
AT start/stop At.OF: AT stop AT stop 0 Displayed if the control method
AT selection At.On: AT start is PID control (CtrL = 1).
Whether to display can be
selected by the mode display
setting (C73).
Auto tuning error Er.OF: Normal Normal 0 Displayed if the control method
At.Er Er.ON: Abnormal
is PID control (CtrL = 1).
Whether to display can be
selected by the mode display
setting (C73).
Release all DO Lt.On: Latch continue Latch 0 All DOs for control outputs
DOLT latches Lt.OF: Latch release continue (relay, voltage pulse) and event
outputs can be unlatched.
Whether to display can be
selected by the mode display
setting (C73).
User-defined bit 1 db.OF: OFF OFF 0 Whether to display can be
Udb.1 db.On: ON selected by the mode display
setting (C73).

6-3
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ SP bank
Bank selection: SP

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
SP (for LSP1) SP low limit (C07) to SP high limit (C08) 0 0
SP-1
PID group No. 1 to 8 1 1 Displayed for PID control (CtrL
PID.1 (for LSP1) = 1)

Ramp (for LSP1) 0 to 9999 0 1 Displayed if SP ramp type (C31) is

RMP.1 (The decimal point position is
determined by the decimal point position
set to 1 or more.

of the PV and the SP ramp unit (C33).)

Soak time (for LSP1) 0.0 to 999.9 (when STEP time unit = 0.1 s) 0 1 Displayed if SP ramp type (C31) is
TIM.1 0 to 9999 (when STEP time unit = 1 s or
1 min)
set to 2 or more.

SP (for LSP2) Same as LSP group 1 0 0 Displayed if LSP system group

SP-2 (C30) is set to 2 or more and the
conditions for LSP1 described
PID group No. 1 1
PID.2
above are met.
(for LSP2)

Ramp (for LSP2) 0 1

RMP.2
Soak time (for LSP2) 0 1
TIM.2
SP (for LSP3) Same as LSP group 1 0 0 Displayed if LSP system group
SP-3 (C30) is set to 3 or more and the
conditions for LSP1 described
PID group No. 1 1
PID.3
above are met.
(for LSP3)

Ramp (for LSP3) 0 1

RMP.3
Soak time (for LSP3) 0 1
TIM.3
SP (for LSP4) Same as LSP group 1 0 0 Displayed if LSP system group
SP-4 (C30) is set to 4 or more and the
conditions for LSP1 described
PID group No. 1 1
PID.4
above are met.
(for LSP4)

Ramp (for LSP4) 0 1

RMP.4
Soak time (for LSP4) 0 1
TIM.4

6-4
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
SP (for LSP5) Same as LSP group 1 0 0 Displayed if LSP system group
SP-5 (C30) is set to 5 or more and the
conditions for LSP1 described
PID group No. 1 1
PID.5
above are met.
(for LSP5)

Ramp (for LSP5) 0 1

RMP.5
Soak time (for LSP5) 0 1
TIM.5
SP (for LSP6) Same as LSP group 1 0 0 Displayed if LSP system group
SP-6 (C30) is set to 6 or more and the
conditions for LSP1 described
PID group No. 1 1
PID.6
above are met.
(for LSP6)

Ramp (for LSP6) 0 1

RMP.6
Soak time (for LSP6) 0 1
TIM.6
SP (for LSP7) Same as LSP group 1 0 0 Displayed if LSP system group
SP-7 (C30) is set to 7 or more and the
conditions for LSP1 described
PID group No. 1 1
PID.7
above are met.
(for LSP7)

Ramp (for LSP7) 0 1

RMP.7
Soak time (for LSP7) 0 1
TIM.7
SP (for LSP8) Same as LSP group 1 0 0 Displayed if LSP system group
SP-8 (C30) is set to 8 or more and the
conditions for LSP1 described
PID group No. 1 1
PID.8
above are met.
(for LSP8)

Ramp (for LSP8) 0 1

RMP.8
Soak time (for LSP8) 0 1
TIM.8

6-5
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ Event bank
Bank selection: EV

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal event 1 −1999 to +9999 0 0 The settings required for the
E1 main setting
The number of decimal places changes
according to the operation type of the
internal event 1 operation type
(E1.C1) are displayed.
Internal event 1 0 0
E1.sb sub-setting internal event.
For some operation types, the range is 0
to 9999.
Internal event 1 0 to 9999 5 0
E1.HY hysteresis
The number of decimal places changes
according to the operation type of the
internal event.
Internal event 1 0.0 to 999.9 (when delay time unit = 0.1 s) 0 2
E1.On ON delay time
0 to 9999 (when delay time unit =
something other than 0.1 s)
Internal event 1 0 2
E1.Of OFF delay time

Internal event 2 Same as internal event 1 0 0 The settings required for the
E2 main setting internal event 2 operation type
(E2.C1) are displayed.
Internal event 2 0 0
E2.sb sub-setting

Internal event 2 5 0
E2.HY hysteresis

Internal event 2 0 2
E2.On ON delay time

Internal event 2 0 2
E2.Of OFF delay time

Internal event 3 Same as internal event 1 0 0 The settings required for the
E3 main setting internal event 3 operation type
(E3.C1) are displayed.
Internal event 3 0 0
E3.sb sub-setting

Internal event 3 5 0
E3.HY hysteresis

Internal event 3 0 2
E3.On ON delay time

Internal event 3 0 2
E3.Of OFF delay time

6-6
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal event 4 Same as internal event 1 0 0 The settings required for the
E4 main setting internal event 4 operation type
(E4.C1) are displayed.
Internal event 4 0 0
E4.sb sub-setting

Internal event 4 5 0
E4.HY hysteresis

Internal event 4 0 2
E4On ON delay time

Internal event 4 0 2
E4.Of OFF delay time

Internal event 5 Same as internal event 1 0 0 The settings required for the
E5 main setting internal event 5 operation type
(E5.C1) are displayed.
Internal event 5 0 0
E5.sb sub-setting

Internal event 5 5 0
E5.HY hysteresis

Internal event 5 0 2
E5.On ON delay time

Internal event 5 0 2
E5.Of OFF delay time

6-7
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ PID bank
Bank selection: PID

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Proportional band 0.1 to 999.9 % 5.0 0 Displayed if the control method
P-1 (PID group 1) is PID control (CtrL = 1).

Integration time 0 to 9999 (0 = no integral operation) 120 0

I-1 (PID group 1)
(The decimal point position is
determined by “Integral time and
derivative time decimal point position”
(C23)).
Derivative time 0 to 9999 (0 = no derivative operation) 30 0
D-1 (PID group 1)
(The decimal point position is
determined by “Integral time and
derivative time decimal point position”
(C23)).
Manual reset −10.0 % to +110.0 % 50.0 0 Displayed if the control method
RE-1 (PID group 1) is PID control (CtrL = 1) and if
integration time (I-1) of the PID
group = 0.
MV low limit −10.0 % to +110.0 % 0.0 1 Displayed if either of the set of
OL-1 (PID group 1) conditions below is met
• The control method is PID
MV high limit −10.0 % to +110.0 % 100.0 1
OH-1 (PID group 1) control (CtrL = 1), individual
PID heating/cooling control
is not used (C26 ≠ 1), and the
integration time (I-1) of the
PID group = 0
• The control method is PID
control (CtrL = 1), individual
PID heating/cooling control
is used (C26 = 1), and the
integration time (I-1) or the
integration time for cooling of
the PID group (I-1C) = 0
Cool-side 0.1 to 999.9 % 5.0 0 Displayed if the control method
P-1C proportional band
(PID group 1)
is PID control (CtrL = 1) and
individual PID heating/cooling
Cool-side 0 to 9999 120 0 control is used (C26 = 1)

I-1C integration time

(PID group 1)
(The decimal point position is
determined by “Integral time and
derivative time decimal point position”
(C23)).
Cool-side derivative 0 to 9999 30 0
D-1C time
(PID group 1)
(The decimal point position is
determined by “Integral time and
derivative time decimal point position”
(C23)).
Cool-side MV low −10.0 % to +110.0 % 0.0 1
OL.1C limit
(PID group 1)
Cool-side MV high −10.0 % to +110.0 % 100.0 1
OH.1C limit
(PID group 1)

6-8
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Proportional band Same as PID group 1 5.0 0 Same as PID group 1
P-2 (PID group 2)

Integration time 120 0

I-2 (PID group 2)

Derivative time 30 0
D-2 (PID group 2)

Manual reset 50.0 0

RE-2 (PID group 2)

MV low limit 0.0 1

OL-2 (PID group 2)

MV high limit 100.0 1

OH-2 (PID group 2)

Cool-side 5.0 0
P-2C proportional band
(PID group 2)
Cool-side 120 0
I-2C integration time
(PID group 2)
Cool-side derivative 30 0
D-2C time
(PID group 2)
Cool-side MV low 0.0 1
OL.2C limit
(PID group 2)
Cool-side MV high 100.0 1
OH.2C limit
(PID group 2)

6-9
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Proportional band Same as PID group 1 5.0 0 Same as PID group 1
P-3 (PID group 3)

Integration time 120 0

I-3 (PID group 3)

Derivative time 30 0
D-3 (PID group 3)

Manual reset 50.0 0

RE-3 (PID group 3)

MV low limit 0.0 1

OL-3 (PID group 3)

MV high limit 100.0 1

OH-3 (PID group 3)

Cool-side 5.0 0
P-3C proportional band
(PID group 3)
Cool-side 120 0
I-3C integration time
(PID group 3)
Cool-side derivative 30 0
D-3C time
(PID group 3)
Cool-side MV low 0.0 1
OL.3C limit
(PID group 3)
Cool-side MV high 100.0 1
OH.3C limit
(PID group 3)

6-10
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Proportional band Same as PID group 1 5.0 0 Same as PID group 1
P-4 (PID group 4)

Integration time 120 0

I-4 (PID group 4)

Derivative time 30 0
D-4 (PID group 4)

Manual reset 50.0 0

RE-4 (PID group 4)

MV low limit 0.0 1

OL-4 (PID group 4)

MV high limit 100.0 1

OH-4 (PID group 4)

Cool-side 5.0 0
P-4C proportional band
(PID group 4)
Cool-side 120 0
I-4C integration time
(PID group 4)
Cool-side derivative 30 0
D-4C time
(PID group 4)
Cool-side MV low 0.0 1
OL.4C limit
(PID group 4)
Cool-side MV high 100.0 1
OH.4C limit
(PID group 4)

6-11
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Proportional band Same as PID group 1 5.0 0 Same as PID group 1
P-5 (PID group 5)

Integration time 120 0

I-5 (PID group 5)

Derivative time 30 0
D-5 (PID group 5)

Manual reset 50.0 0

RE-5 (PID group 5)

MV low limit 0.0 1

OL-5 (PID group 5)

MV high limit 100.0 1

OH-5 (PID group 5)

Cool-side 5.0 0
P-5C proportional band
(PID group 5)
Cool-side 120 0
I-5C integration time
(PID group 5)
Cool-side derivative 30 0
D-5C time
(PID group 5)
Cool-side MV low 0.0 1
OL.5C limit
(PID group 5)
Cool-side MV high 100.0 1
OH.5C limit
(PID group 5)

6-12
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Proportional band Same as PID group 1 5.0 0 Same as PID group 1
P-6 (PID group 6)

Integration time 120 0

I-6 (PID group 6)

Derivative time 30 0
D-6 (PID group 6)

Manual reset 50.0 0

RE-6 (PID group 6)

MV low limit 0.0 1

OL-6 (PID group 6)

MV high limit 100.0 1

OH-6 (PID group 6)

Cool-side 5.0 0
P-6C proportional band
(PID group 6)
Cool-side 120 0
I-6C integration time
(PID group 6)
Cool-side derivative 30 0
D-6C time
(PID group 6)
Cool-side MV low 0.0 1
OL.6C limit
(PID group 6)
Cool-side MV high 100.0 1
OH.6C limit
(PID group 6)

6-13
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Proportional band Same as PID group 1 5.0 0 Same as PID group 1
P-7 (PID group 7)

Integration time 120 0

I-7 (PID group 7)

Derivative time 30 0
D-7 (PID group 7)

Manual reset 50.0 0

RE-7 (PID group 7)

MV low limit 0.0 1

OL-7 (PID group 7)

MV high limit 100.0 1

OH-7 (PID group 7)

Cool-side 5.0 0
P-7C proportional band
(PID group 7)
Cool-side 120 0
I-7C integration time
(PID group 7)
Cool-side derivative 30 0
D-7C time
(PID group 7)
Cool-side MV low 0.0 1
OL.7C limit
(PID group 7)
Cool-side MV high 100.0 1
OH.7C limit
(PID group 7)

6-14
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Proportional band Same as PID group 1 5.0 0 Same as PID group 1
P-8 (PID group 8)

Integration time 120 0

I-8 (PID group 8)

Derivative time 30 0
D-8 (PID group 8)

Manual reset 50.0 0

RE-8 (PID group 8)

MV low limit 0.0 1

OL-8 (PID group 8)

MV high limit 100.0 1

OH-8 (PID group 8)

Cool-side 5.0 0
P-8C proportional band
(PID group 8)
Cool-side 120 0
I-8C integration time
(PID group 8)
Cool-side derivative 30 0
D-8C time
(PID group 8)
Cool-side MV low 0.0 1
OL.8C limit
(PID group 8)
Cool-side MV high 100.0 1
OH.8C limit
(PID group 8)

6-15
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ Parameter bank
Bank selection: PARA

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Control method 0: ON/OFF control 0 or 1 0 The initial value is 0 if control
CTRL 1: PID control output 1 is a relay output, and 1
otherwise.
MV low limit at AT −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 0 Displayed if the control method
AT.OL is PID control (CtrL = 1).

MV high limit at AT −10.0 to +110.0 % 100.0 0

AT.OH
ON/OFF control 0 to 9999 U 5 0 Displayed if the control method
DIFF differential is ON/OFF control (CtrL = 0).

ON/OFF control −1999 to +9999 U 0 2

OFFs operating point
offset
PV filter 0.0 to 120.0 s 0.0 0
FL
PV ratio 0.001 to 9.999 1.000 1
RA
PV bias −1999 to +9999 U 0 0
BI
Time proportional 0: 1 s 0 2 Displayed if the conditions to
CYU cycle unit 1 1: Always 0.5 s*1
2: Always 0.25 s*1
display time proportional cycle 1
(CY) are met and the output does
3: Always 0.1 s*1 not include a relay output.
Time proportional 5 to 120 s 10 or 2 0 Displayed if MV1 (time
CY cycle 1 (when the output includes a relay output)
1 to 120 s
proportional output, or time
proportional output for heating
in heating/cooling control) is set
(when the output does not include a
for relay control output, voltage
relay output)
pulse control output, or event
output in DO assignment.
The initial value is 2 if control
output 1 is a voltage pulse
output, and 10 otherwise.
Time proportional Set value: 0 0 2 Same as time proportional
TPO minimum ON/OFF
time 1
If either one of the conditions below
is true, 250 ms applies.
cycle1 (CY)

Otherwise, 1 ms applies.
• MV1 is set for relay control output
or event output in DO assignment.
• Time proportional cycle 1 is 10 s or
longer.
Set value: 1–250 ms
If MV1 is set for relay control output
or event output in DO assignment,
1–49: 50 ms applies.
50–250: The set value applies.
Time proportional 0: 1 s 0 2 Displayed if the conditions to
CYU2 cycle unit 2 1: Always 0.5 s*2
2: Always 0.25 s*2
display time proportional cycle
2 (CY2) are met and the output
3: Always 0.1 s*2 does not include a relay output.

6-16
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Time proportional 5 to 120 s 10 or 2 0 Displayed if heating/cooling
CY2 cycle 2 (when the output includes a relay output)
1 to 120 s
control is used (C26 ≠ 0) and
MV2 (time proportional output
for cooling in heating/cooling
(when the output does not include a
control) is set for relay control
relay output)
output, voltage pulse control
output, or event output in DO
assignment.
The initial value is 2 if control
output 2 is a voltage pulse
output, and 10 otherwise.
Time proportional Set value: 0 0 2 Same as time proportional cycle
TPO2 minimum ON/OFF
time 2
If either one of the conditions below
is true, 250 ms applies.
2 (CY2)

Otherwise, 1 ms applies.
• MV2 is set for relay control output
or event output in DO assignment.
• Time proportional cycle 2 is 10 s or
longer.
Set value: 1–250 ms
If MV2 is set for relay control output
or event output in DO assignment,
1–49: 50 ms applies.
50–250: The set value applies.
Time proportional 0: Priority on controllability 0 or 1 2 The initial value is 1 if control
TP.TY cycle mode 1: Priority on actuator service life (only
one ON/OFF operation in a time
output 1 is a relay output, and 0
otherwise.
proportional cycle)
SP up ramp 0.0 to 999.9 U (0.0 U: no ramp) 0.0 2 Select the time unit of the ramp
SPU by SP ramp unit (C32).

SP down ramp 0.0 2

SPD
*1. The setting cannot be specified for time proportional cycle 1 (Cy).
*2. The setting cannot be specified for time proportional cycle 2 (Cy2).

6-17
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ Extended tuning bank

Bank selection: ET

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
AT type 0: Normal (regular control characteristics) 1 0 Displayed if the control method
AT.TY 1: Immediate response (to disturbance)
2: Stable (minimal PV fluctuation)
is PID control (CtrL = 1).

SP lag constant 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 2

SP.LG
AT proportional 0.00 to 99.99 1.00 2
AT-P band adjust

AT integral time 0.00 to 99.99 1.00 2

AT-i adjust

AT derivative time 0.00 to 99.99 1.00 2

AT-d adjust

Type of MV switching 0: Default (2/3 of the deviation of the 0 2 Displayed if the control method
AT.PT point at AT initial PV from the initial SP)
1: SP
is PID control (CtrL = 1).

2: PV
MV switching point −1999 to + 9999 U 0 2 Displayed if the control method
AT.Pv PV in AT is PID control (CtrL = 1) and
type of MV switching point at AT
(At.Pt) is set to 2 (PV).
Control algorithm 0: PID (conventional PID) 0 1 Displayed if the control method
CTR.A 1: Ra-PID (high-performance PID) is PID control (CtrL = 1).

Cooling Gain −10.0 to +110.0 % 30.0 2 Displayed if the control method

CLg is PID control (CtrL = 1) and
shared PID heating/cooling
control is used (C23 = 2).

6-18
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

6-3 Setup Bank, etc., Settings

Meaning of user level settings
0: Simple configuration, 1: Standard configuration, 2: Advanced configuration

„ Setup bank
Bank selection: STUP

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level

PV input range type For thermocouple: 1 0

C 01
PV input range type
1–6, 9–11, 13–21, 23–25 (p. 5-2) (for details)
For RTD: 41
41–46, 51–54, 63, 64, 67, 68
For DC voltage/current: 88
84, 86–90
Reference junction 0: Internal compensation (by this device) 0 2 Displayed if a thermocouple
C 03 compensation
(cold junction
1: External compensation (by another
device)
range is set for PV input range
type.
compensation)
PV Decimal point 0: No decimal point 0 0 If a DC voltage/current range is
C 04 position 1: 1 digit after the decimal point
2: 2 digits after the decimal point
set for PV input range type or if a
thermocouple or RTD range with
3: 3 digits after the decimal point a decimal point is selected.
PV range low limit If a thermocouple or RTD range is set for - 0
C 05 PV input range type (C01),the low limit of
the specified PV input range is displayed
but the setting cannot be changed.
If the PV input type is DC voltage/ 0
current: −1999 to +9999
PV range high limit If a thermocouple or RTD range is set - 0
C 06 for PV input range type (C01),the high
limit of the specified PV input range
is displayed but the setting cannot be
changed.
If the PV input type is DC voltage/ 1000
current: −1999 to +9999
SP low limit PV range low limit to PV range high limit - 1
C 07
SP high limit - 1
C 08
PV square root 0.0 to 100.0 % (0.0 = no square root 0.0 2 Displayed if the PV input type is
C 09 extraction dropout extraction) DC voltage/current.

Control action 0: Heating control (reverse action) 0 0 Displayed if the control method
C 14 (direct/reverse) 1: Cooling control (direct action) is ON/OFF control (CtrL = 0) or
if heating/cooling control is not
used (C26 = 0).
Output operation at 0: Continue the control calculation 0 2
C 15 PV alarm 1: Output the value set for “Output at PV
alarm”
Output at PV alarm −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 2
C 16
Output at READY −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 1
C 17 (Heat)

6-19
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level

Output at READY −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 1 Displayed if the control method

C 18 (Cool) is PID control (CtrL = 1) and
heating/cooling control is used
(C26 ≠ 0).
Output operation 0: Bumpless transfer 0 1 Displayed if the control method
C 19 at changing AUTO/
MANUAL
1: Preset is PID control (CtrL = 1).
If the mode is MANUAL at
Preset MANUAL −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 or 1
C 20
power-on, the MV will be the
value 50.0
value set by preset MANUAL
value (C20).
Initial output type 0: Automatic 0 2
C 21 (mode) of PID
control
1: Not initialized
2: Initialize (if a new SP is set)
Initial output of PID −10.0 to +110.0 % 0.0 or 2
C 22 control 50.0

Integral time and 0: No decimal point 0 2 Displayed if the control method

C 23 derivative time
decimal point
1: 1 digit after the decimal point
2: 2 digits after the decimal point
is PID control (CtrL = 1).

position
3: 3 digits after the decimal point
Heat/cool control 0: Not used 0 0 Displayed if the control method
C 26 1: Use (individual PID)
2: Use (shared PID)
is PID control (CtrL = 1) and
the sum of control outputs and
event relay outputs is 2 or more.
Control action and heating/
cooling control (p. 5-16) (for
details)

Heat/Cool control −100.0 to +100.0 % 0.0 0 Displayed if heat/cool control is

C 28 dead zone used (C26 ≠ 0).

LSP system group 1 to 8 1 0

C 30
SP ramp type 0: Standard
C 31 1: Multi-ramp
2: Step operation enabled: Step operation
does not resume when the power is
turned back on (shifts to READY)
3: Step operation enabled: Step operation
resumes when the power is turned
back on
SP ramp unit 0: 0.1 U/s
C 32 1: 0.1 U/min
2: 0.1 U/h

6-20
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level

STEP time unit 0: 0.1 s

C 33 1: 1 s (displayed as min.s on the console)
2: 1 min (displayed as h.min on the
console)
STEP PV start 0: No
C 34 1: Up start
2: Down start

STEP loop 0: Operation stops (no loop-back)

C 35 1: Loops back
2: Continues SOAK with the final step’s SP
(no loop-back)
CT1 operation type 0: Heater burnout detection 0 0 Displayed if a model with two CT
C 36 1: Current measurement inputs is used.

CT1 output 0: Control output 1 0 0 Displayed if a model with two CT

C 37 1: Control output 2
2: Event output 1
inputs is used and CT1 operation
type is set to heater burnout
3: Event output 2 detection (C36 = 0).
4: Event output 3
CT1 measurement 30 to 300 ms 30 0
C 38 wait time

CT2 operation type 0: Heater burnout detection 0 0 Displayed if a model with two CT
C 39 1: Current measurement inputs is used.

CT2 output 0: Control output 1 0 0 Displayed if a model with two CT

C 40 1: Control output 2
2: Event output 1
inputs is used and CT2 operation
type is set to heater burnout
3: Event output 2 detection (C39 = 0).
4: Event output 3
CT2 measurement 30 to 300 ms 30 0
C 41 wait time

Control output 1 1: 4–20 mA 1 0 Displayed if current output is

C 42 range 2: 0–20 mA set as control output 1 by the
model No.
Control output 1 0: MV 0 0 The decimal point position of
C 43 type 1: Heating MV (for heating/cooling
control)
scaling low and high limits
If “Control output 1 type” is set to
2: Cooling MV (for heating/cooling MV or CT: 1 digit after the
control) decimal point
3: PV PV or SP: the same as the PV
4: PV (before applying ratio, bias, filter) decimal point position
5: SP
6: Deviation The unit for scaling low and high
7: CT1 current limits
8: CT2 current If “Control output 1 type” is set to
9: Invalid MV: %
10: SP+MV PV or SP: the same as the PV unit
11: PV+MV CT: A (current)
Control output 1 −1999 to +9999 0.0 0
C 44 scaling low limit
The decimal point position and unit vary
depending on the setting for “control
Control output 1 100.0 0
C 45 scaling high limit output 1 type” (C43).

6-21
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level

Control output 1 0 to 9999 200 0 Displayed if control output 1

C 46 MV scaling width
The decimal point position and unit are
the same as those of the PV.
is set to current output by the
model No. and if control output
1 type is set to SP+MV or PV+MV.
Control output 2 1: 4–20 mA 1 0 Displayed if current output is
C 47 range 2: 0–20 mA set as control output 2 by the
model No.
Control output 2 0: MV 3 0
C 48 type 1: Heating MV (for heating/cooling
control)
The decimal point position and
unit of scaling low and hight
limits are the same as those of
2: Cooling MV (for heating/cooling
control output 1.
control)
3: PV
4: PV (before applying ratio, bias, filter)
5: SP
6: Deviation
7: CT1 current
8: CT2 current
9: Invalid
10: SP+MV
11: PV+MV
Control output 2 −1999 to +9999 0 0
C 49 scaling low limit
The decimal point position and unit vary
depending on the setting for control
Control output 2 1000 0
C 50
output 2 type (C48).
scaling high limit

Control output 2 0 to 9999 200 0 Displayed if current output is set

C 51 MV scaling width
The decimal point position and unit are
the same as those of the PV.
as control output 2 by the model
No. and if “control output 2 type”
is set to SP+MV or PV+MV.
Communication 0: CPL 0 0 Displayed if a model with RS-485
C 64 type 1: ModbusTM/ASCII
2: Modbus/RTU
is used.

3: PLC link
Station address 1 to 127 (0: no communication) 0 0
C 65
Transmission speed 0: 4800 bps 2 0
C 66 1: 9600 bps
2: 19200 bps
3: 38400 bps
Data format 0: 7 bits 1 0
C 67 (data length) 1: 8 bits

Data format 0: Even parity 0 0

C 68 (parity) 1: Odd parity
2: No parity
Data format 0: 1 bit 0 0
C 69 (stop bit) 1: 2 bits

Communication 1 to 250 ms 3 2
C 70 minimum response
time
Key operation mode 0: Standard 0 2
C 71 1: Special

6-22
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level

[MODE] key function 0: Invalid 1 0

C 72 1: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection
2: RUN/READY mode selection
3: AT stop/start
4: LSP group selection
5: Release all DO latches
6: Invalid
7: User-defined bit 1
8: Invalid
Mode display setup Whether to display the settings in the 255 1
C 73 mode bank is determined by the sum of
the weights shown below.
Bit 0: AUTO/MANUAL display
No: 0. Yes: +1
Bit 1: RUN/READY display
No: 0. Yes: +2
Bit 3: AT stop/start display
No: 0. Yes: +8
Bit 4: DO latch release display
No: 0. Yes: +16
Bit 5: User-defined bit 1 ON/OFF display
No: 0. Yes: +32
Bits 6–7: Invalid
PV/SP display setup Whether to show the following items on 15 1
C 74 the operation display is determined by
the sum of the weights shown below.
Bit 0: PV
No: 0. Yes: +1
Bit 1: SP
No: 0. Yes: +2
Bit 2: LSP group No.
No: 0. Yes: +4
Bits 3–7: Invalid
MV display setup Whether to show the following items on 15 1
C 75 the operation display is determined by
the sum of the weights shown below.
Bit 0: MV
No: 0. Yes: +1
Bit 1: Heating MV / cooling MV
No: 0. Yes: +2
Bit 2: Invalid
Bit 3: AT progress
No: 0. Yes: +8
Bits 4–7: Invalid
EV display setup 0: Do not show internal event settings on 0 1
C 76 the operation display
1: Show internal event 1 settings on the
operation display
2: Show internal event 1–2 settings on
the operation display
3: Show internal event 1–3 settings on
the operation display

6-23
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level

Event remaining 0: Do not show the ON/OFF delay 0 1

C 77 time display setup remaining time of internal events on
the operation display
1: Show the ON/OFF delay remaining
time of internal event 1 on the
operation display
2: Show the ON/OFF delay remaining
time of internal events 1–2 on the
operation display
3: Show the ON/OFF delay remaining
time of internal events 1–3 on the
operation display
CT input current 0: Do not show the CT current on the 1 1
C 78 display setup operation display
1: Show the CT1 current on the operation
display
2: Show the CT1 and CT2 currents on the
operation display
User level 0: Simple configuration 0 0
C 79 1: Standard configuration
2: Advanced configuration
Status indicator 0: Not used (always off ) 0 2
C 80 1: Blinks when sending RS-485
communication data
2: Blinks when receiving RS-485
communication data
3: OR (logical sum) of all DI states
4: Always OFF
Number of CT1 0: 800 8 2 Displayed if a model with two CT
C 90 turns 1–40: CT turns divided by 100 inputs is used.

Number of CT1 0: 1 1 2
C 91 power wire passes 1–6: The set value

Number of CT2 0: 800 8 2

C 92 turns 1–40: CT turns divided by 100

Number of CT2 0: 1 1 2
C 93 power wire passes 1–6: The set value

PV input failure 0: −10 % FS 0 0

C 97 (under range) type 1: −5 mV (valid only when C01(PV input
range type) is set to 17 or 23.)
Sampling cycle 1: 50 ms 1 2
C 98 2: 100 ms
3: 300 ms
4: 500 ms

6-24
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ Event configuration bank

Bank selection: EVCF

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal event 1 0: No event 0 0
E1.C1 conf. 1 operation
type
1: PV high limit
2: PV low limit
3: PV high and low limits
4: Deviation high limit
5: Deviation low limit
6: Deviation high and low limits
7: Deviation high limit (final SP reference)
8: Deviation low limit (final SP reference)
9: Deviation high and low limits (final SP
reference)
10: SP high limit
11: SP low limit
12: SP high and low limits
13: MV high limit
14: MV low limit
15: MV high and low limits
16: Heater 1 burnout/overcurrent
17: Heater 1 short circuit
18: Heater 2 burnout/overcurrent
19: Heater 2 short circuit
20: Loop diagnosis 1
21: Loop diagnosis 2
22: Loop diagnosis 3
23: Alarm (status)
24: READY (status)
25: MANUAL (status)
26: Invalid
27: AT in execution (status)
28: During SP ramp (status)
29: Control direct action (status)
30: Invalid
31: Invalid
32: Timer (status)
33: Invalid
Internal event 1 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 0
E1.C2 conf. 2
1st digit:
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
Direct/reverse 1: Reverse
2nd digit: Standby 0: None 0
1: Standby
2: Standby + standby when the SP is
changed
3rd digit: 0: Continues 0
Event state in 1: Forced OFF
READY mode
4th digit: Undefined 0 0

6-25
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal event 1 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2
E1.C3 conf. 3
1st digit: Alarm OR
(etc.) from the right.
0: None 0
1: Alarm direct + OR operation
2: Alarm direct + AND operation
3: Alarm reverse + OR operation
4: Alarm reverse + AND operation
2nd digit: Special OFF 0: No special OFF 0
1: If the main setting for the event is 0,
the event is OFF.
3rd digit: 0: 0.1 s 0
Delay time unit 1: 1 s
2: 1 min
4th digit: Undefined 0 0
Internal event 2 Same as internal event 1 configuration 1 0 0
E2.C1 conf. 1 operation
type
Internal event 2 0000 0
E2.C2 conf. 2
1st digit:
Direct/reverse
2nd digit: Standby
3rd digit:
Event state in
READY mode
4th digit: Undefined
Internal event 2 Same as internal event 1 configuration 3 0000 2
E2.C3 conf. 3
1st digit: Alarm OR
2nd digit: Special OFF
3rd digit:
Delay time unit
4th digit: Undefined
Internal event 3 Same as internal event 1 configuration 1 0 0
E3.C1 conf. 1 operation
type
Internal event 3 Same as internal event 1 configuration 2 0000 0
E3.C2 conf. 2
1st digit:
Direct/reverse
2nd digit: Standby
3rd digit:
Event state in
READY mode
4th digit: Undefined
Internal event 3 Same as internal event 1 configuration 3 0000 2
E3.C3 conf. 3
1st digit: Alarm OR
2nd digit: Special OFF
3rd digit:
Delay time unit
4th digit: Undefined

6-26
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal event 4 Same as internal event 1 configuration 1 0 0
E4.C1 conf. 1 operation
type
Internal event 4 Same as internal event 1 configuration 2 0000 0
E4.C2 conf. 2
1st digit:
Direct/reverse
2nd digit: Standby
3rd digit:
Event state in
READY mode
4th digit: Undefined
Internal event 4 Same as internal event 1 configuration 3 0000 2
E4.C3 conf. 3
1st digit: Alarm OR
2nd digit: Special OFF
3rd digit:
Delay time unit
4th digit: Undefined
Internal event 5 Same as internal event 1 configuration 1 0 0
E5.C1 conf. 1 operation
type
Internal event 5 Same as internal event 1 configuration 2 0000 0
E5.C2 conf. 2
1st digit:
Direct/reverse
2nd digit: Standby
3rd digit:
Event state in
READY mode
4th digit: Undefined
Internal event 5 Same as internal event 1 configuration 3 0000 2
E5.C3 conf. 3
1st digit: Alarm OR
2nd digit: Special OFF
3rd digit:
Delay time unit
4th digit: Undefined

6-27
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ DI assignment bank
Bank selection: DI

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal contact 1 0: No function 0 0
DI1.1 operation type 1: LSP group selection (0/+1)
2: LSP group selection (0/+2)
3: LSP group selection (0/+4)
4: PID group selection (0/+1)
5: PID group selection (0/+2)
6: PID group selection (0/+4)
7: RUN/READY selection
8: AUTO/MANUAL selection
9: Invalid
10: AT stop/start
11: Invalid
12: C ontrol operation (direct/reverse)
(Operates as configured / reversed
operation)
13: SP ramp enabling/disabling
14: P V hold
(disabled/enabled)
15: P V max. hold
(disabled/enabled)
16: P V min. hold
(disabled/enabled)
17: Timer stop/start
18: Release/continue all DO latches
19: Advance (disabled/enabled)
20: S P step hold
(disabled/enabled)
Internal contact 1 0: Not used (use the default input) 0 2 If a model with digital inputs is
DI1.2 input bit function 1: Function 1, (A and B) or (C and D)
2: Function 2, (A or B) and (C or D)
used, if 0 (not used) is selected,
internal contact 1 reflects the
3: Function 3, (A or B or C or D) state of digital input 1.
4: Function 4, (A and B and C and D)

6-28
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal contact 1 0: Normally open (normally off = 0) 2 2 Displayed if internal contact 1
DI1.3 input assignment A 1: Normally closed (normally on = 1)
2: DI1
input bit function is set to one of
functions 1–4 (DI1.2 ≠ 0).
3: DI2
4 to 9: Invalid
10: Internal event 1
11: Internal event 2
Internal contact 1 0 2
DI1.4 input assignment B
12: Internal event 3
13: Internal event 4
14: Internal event 5
15 to 17: Invalid
18: User-defined bit 1
19: User-defined bit 2
Internal contact 1 20: User-defined bit 3 0 2
DI1.5 input assignment C 21: User-defined bit 4
22: MANUAL
23: READY
24: Invalid
25: AT (Auto-Tuning)
26: During SP ramp
Internal contact 1 0 2
DI1.6 input assignment D
27: Invalid
28: Alarm
29: PV alarm
30: Invalid
31: [MODE] key status
32: Event output 1 terminal status
33: Control output 1 terminal status
Internal contact 1 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2 Displayed if internal contact 1
DI1.7 polarity A to D
1st digit: Polarity A
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
input bit function is set to one of
functions 1–4 (DI1.2 ≠ 0).
(polarity of input 1: Reverse
assignment A)
2nd digit: Polarity B 0
(polarity of input
assignment B)
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
(polarity of input
assignment C)
4th digit: Polarity D 0
(polarity of input
assignment D)
Internal contact 1 0: Direct 0 2
DI1.8 polarity 1: Reverse

Internal contact 1 0: All internal events 0 2 Displayed if internal contact 1

DI1.9 internal event No.
assignment
1 to 5: Internal event No. operation type is set to timer
stop/start (DI1.1 = 17).
Internal contact 2 Same as internal contact 1 operation 0 0
DI2.1 operation type type
0 to 20
Internal contact 2 Same as internal contact 1 input bit 0 2 If a model with digital inputs is
DI2.2 input bit function function
0: Not used (use the default input)
used, if 0 (not used) is selected,
internal contact 2 reflects the
state of digital input 2.
1-4: Functions 1-4

6-29
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal contact 2 Same as internal contact 1 input 3 2 Displayed if internal contact 2
DI2.3 input assignment A assignment A to D
0 to 33
input bit function is set to one of
functions 1–4 (dI2.2 ≠ 0).
Internal contact 2 0 2
DI2.4 input assignment B

Internal contact 2 0 2
DI2.5 input assignment C

Internal contact 2 0 2
DI2.6 input assignment D

Internal contact 2 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2
DI2.7 polarity A to D
1st digit: Polarity A
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
(polarity of input 1: Reverse
assignment A)
2nd digit: Polarity B 0
(polarity of input
assignment B)
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
(polarity of input
assignment C)
4th digit: Polarity D 0
(polarity of input
assignment D)
Internal contact 2 0: Direct 0 2
DI2.8 polarity 1: Reverse

Internal contact 2 0: All internal events 0 2 Displayed if internal contact 2

DI2.9 internal event No.
assignment
1 to 5: Internal event No. operation type is set to timer
stop/start (dI21 = 17).
Internal contact 3 Same as internal contact 1 operation type 0 0
DI3.1 operation type
0 to 20
Internal contact 3 Same as internal contact 1 input bit 0 2
DI3.2 input bit function function
0: Not used
1-4: Functions 1-4

6-30
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal contact 3 Same as internal contact 1 input 4 2 Displayed if internal contact 3
DI3.3. input assignment A assignment A to D
0 to 33
input bit function is set to one of
functions 1–4 (dI3.2 ≠ 0).
Internal contact 3 0 2
DI3.4 input assignment B

Internal contact 3 0 2
DI3.5 input assignment C

Internal contact 3 0 2
DI3.6 input assignment D

Internal contact 3 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2
DI3.7 polarity A to D
1st digit: Polarity A
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
(polarity of input 1: Reverse
assignment A)
2nd digit: Polarity B 0
(polarity of input
assignment B)
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
(polarity of input
assignment C)
4th digit: Polarity D 0
(polarity of input
assignment D)
Internal contact 3 0: Direct 0 2
DI3.8 polarity 1: Reverse

Internal contact 3 0: All internal events 0 2 Displayed if internal contact 3

DI3.9 internal event No.
assignment
1 to 5: Internal event No. operation type is set to timer
stop/start (dI3.1 = 17).
Internal contact 4 Same as internal contact 1 operation 0 0
DI4.1 operation type type
0 to 20
Internal contact 4 Same as internal contact 1 input bit 0 2
DI4.2 input bit function function
0: Not used
1-4: Functions 1-4

6-31
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal contact 4 Same as internal contact 1 input 3 2 Displayed if internal contact 4
DI4.3 input assignment A assignment A to D
0 to 33
input bit function is set to one of
functions 1–4 (dI2.2 ≠ 0).
Internal contact 4 0 2
DI4.4 input assignment B

Internal contact 4 0 2
DI4.5 input assignment C

Internal contact 4 0 2
DI4.6 input assignment D

Internal contact 4 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2
DI4.7 polarity A to D
1st digit: Polarity A
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
(polarity of input 1: Reverse
assignment A)
2nd digit: Polarity B 0
(polarity of input
assignment B)
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
(polarity of input
assignment C)
4th digit: Polarity D 0
(polarity of input
assignment D)
Internal contact 4 0: Direct 0 2
DI4.8 polarity 1: Reverse

Internal contact 4 0: All internal events 0 2 Displayed if internal contact 4

DI4.9 internal event No.
assignment
1 to 5: Internal event No. operation type is set to timer
stop/start (dI21 = 17).
Internal contact 5 Same as internal contact 1 operation 0 0
DI5.1 operation type type
0 to 20
Internal contact 5 Same as internal contact 1 input bit 0 2
DI5.2 input bit function function
0: Not used
1-4: Functions 1-4

6-32
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Internal contact 5 Same as internal contact 1 input 3 2 Displayed if internal contact 5
DI5.3 input assignment A assignment A to D
0 to 33
input bit function is set to one of
functions 1–4 (dI2.2 ≠ 0).
Internal contact 5 0 2
DI5.4 input assignment B

Internal contact 5 0 2
DI5.5 input assignment C

Internal contact 5 0 2
DI5.6 input assignment D

Internal contact 5 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2
DI5.7 polarity A to D
1st digit: Polarity A
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
(polarity of input 1: Reverse
assignment A)
2nd digit: Polarity B 0
(polarity of input
assignment B)
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
(polarity of input
assignment C)
4th digit: Polarity D 0
(polarity of input
assignment D)
Internal contact 5 0: Direct 0 2
DI5.8 polarity 1: Reverse

Internal contact 5 0: All internal events 0 2 Displayed if internal contact 5

DI5.9 internal event No.
assignment
1 to 5: Internal event No. operation type is set to timer
stop/start (dI21 = 17).

6-33
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ DO assignment bank
Bank selection: DO

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Control output 1 0: Default output 0 2 Displayed if control output 1 is
Ot1.1 operation type 1: MV ON/OFF status 1 (ON/OFF control
output, time proportional output,
set to relay output or voltage
pulse output by the model No.
heating time proportional output of
For control output 1, the default
heating/cooling control)
output is MV1.
2: MV ON/OFF status 2 (cooling time
proportional output of heating/
cooling control
3: Function 1, (A and B) or (C and D)
4: Function 2, (A or B) and (C or D)
5: Function 3, (A or B or C or D)
6: Function 4, (A and B and C and D)
Control output 1 0: Normally open (normally off = 0) 14 2 Displayed if relay output or
Ot1.2 output assignment A 1: Normally closed (normally on = 1)
2: Internal event 1
voltage pulse output is set as
control output 1 by the model
3: Internal event 2 No. and control output 1
4: Internal event 3 operation type is set to one of
5: Internal event 4 functions 1–4 (Ot1.1 > 2).
6: Internal event 5
7 to 13: Invalid
Control output 1 14: MV ON/OFF status 1 0 2
Ot1.3 output assignment B 15: MV ON/OFF status 2
16 to 17: Invalid
18: DI1
19: DI2
20 to 25: Invalid
26: Internal contact 1
27: Internal contact 2
28: Internal contact 3
Control output 1 0 2
Ot1.4 output assignment C
29: Internal contact 4
30: Internal contact 5
31 to 33: Undefined
34: User-defined bit 1
35: User-defined bit 2
36: User-defined bit 3
37: User-defined bit 4
38: MANUAL
Control output 1 0 2
Ot1.5 39: READY
output assignment D 40: Invalid
41: AT (Auto-Tuning)
42: During SP ramp
43: Invalid
44: Alarm
45: PV alarm
46: Invalid
47: [MODE] key status
48: Event output 1 terminal status
49: Control output 1 terminal status

6-34
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Control output 1 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2 Displayed if relay output or
Ot1.6 polarity A to D
1st digit: Polarity A
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
voltage pulse output is set as
control output 1 by the model
1: Reverse No. and control output 1
2nd digit: Polarity B 0
operation type is set to one of
3rd digit: Polarity C 0 functions 1–4 (Ot1.1 > 2).
4th digit: Polarity D 0
Control output 1 0: Direct 0 2
Ot1.7 polarity 1: Reverse

Control output 1 0: Do not latch 0 2

Ot1.8 latch 1: Latch when ON
2: Latch when OFF (except for
initialization at power-on)
Control output 2 Same as control output 1 operation type 0 2 Displayed if voltage pulse
Ot2.1 operation type
0: Default output
1: MV1
output is set as control output 2
by the model No.
2: MV2 For control output 2, the default
3-6: Functions 1-4 output is MV2.
Control output 2 Same as control output 1 output 15 2 Displayed if voltage pulse
Ot2.2 output assignment A assignment A to D
0 to 49
output is set as control output
2 by the model No. and control
Control output 2 0 2
Ot2.3
output 2 operation type is set to
output assignment B one of functions 1–4 (ot2.1 > 2).

Control output 2 0 2
Ot2.4 output assignment C

Control output 2 0 2
Ot2.5 output assignment D

Control output 2 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2
Ot2.6 polarity A to D
1st digit: Polarity A
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
2nd digit: Polarity B 1: Reverse 0
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
4th digit: Polarity D 0
Control output 2 0: Direct 0 2
Ot2.7 polarity 1: Reverse

Control output 2 0: Do not latch 0 2

Ot2.8 latch 1: Latch when ON
2: Latch when OFF (except for
initialization at power-on)
Event output 1 Same as control output 1 operation type 0 2 Displayed if a model with event
Ev1.1 operation type
0: Default output
1: MV1
output 1 is used.
For event output 1, the default
2: MV2 output is internal event 1.
3-6: Functions 1-4

6-35
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Event output 1 Same as control output 1 output 2 2 Displayed if event output 1 is
Ev1.2 output assignment A assignment A to D
0 to 49
selected by the model No. and
event output 1 operation type
Event output 1 0 2
Ev1.3
is set to one of functions 1–4
output assignment B (Ev1.1 > 2).

Event output 1 0 2
Ev1.4 output assignment C

Event output 1 0 2
Ev1.5 output assignment D

Event output 1 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2
Ev1.6 polarity A to D
1st digit: Polarity A
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
2nd digit: Polarity B 1: Reverse 0
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
4th digit: Polarity D 0
Event output 1 0: Direct 0 2
Ev1.7 polarity 1: Reverse

Event output 1 latch 0: Do not latch 0 2

Ev1.8 1: Latch when ON
2: Latch when OFF (except for
initialization at power-on)
Event output 2 Same as control output 1 operation type 0 2 Displayed if a model with event
Ev2.1 operation type
0: Default output
1: MV1
output 2 is used.
For event output 2, the default
2: MV2 output is internal event 2.
3-6: Functions 1-4
Event output 2 Same as control output 1 output 3 2 Displayed if event output 2 is
Ev2.2 output assignment A assignment A to D
0 to 49
selected by the model No. and
event output 2 operation type
Event output 2 0 2
Ev2.3
is set to one of functions 1–4
output assignment B (Ev2.1 > 2).

Event output 2 0 2
Ev2.4 output assignment C

Event output 2 0 2
Ev2.5 output assignment D

Event output 2 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2
Ev2.6 polarity A to D
1st digit: Polarity A
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
2nd digit: Polarity B 1: Reverse 0
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
4th digit: Polarity D 0
Event output 2 0: Direct 0 2
Ev2.7 polarity 1: Reverse

Event output 2 latch 0: Do not latch 0 2

Ev2.8 1: Latch when ON
2: Latch when OFF (except for
initialization at power-on)

6-36
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Event output 3 Same as control output 1 operation type 0 0 Displayed if a model with event
Ev3.1 operation type
0: Default output
1: MV1
output 3 is used.
For event output 3, the default
2: MV2 output is internal event 3.
3-6: Functions 1-4
Event output 3 Same as control output 1 output 4 2 Displayed if event output 3 is
Ev3.2 output assignment A assignment A to D
0 to 49
selected by the model No. and
event output 3 operation type
Event output 3 0 2
Ev3.3
is set to one of functions 1–4
output assignment B (Ev3.1 > 2).

Event output 3 0 2
Ev3.4 output assignment C

Event output 3 0 2
Ev3.5 output assignment D

Event output 3 “1st digit” (2nd, etc.) means the first digit 2
Ev3.6 polarity A to D
1st digit: Polarity A
(etc.) from the right.
0: Direct 0
2nd digit: Polarity B 1: Reverse 0
3rd digit: Polarity C 0
4th digit: Polarity D 0
Event output 3 0: Direct 0 2
Ev3.7 polarity 1: Reverse

Event output 3 latch 0: Do not latch 0 2

Ev3.8 1: Latch when ON
2: Latch when OFF (except for
initialization at power-on)

6-37
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ User function bank

Bank selection: UF

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
User function 1 Displayed characters are defined for ---- 1 Only the settings that can be
UF-1 each item. The following are special
cases.
displayed can be registered. (For
example, manual reset of the
User function 2 ---- 1
UF-2
PID constants can be registered
---- : Unregistered
when integral time = 0)
P-_: Proportional band of the PID in
User function 3 use ---- 1 Registered settings are added
UF-3 I-_: Integral time of the PID in use
d-_: Derivative time of the PID in use
to the end of the list of settings
that are shown on the operation
User function 4 rE-_: Manual reset of the PID in use ---- 1 display.
UF-4 OL-_: MV low limit of the PID in use
OH-_: MV high limit of the PID in use
User function 5 ---- 1
UF-5
P-_C: Proportional band for cooling of
the PID in use
I-_C: Integral time for cooling of the PID
User function 6 ---- 1
UF-6 in use
d-_C: Derivative time for cooling of the
PID in use
User function 7 ---- 1
UF-7 OL._C: MV low limit for cooling of the PID
in use
OH._C: MV high limit for cooling of the
User function 8 ---- 1
UF-8 PID in use

6-38
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ Lock bank
Bank selection: LOC

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Key lock 0: All settings can be specified. 0 0 The setting can be specified if
LOC 1: Mode, event, operation display, SP,
UF, lock, manual MV, and [MODE] key
the two sets of passwords (1A
and 1B, 2A and 2B) match.
operation can be specified.
The [MODE] key operation,
2: Operation display, SP, UF, lock, manual
MV in MANUAL mode, key
MV, and [MODE] key operation can be
lock, password display, and
specified.
passwords 1A to 2B can be
3: UF, lock, manual MV, and [MODE] key
specified when any value from 0
operation can be specified.
to 3 is set for key lock (LOC).
Communication lock 0: Unlocked 0 2
C.LOc 1: Locked

Loader lock 0: Unlocked 0 2

L.LOc 1: Locked

Password display 0 to 15 0 0 Reset to 0 each time the power

PASS 5: Displays passwords 1A to 2B is turned on.

Password 1A 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 0 The setting can be specified if

PS1A password display (PASS) is set to
5 and the two sets of passwords
Password 2A 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 0
PS2A
(1A and 1B, 2A and 2B) match.

Password 1B 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 0 Displayed if password display

PS1B (PASS) is set to 5.

Password 2B 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 0

PS2B

6-39
Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

„ Instrument information bank

Bank selection: i d

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
ROM ID Always 16 − 2 ROM firmware identification
id01 Setting cannot be changed

ROM version 1 − 2
id02
ROM version 2 − 2
id03
Loader information − 2
id04
EST Information − 2
id05
Manufacturing date Year − 2000 − 2 Date of manufacture and serial
id06 code (year)
Example: Year 2021 is “21”
No.
Setting cannot be changed
Manufacturing date Month + (day ÷ 100) − 2
id07 code (month, day)
Example: Dec. 1 is “12.01.”
Serial No. − 2
id08
Model No. − 2 Product identification code
Id09 Setting cannot be changed

Model information − 2
Id10
Production site code − 2
Id11
Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2
FP01 password 1

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP02 password 2

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP03 password 3

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP04 password 4

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP05 password 5

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP06 password 6

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP07 password 7

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP08 password 8

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP09 password 9

6-40
 Chapter 6. Displayed Items and Settings

Display Item Description Initial User Notes

value level
Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2
FP10 password 10

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP11 password 11

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP12 password 12

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP13 password 13

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP14 password 14

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP15 password 15

Advanced function 0000 to FFFF (hex) 0000 2

FP16 password 16

6-41
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function
7-1 Overview of Communications
If a model with RS-485 communication is used, this device can communicate with a PC, PLC, or other host device
using a program created by the user.

CPL (Controller Peripheral Link: Azbil Corporation’s host communication protocol) or MODBUS can be selected as
the communication protocol. This chapter describes CPL communications.

„ Features
The features of the C1M’s communication functions are as follows:
• Up to 31 C1M units can be connected to a single master station (host device).
• Almost all of the parameter data of this device can be communicated.
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data
• Random access commands are available.
Two or more parameters at separated addresses can be read or written by a single
command.

„ Configuration
The settings shown below must be specified for CPL communication.

They can be displayed and configured if a model with RS-485 communication is used.

Item Display Description Initial User level

value
Communication type 0: CPL 0 Simple,
C 64 1: Modbus/ASCII
standard,
advanced
2: Modbus/RTU
3: PLC link
Station address 0: No communication 0
C 65 1 to 127
Transmission speed 0: 4800 bps 2
C 66 1: 9600 bps
2: 19200 bps
3: 38400 bps
Data format (data 0: 7 bits 1
length) C 67 1: 8 bits
Data format (parity) 0: Even parity 0
C 68 1: Odd parity
2: No parity
Data format (stop bit) 0: 1 bits 0
C 69 1: 2 bits
Communication 1 to 250 ms 3 Advanced
minimum response time C 70
Handling Precautions:
• The settings can be configured using the keys on this device or Smart
Loader Package model SLP-C1F. RS-485 communications cannot be used
for configuration.
7-1
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

„ Communication procedure
The communication procedure is as follows.

(1) The host device (master station) sends an instruction message to one C1M
unit (slave station).

(2) The slave station receives the instruction message and performs read or write
processing according to the content of the message.

(3) The slave station sends a response message appropriate for the type of
processing.

(4) The master station receives the response message.

Handling Precautions:
• Sending data using several protocols intermixed (CPL, Modbus/ASCII,
Modbus/RTU, PLC link) to the same RS-485 transmission line is not
allowed.

7-2
 Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

7-2 Message Structure

„ Message structure
The following shows the message structure.

Messages are broadly classified into two layers: the data link layer and the
application layer.

• Data link layer

This layer contains the basic information required for communications such as
the destination of the communication message and the check information of the
message.

• Application layer

Data is read and written in this layer. The content of the layer varies according to
the purpose of the message.

A message consists of (1) to (8) below.

The command (details sent from the master station) and the response (details
returned from the slave station) are stored in the application layer.

02 h 58H 03H 0DH 0AH

STX X ETX CR LF

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

Data link layer Application layer Data link layer

1 frame
(1) STX (start of message) (5) Instruction message = command, response
message = response
(2) Station address
(6) ETX (end of command/response)
(3) Sub-address
(7) Checksum
(4) Device ID code
(8) Delimiter (end of message)

„ Data link layer

z Overview
The data link layer is of a fixed length. The position of each data item and
the number of its characters are already decided. Note, however, that the data
positions of the data link layer from ETX onwards shift according to the number of
characters in the application layer.

z Response start conditions

• This device sends a response message only when all the message components in
the data link layer of the instruction message are correct. If even one of these is
incorrect, no response message is sent, and the device stands by for reception of
STX.

• The maximum number of word addresses that can be accessed by one frame is 32.

7-3
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

z List of data link layer data definitions

The following list shows the definitions for data in the data link layer.

Data name Character code Number of Meaning of data

characters
STX 02 h 1 Start of message
Station address 0 to 7FH are expressed as 2 Identification
hexadecimal character codes. of device to
communicate with
Sub-address 00 (30H, 30H) 2 No function
Device ID code X (58H) or x (78H) 1 Device type
ETX 03H 1 End position of the
application layer
Checksum 00H to FFH are expressed as 2 Checksum of
2-digit hexadecimal character message
codes.
Delimiter CR (0DH), LF (0AH) 2 End of message

z Description of data items

• STX (02H)

When STX is received, this device interprets it as the start of a command

message. No matter what has been received previously, upon receiving STX, this
device begins processing a new message. In this way, if an instruction message
contains an error due to electromagnetic noise, etc., this device can respond to
the next proper message (a resent message, etc.) from the master station.

• Station address

This device creates a response message only to instruction messages that mention
its station address. A station address is expressed as a 2-digit hexadecimal
character code in a message.

This device returns a response message that includes its own station address. The
station address can be specified by C65 (station address). Note that, if the station
address is set to 0 (30H 30H), this device does not respond even if the station
addresses match.

• Sub-address

Set the sub-address to 00 (30H 30H), because this device does not use sub-
addresses.
However, this device will return a response message that includes a received sub-
address.

• Device ID code

X (58H) or x (78H) can be used. This code is determined for each product series,
and other codes cannot be selected. This device returns a response message that
includes the received device ID code. X (58H) is used as the default, and x (78H)
is used to distinguish the message from the resend message.

7-4
 Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

• ETX

ETX indicates the end of the application layer.

• Checksum

This value is for checking whether something abnormal (e.g., electromagnetic

noise) has caused the message content to change during transmission.

The checksum is expressed as a 2-digit hexadecimal character code.

• How to calculate a checksum

(1) Add the character codes in the message from STX through ETX in single
byte units.

(2) Take two's complement of the low-order one byte of the sum.

(3) Convert the obtained two's complement to a two-byte ASCII code.

The following is a sample checksum calculation:

Sample message

STX : 02H
0: 30H (1st byte of the station address)
1: 31H (2nd byte of the station address)
0: 30H (1st byte of the sub-address)
0: 30H (2nd byte of the sub-address)
X: 58H (device ID code)
R: 52H (1st byte of the command)
S: 53H (2nd byte of the command)
(omitted)

ETX : 03H

(1) A
 dd the character codes in the message from STX through ETX in single
byte units. The addition calculation in single byte units is as follows:
02H + 30H + 31H + 30H + 30H + 58H + 52H + 53H + ... + 03H
The result of this calculation is 376H.

(2) T
 he low-order byte of the sum, 376H, is 76H. The two's complement of
76H is 8AH.

(3) Convert the obtained 8AH to a two-byte ASCII code.

The result is:

8: 38H
A: 41H
The two bytes, 8 (38H) and A (41H), are the checksum.

• Delimiter (CR/LF)

This indicates the end of the message. Immediately after LF is received, the device
enters a state allowed to process the received message.

7-5
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

„ Application layer
The table below shows the configuration of the application layer.

Item Description
Command RS (read decimal format data from consecutive addresses)
WS (write decimal format data to consecutive addresses)
RD (read hexadecimal format data from consecutive addresses)
WD (write hexadecimal format data to consecutive addresses)
RU (read hexadecimal format data from random addresses)
WU (write hexadecimal format data to random addresses)
Data delimiter RS and WS commands: “,” (comma)
Other commands: None
Word address RS and WS commands: decimal value and “W” (e.g., 501W)
Other commands: hexadecimal value (e.g., 01F5)
Number of data RS and WS commands: decimal value (e.g., 1)
records to read
Other commands: hexadecimal value (e.g., 0001)
Data RS and WS commands: decimal value (ex.: 100)
Other commands: hexadecimal value (e.g., 0064)

7-6
 Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

7-3 Description of Commands

„ Continuous data read command (RS command)
This command reads data from consecutive addresses in one message.

z Instruction message
This is a command—in one message—to read data from consecutive word
addresses starting from the specified address. The figure below shows the structure
of the application layer of a “read” instruction message.

R S , 9 1 0 1 W , 1
(1) (2) (3) (2) (4)

Application layer
(1) Continuous data read command
(2) Data delimiter
(3) Starting word address
(4) Read data count

z Response message
If an instruction message is received successfully, a response message appropriate
for the command is returned.

The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of a response message
for a read command.

• Normal termination (reading of single data record)

0 0 ,
(1) (2) (3)

• Normal termination (reading of multiple data records)

0 0 , , ,
(1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (2) (5)

• Abnormal termination

X X A termination code indicating an error is entered in place of XX.

7 - 6 List of Termination Codes (p. 7-15) (for details about termination
(1) codes)
(1) Termination code
(2) Data delimiter
(3) Read data 1
(4) Read data 2 to (n−1)
(5) Read data n

z Maximum read data count per message

64 words

7-7
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

„ Continuous data write command (WS command)

This command writes data to consecutive addresses.

z Instruction message
The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of a “write” instruction
message.

W S , 1 5 0 1 W , 1 , 6 5
(1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (2) (5)
(1) Write command
(2) Data delimiter
(3) Starting word address
(4) Write data (1st word)
(5) Write data (2nd word)

z Response message
The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of a response message
for a write command.

• Normal termination
0 0
(1)

• Abnormal termination or warning

A termination code indicating an error is entered in place of XX.
X X
7 - 6 List of Termination Codes (p. 7-15) (for details about termination
(1) codes)
(1) Termination code

z Maximum write data count per message

64 words

7-8
 Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

„ Fixed-length continuous data read command (RD command)

This command reads continuous data in two-byte units. This command is suitable
for handling data in ladder programs sent by PLC communications as the data is of
a fixed length.
The starting word address is expressed as four hexadecimal digits. The data count
is expressed as four digits, and data is expressed as four × n (n is a positive integer)
hexadecimal digits.

z Instruction message
The read starting word address (four hexadecimal digits) and the read data count
(four hexadecimal digits) are sent.

R D
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Fixed-length continuous data read
command
(2) Starting word address
(3) Read data count

z Response message
If the command is processed successfully, a termination code indicating success
(two decimal digits) is returned with the specified number of read data records
(four hexadecimal digits × read data count). If there was an error, a termination
code indicating error (two decimal digits) is returned without appending the data
that was read.

• Normal termination (reading of single data record)

0 0
(1) (2)

• Normal termination (reading of multiple data records)

0 0
(1) (2) (3) (4)

• Abnormal termination
A termination code indicating an error is entered in place of XX.
X X
7 - 6 List of Termination Codes (p. 7-15) (for details about termination
(1) codes)
(1) Termination code
(2) Read data 1
(3) Read data 2 to (n−1)
(4) Read data n

z Maximum read data count per message

64 words

7-9
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

„ Fixed-length continuous data write command (WD command)

This command writes continuous data in two-byte units. This command is suitable
for handling data in ladder programs sent by PLC communications as the data is of
a fixed length.

The starting word address is expressed as four hexadecimal digits. Data is expressed
as four × n (n is a positive integer) hexadecimal digits.

z Instruction message
The write starting word address (four hexadecimal digits) and data to be written
(four × n hexadecimal digits) is sent.

• Writing of one data record

W D
(1) (2) (3)

• Writing of multiple data records

W D
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Fixed-length continuous data write command
(2) Starting word address
(3) Write data 1
(4) Write data 2 to (n-1)
(5) Write data n

z Response message
If data is written, a termination code indicating success (two decimal digits) is
returned. If only part of the data is written, a termination code indicating warning
(two decimal digits) is returned. If none of the data is written, a termination code
indicating error (two decimal digits) is returned.

• Normal termination
0 0
(1)

• Abnormal termination or warning

A termination code indicating an error is entered in place of XX.
X X
7 - 6 List of Termination Codes (p. 7-15) (for details about termination
(1) codes)
(1) Termination code

z Maximum write data count per message

64 words

7-10
 Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

„ Fixed-length random data read command (RU command)

This command reads random (non-consecutive) data in two-byte units.

z Instruction message
The word address (four hexadecimal digits) of the data to be read is sent in the
specified order.

R U 0 0
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Fixed-length random data read command
(2) Sub-command: fixed to “00”
(3) Word address 1
(4) Word address 2 to (n−1)
(5) Word address n

z Response message
If the command is processed successfully, a termination code indicating success
(two decimal digits) is returned with the specified number of read data records
(four hexadecimal digits × read data count). If there was an error, a termination
code indicating error (two decimal digits) is returned without appending the data
that was read.

• Normal termination
0 0
(1) (2) (3) (4)

• Abnormal termination
A termination code indicating an error is entered in place of XX.
X X
7 - 6 List of Termination Codes (p. 7-15) (for details about termination
(1) codes)
(1) Termination code
(2) Read data 1
(3) Read data 2 to (n−1)
(4) Read data n

z Maximum read data count per message

64 words

7-11
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

„ Fixed-length random data write command (WU command)

This command writes data to random (non-consecutive) addresses in two-byte
units. Data is expressed in four hexadecimal digits.

z Instruction message
Data is sent for the specified write data count with the data address (four
hexadecimal digits) of the data to be written and the data (four hexadecimal digits)
as a pair.

W U 0 0
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Fixed-length random data write command
(2) Sub-command: fixed to “00”
(3) Word address 1
(4) Write data 1
(5) Word address n
(6) Write data n

z Response message
If data is written, a termination code indicating success (two decimal digits) is
returned. If only part of the data is written, a termination code indicating warning
(two decimal digits) is returned. If none of the data is written, a termination code
indicating error (two decimal digits) is returned.

• Normal termination
0 0
(1)

• Abnormal termination or warning

A termination code indicating an error is entered in place of XX.
X X
7 - 6 List of Termination Codes (p. 7-15) (for details about termination
(1) codes)
(1) Termination code

z Maximum write data count per message

64 words

7-12
 Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

7-4 Definition of Word Addresses

„ RAM and EEPROM areas of data addresses
Word addresses are categorized as follows:

Word address Name Notes

(Hexadecimal)
273W to 14859W RAM access word Reading and writing of these addresses
address are both performed on RAM.
(0111 to 3A0B)
Since writing is not performed to
EEPROM, the value returns to that stored
in EEPROM when the power is turned off
and back on.
16657W to 31243W EEPROM access Writing is performed to both RAM and
word address EEPROM, but reading is performed only
(4111 to 7A0B)
on RAM.
Since writing is also performed to
EEPROM, the value does not change even
when the power is turned off and back
on.

Handling Precautions:
• The number of EEPROM erase/write cycles is limited (about 100,000 cycles).
Accordingly, it is recommended that very frequently written parameters be
written to RAM, which does not have a limitation on cycles. Note, however,
that the data written to the RAM area is overwritten with the EEPROM area
data when the power is turned on.

„ Write data range

If the value to be written is outside the range specified for the parameter, the value
is not written and a termination code indicating error is returned.

„ Write conditions
A termination code indicating an error is also returned if the conditions for writing
are not satisfied.

7-13
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

7-5 Numerical Representation in the Application Layer

The specifications of numerical representation are decimal variable-length (zero suppress) for RS and WS
commands and hexadecimal fixed-length for RD, WD, RU and WU commands. Details are as follows:

„ RS and WS commands
Item Specifications Error handling
Unnecessary Cannot be appended. The message processing is
space aborted and a termination
Unnecessary Cannot be appended. code indicating error is
zero returned in a response
Numerical value Cannot be omitted. message.
= zero
Be sure to use “0.”
Other Numerical values may be prefixed with a
unnecessary “−” expressing a negative number.
characters
Any other characters cannot be
appended.
The "+" sign must not be appended to
indicate positive numerical values.
Range of −32768 to +32767
available
Values outside this range are not
numerical values
allowed.

„ RD, WD, RU, and WU commands

Item Specifications Error handling
Unnecessary Cannot be appended. The message processing is
space aborted and a termination
Unnecessary Cannot be appended. code indicating error is
zero returned in a response
Numerical value Cannot be omitted. message.
= zero
Be sure to use “0000.”
Other Cannot be appended.
unnecessary
characters
Range of 0000H to FFFFH
available
numerical values

7-14
 Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

7-6 List of Termination Codes

If an error occurred in the application layer, a termination code indicating error is returned in a response message.

Termination Description Process Example

code
00 Normal termination All the processing has completed
successfully.
99 Undefined command Only the termination code is AA,1001W,1
Other errors returned. The message is not RX03E80001
processed.
10 Numerical value conversion error Processing is aborted when a RS,1001W,100000
conversion error or a range error RS,01001W,1
• A numerical value of 7 digits or more
has occurred.
RS,+1001W,1
• A figure other than 0 of which the leading
(Processing is performed until WS,10?1W,1
digit is 0
just before the abnormality
RD03E9000>
• The conversion result is 65535 or greater, occurs)
or -65536 or smaller. RU0103E9

• Other obvious illegal representation of

an integer
22 The value of read data is outside the The high limit or low limit
specified range. value is read from the
corresponding word address,
• The decimal point position is changed
and the subsequent processing
and the value becomes −32769 or
continues.
smaller, or 32768 or larger.
The value of written data is outside the Processing is continued (Example: Specified range
specified range. excluding the relevant word for 5001W is 0 to 1)
address. (Processing aborted)
WS,5001W,3000
WD13890BB8
WU0013890BB8
23 Writing disabled due to instrument set Processing is continued
value conditions, instrument external excluding the relevant word
conditions, etc. address.
Writing/reading disabled because Only the termination code is
communications/loader locked returned. The message is not
processed.
40 Read/write word count error Only the termination code is RS,1001W,100
returned. The message is not RD03E90064
processed.
41 Word address out of the range Only the termination code is RS,100000W,1
returned. The message is not RD03G90001
• Out of the range between 256 and 65534
processed.
RU00$3E903EA
WS,03E9W,1
WD0XXX0001
WU00o3E90001
42 The value of written data is outside the Processing is performed up to WS,2101W,100,XXX
specified range. the relevant word address. The WS,2101W,100000
succeeding processing is not
• −32769 or smaller, or 32768 or greater WD03E900010XXX
performed.

7-15
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

Termination Description Process Example

code
83 Any of the following alarms has occurred: Only the termination code is
returned. The message is not
• AL74: Nonvolatile memory error
processed.
• AL80: Nonvolatile memory not initialized
• AL81: Setting value area error
• AL82: Adjustment value area error
• AL83: Internal system error
• AL84: Setting value initialization error
• AL95: Setting value error
• AL96: Adjustment value error

7-16
 Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

7-7 Reception and Transmission Timing

„ Time specifications for instruction and response messages
The cautions below are required with regard to the timing of command message
transmission from the master station and response message transmission from the
slave station (this device).

z Response monitoring time

The maximum response time from the end of the instruction message transmission
by the master station until when the master station receives a response message
from this device is two seconds ((1) in the figure below).
So, the response monitoring time should be set to two seconds.
Generally, when a response time-out occurs, the instruction message is resent.

z Transmission start time

A wait time of 10ms is required before the master station starts to transmit the next
instruction message (to the same slave station or a different slave station) after the
end of receiving response message ((2) in the figure below).
(1) (2)

Transmission line Instruction Response Instruction Response

message message message message

(1) End of transmission by master station − Transmission start time of this device
= 2000 ms max.
(2) End of transmission by this device − Transmission start time of master station
= 10 ms min.

„ RS-485 driver control timing specifications

When the transmission/reception on the RS-485 3-wire system is directly
controlled by the master station, care should be paid to the following timing:
(1) (4)
Master station
Driver control (enable) (disable)

Transmission Valid data Valid data

line
(Instruction message) (Response message)
This device
Driver control (disable) (enable)
(2) (3)

End of transmission by master station End of transmission by this device

(1) End of transmission by master station − Driver disable time = 500 μs max.
(2) End of reception by this device − Driver enable time = Response time-out
setting (C70) or longer
(3) End of transmission by this device − Driver disable time = 10 ms max.
(4) End of reception by master station − Driver enable time = 10 ms min.

7-17
Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

7-8 Precautions for Creating Communication Programs for

the Master Station
Keep the following points in mind when creating a communication program.

• This device takes a maximum of two seconds before it sends a response. Therefore, specify the response
monitoring time to two seconds.

• Resend the message if there is no response within two seconds. Set a communications error to occur if there is
no response even after two retries.

• Be sure to resend as described above, because sometimes a message is not transmitted correctly for some
reason such as electrical noise during communication.

Note
• If “X” and “x” device ID codes are alternated when a message is resent by the
master station, it will be easy to identify whether the received message is a
response to the previous instruction or to the current one.

„ Communication program example

A sample program is installed in the folder in which Smart Loader Package
SLP-C1F has been installed.

In the default setting, the directory is

C:\Program Files(x86)\SLP\SLPC1\Samples\cpl.cpp.

This program is written in C++.

The sample program is for your reference only, and there is no guarantee that all
functions will work properly.

Handling Precautions:
• Azbil Corporation will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by applying
this sample program.

z Before executing the sample program

Check the settings for communication type, station address, transmission speed and
data format of the instrument.

7-18
 Chapter 7. CPL Communication Function

z Compiling
The following is an example of compiling with Visual Studio 2019.

After launching x86 Native Tools Command Prompt for VS 2019 from the start
menu, compile using the cl command.

Example of execution results

C:\Sample>cl cpl.cpp
Microsoft(R) C/C++ Optimizing Compiler Version 19.29.30133 for x86
Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

cpl.cpp
Microsoft (R) Incremental Linker Version 14.29.30133.0
Copyright (C) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

/out:cpl.exe
cpl.obj

z Running the sample program

This program reads and writes data using COM port 1. When executed, the
application layers of the instruction and response messages communicated are
displayed.

command:RS,14356W,2
result:00,0,0
command:WS,14357W,2
result:00

Example of execution results

z Processing of the sample program

• Setup for communication
Call open () and initialize the RS-232C port.

• Executing commands
Set a desired character string in “command” and call AppCPL().

7-19
Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function
8-1 Overview of Communications
If a model with RS-485 communication is used, this device can communicate with a PC, PLC or other host device
using a program created by the user.

CPL (Controller Peripheral Link: Azbil Corporation's host communication protocol) or MODBUS can be selected as
the communication protocol. This chapter describes MODBUS communications.

„ Features
Key features of the C1M’s communication functions are as follows:

• Up to 31 C1M units can be connected to a single master station (host device).

• Almost all of the parameter data of this device can be communicated.

Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Handling Precautions:
• In MODBUS communications, the data address of this device that is set in
the host device may be reduced by 1 in a communication message during
transmission. Be sure to understand the specifications of the host device
before using this device.
Example: If the data address is set to 1001 in the host device, it will be 1000 in
a communication message during transmission.

„ Configuration
The settings shown below must be specified for Modbus communication.

Item Display Description Initial User level

value
Communication type 0: CPL 0 Simple,
C 64 1: Modbus/ASCII standard,
advanced
2: Modbus/RTU
3: PLC link
Station address 0: No communication 0
C 65 1 to 127
Transmission speed 0: 4800 bps 2
C 66 1: 9600 bps
2: 19200 bps
3: 38400 bps
Data format (data 0: 7 bits 1
length) C 67 1: 8 bits

Data format (parity) 0: Even parity 0

C 68 1: Odd parity
2: No parity
Data format (stop bit) 0: 1 bit 0
C 69 1: 2 bits

Communication 1 to 250 ms 3 Advanced

minimum response time C 70

8-1
Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

• These items can be displayed and configured if a model with RS-485

communication is used.

• When the communication type is set to MODBUS/RTU, the operation is fixed to

8-bit data regardless of the data format (data length) setting.

Handling Precautions:
• The settings can be configured using the keys on this device or using
Smart Loader Package model SLP-C1F. RS-485 communications cannot be
used for configuration.

„ Communication procedure
The communication procedure is as follows.

(1) The host device (master station) sends an instruction message to one C1M
unit (slave station).

(2) The slave station receives the instruction message and performs read or write
processing according to the content of the message.

(3) The slave station sends a response message appropriate for the type of
processing.

(4) The master station receives the response message.

Handling Precautions:
• Sending data using several protocols intermixed (CPL, Modbus/ASCII,
Modbus/RTU, PLC link) to the same RS-485 transmission line is not
allowed.

8-2
 Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

8-2 Message Structure

„ Message Structure
The following shows the message structure.

All messages are expressed in hexadecimal.

z Modbus/ASCII
All messages are written in hexadecimal ASCII codes (each slot below represents
one character).

A MODBUS/ASCII message consists of (1) to (5) below.

The command (details sent from the master station) and the response (details
returned from the slave station) are stored in (3).

3AH 0DH 0AH

: CR LF

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

1 frame
(1) Start of message (colon, expressed with ASCII code 3AH)
(2) Station address (2 bytes)
(3) Instruction message, response message
(4) Checksum (LRC) (2 bytes)
(5) Delimiter (end of message)

• Colon (3AH)

When a colon (3AH) is received, this device interprets it as the start of a

command message.

No matter what has been received previously, upon receiving a colon, this device
begins processing a new message.

In this way, if an instruction message contains an error due to electromagnetic

noise, etc., this device can respond to the next proper message (a resent message,
etc.) from the master station.

• Station address

This device creates a response message only to instruction messages that mention
its station address. A station address is expressed as a 2-digit hexadecimal
character code in a message.

This device returns a response message that includes its own station address.

The station address can be specified by C65 (station address). Note that, if the
station address is set to 0 (30H 30H), this device does not respond even if the
station addresses match.

8-3
Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

• Checksum (LRC)

This value is for checking whether something abnormal (e.g., electromagnetic

noise) has caused the message content to change during transmission. The
checksum is expressed as a 2-digit hexadecimal character code. The procedure for
calculating the checksum is as follows.

(1) A
 dd from the start of the station address to immediately before the
checksum. Note that the values to be added are not the ASCII character
values in the instruction message but the one-byte binary data converted
from two ASCII characters.

(2) Take the two's complement of the sum.

(3) Convert the low-order one byte of the sum to a 2-digit hexadecimal
character code.
The following is a sample checksum calculation:
Sample message
:: 3AH (start of the message)
0: 30H (1st byte of the station address)
A: 41H (2nd byte of the station address)
0: 30H (1st byte of the read command)
3: 33H (2nd byte of the read command)
0: 30H (1st byte of the starting word address)
3: 33H (2nd byte of the starting word address)
E: 45H (3rd byte of the starting word address)
9: 39H (4th byte of the starting word address)
0: 30H (1st byte of the read count)
0: 30H (2nd byte of the read count)
0: 30H (3rd byte of the read count)
2: 32H (4th byte of the read count)

(1) A
 dd from the start of the station address to immediately before the
checksum. The addition calculation is as follows:
0AH + 03H + 03H + E9H + 00H + 02H
The result is FBH.

(2) T
 he low-order byte of FBH is FBH. It remains unchanged. The two's
complement of FBH is 05H.

(3) C
 onvert the obtained 05H to a two-byte ASCII code.
The result is:
0 : 30H
5 : 35H

The two bytes, 0 (30H) and 5 (35H), are the checksum.

• Delimiter (CR/LF)

This indicates the end of the message. Immediately after LF is received, the device
enters a state allowed to process the received message.

8-4
 Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

z Modbus/RTU
All messages use binary data (each slot below represents one byte).

A Modbus RTU message consists of (1) to (3) below.

The command (details sent from the master station) and the response (details
returned from the slave station) are stored in (2).

(1) (2) (3)

1 frame
(1) Station address (1 byte)
(2) Instruction message, response message
(3) Checksum (2 bytes)

• Station address

This device creates a response message only to instruction messages that mention
its station address. A station address is expressed in one byte in a message.

This device returns a response message that includes its own station address.

The station address can be specified by C65 (station address). Note that, if
the station address is set to 0, this device does not respond even if the station
addresses match.

8-5
Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

• Checksum (CRC)

This value is for checking whether something abnormal (e.g., electromagnetic

noise) has caused the message content to change during transmission. The check
sum is expressed in two bytes.

The procedure for calculating the checksum (CRC) is as follows.

/* CRC calculation */
/* Input unsigned char length: Number of bytes sent */
/* unsigned char * top: Sent data start pointer */
/* Output unsigned short CRC: CRC calculation result */
unsigned short crc16 (unsigned char length, unsigned char *top)
{
unsigned short CRC= 0xffff;
unsigned short next;
unsigned short carry;
unsigned short n;
unsigned char crcl;

while ( length-- ) {
next = (unsigned short)*top;
CRC ^= next;
for (n = 0; n < 8; n++) {
carry = CRC & 1;
CRC >>= 1;
if (carry) {
CRC ^= 0xA001;
}
}
top++;
}

crcl = (CRC & 0xff00)>>8;

CRC <<= 8;
CRC |= crcl;

return CRC;
}

• Determining the end of one frame

The message end (end of 1 frame) is determined when the period of time during
which no character is received exceeds the time specified for the transmission
speed. If the next character is not received by the timeout time shown below, the
frame is determined to have ended.

Note that the timeout time has a fluctuation of ±1 ms.

Set transmission speed Timeout time

(bps)
4800 9 ms or more
9600 5 ms or more
19200 3 ms or more
38400 2 ms or more

8-6
 Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

„ Command types
Command (send message) types supported by this device are as follows.

Command type Description Conformance class

ASCII RTU
Read multiple data records 03 (2 bytes) 03H (1 byte) 0
Write multiple data records 10 (2 bytes) 10H (1 byte) 0
Write 1 data record 06 (2 bytes) 06H (1 byte) 1*

* This device does not support class 1 commands other than the writing of one data
record.

„ Number of data records

The number of data records that can be read or written using a one-frame message
is shown below.

Command type Description

(function code)
ASCII RTU
Read command 1 to 64 1 to 64
Write command 1 to 64 1 to 64
1 data record write 1 1
command

8-7
Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

„ Other specifications
If there is an error in a response message, one of the exception codes shown below
is added after the function code.

Error type Exception code Description

ASCII RTU
Illegal function code 01 (2 bytes) 01H (1 byte) Function code not supported
by this device
The value is outside the
specified range from −32767 to
+32768.
Illegal data address 02 (2 bytes) 02H (1 byte) An included data address
cannot be read or written.
Device failure 04 (2 bytes) 04H (1 byte) Any of the following alarms has
occurred:
·A
 L74: Nonvolatile memory
error
·A
 L80: Nonvolatile memory
not initialized
· AL81: Setting value area error
·A
 L82: Adjustment value area
error
· AL83: Internal system error
·A
 L84: Setting value
initialization error
· AL95: Setting value error
· AL96: Adjustment value error
Illegal data 03 (2 bytes) 03H (1 byte) Error other than the above

8-8
 Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

8-3 Description of Commands

„ Read command (03H)
z Instruction message
This is a command—in one message—to read data from consecutive word
addresses starting from the specified address. The following is a sample “read”
instruction message.

Modbus/ASCII
3AH 30H 41H 30H 33H 30H 33H 45H 39H 30H 30H 30H 32H 30H 35H 0DH 0AH
: 0 A 0 3 0 3 E 9 0 0 0 2 0 5 CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(1) Start of the message (5) Read data count
(2) Station address (6) Checksum (LRC)
(3) Read command (03H) (7) Delimiter
(4) Starting word address

Modbus/RTU
0AH 03H 03H E9H 00H 02 h 14H C0H
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Station address
(2) Read command (03H)
(3) Starting word address
(4) Read data count
(5) Checksum (CRC)

z Response message
If an instruction message is received successfully, a response message appropriate
for the command is returned.

The following is a sample response message for a read command.

Modbus/ASCII

• Normal termination
3AH 30H 41H 30H 33H 30H 34H 30H 33H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 33H 45H 38H 0DH 0AH
: 0 A 0 3 0 4 0 3 0 1 0 0 0 3 E 8 CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1) Start of the message (5) Read data 1
(2) Station address (6) Read data 2
(3) Read command (03H) (7) Checksum (LRC)
(4) Read data count × 2 (8) Delimiter

8-9
Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

• Abnormal termination
3AH 30H 41H 38H 34H 30H 31H 37H 31H 0DH 0AH
: 0 A 8 4 0 1 7 1 CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Start of the message
(2) Station address
(3) Error flag (Since undefined “04” was sent as a command with an instruction
message, the most significant bit was turned ON and “84” was returned.)
(4) Termination code indicating error ( Page 8-8)
(5) Checksum (LRC)
(6) Delimiter

Modbus/RTU

• Normal example
0AH 03H 04H 03H 01H 00H 03H 51H 76H
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Station address
(2) Read command (03H)
(3) Read data count × 2 (bytes)
(4) Read data 1
(5) Read data 2
(6) Checksum (CRC)

• Abnormal termination
0AH 84H 01H F3H 02 h
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Station address
(2) Error flag (Since undefined “04H” was sent as a command with an instruction
message, the most significant bit was turned ON and “84H” was returned.)
(3) Termination code indicating error ( Page 8-8)
(4) Checksum (CRC)

8-10
 Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

„ Write command (10H)

z Instruction message
This is a command—in one message—to write data to consecutive word addresses
starting from the specified address. The following is a sample “write” instruction
message.

Example: 01A0H and 0E53H are written to two consecutive word addresses
starting from 1501W (05DDH).

Modbus/ASCII
3AH 30H 31H 31H 30H 30H 35H 44H 44H 30H 30H 30H 32H 30H 34H 30H 31H 41H 30H 30H 45H 35H 33H 30H 35H 0DH 0AH
: 0 1 1 0 0 5 D D 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 1 A 0 0 E 5 3 0 5 CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
(1) Start of the message (7) Write data 1
(2) Station address (8) Write data 2
(3) Write command (10H) (9) Checksum (LRC)
(4) Starting word address (10) Delimiter
(5) Write data count
(6) Write data count ×2

Modbus/RTU
01H 10H 05H DDH 00H 02 h 04H 01H A0H 0EH 53H 45H B9H
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 7 (8)
(1) Station address (5) Write data count ×2
(2) Write command (10H) (6) Write data 1
(3) Starting word address (7) Write data 2
(4) Write data count (8) Checksum (CRC)

z Response message
If an instruction message is received successfully, a response message appropriate
for the command is returned.

The following is a sample response message for a write command.

Modbus/ASCII
3AH 30H 31H 31H 30H 30H 35H 44H 44H 30H 30H 30H 32H 30H 42H 0DH 0AH
: 0 1 1 0 0 5 D D 0 0 0 2 0 B CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(1) Start of the message (5) Write data count
(2) Station address (6) Checksum (LRC)
(3) Write command (10H) (7) Delimiter
(4) Starting word address

8-11
Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

Modbus/RTU
01H 10H 05H DDH 00H 02 h D1H 3EH
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Station address
(2) Write command (10H)
(3) Write starting word address
(4) Write data count
(5) Checksum (CRC)

Note
• The format of a response message for abnormal termination is the same as that of
the read command.

8-12
 Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

„ One data record write command (06H)

z Instruction message
This is a command to write one data record to the specified address. The following
is a sample write instruction message.

Example: 01A0H is written to word address 1501W (05DDH).

Modbus/ASCII
3AH 30H 31H 30H 36H 30H 35H 44H 44H 30H 31H 41H 30H 37H 36H 0DH 0AH
: 0 1 0 6 0 5 D D 0 1 A 0 7 6 CR LF
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(1) Start of the message (5) Write data
(2) Station address (6) Checksum (LRC)
(3) Write command (06H) (7) Delimiter
(4) Word address

Modbus/RTU
01H 06H 05H DDH 01H A0H 18H D4H
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Station address
(2) Write command (06H)
(3) Word address
(4) Write data
(5) Checksum (CRC)

z Response message
The format of a response message for normal termination is the same as that of the
instruction message.

Note
• The format of a response message for abnormal termination is the same as that of
the read command.

8-13
Chapter 8. Modbus Communication Function

8-4 Specifications Common with CPL Communication Function

„ Definition of word addresses
7 - 4 Definition of Word Addresses (p. 7-13)

„ Numerical representation
The specifications of numerical representation are the same as the following:

7 - 5 Numerical Representation in the Application Layer

RD, WD, RU, and WU commands (p. 7-14)

„ Specifications of RS-485 driver control timing

7 - 7 Reception and Transmission Timing (p. 7-17)

8-14
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function
9-1 Overview
If a model with RS-485 communication is used, this device can directly communicate with a PLC using the PLC link
communication function.

With this function, data retained by a PLC can be written to this device and vice versa.

The PLC link communication function can use the C1A and C1M at the same time if conditions such as the
communication protocol and communication speed are met.

Sample connection
PLC

Serial module
31 units max.
……

C1M C1M C1M

……

„ Supported PLC protocol

• Mitsubishi QnA-compatible 3C frame format 4

• Omron FINS

• General-purpose Modbus/RTU

„ Supported PLCs (typical models)

• Mitsubishi

MELSEC iQ-R/iQ-F/L series (Mitsubishi QnA-compatible 3C format 4 protocol)

MELSEC Q series (Mitsubishi QnA-compatible 3C format 4 protocol)

• Omron

CS/CJ/CP series (FINS protocol)

NJ/NX series (FINS protocol)

• Keyence

KV Nano series (Modbus/RTU protocol)

• Siemens

S7-1200 series (Modbus/RTU protocol)

• Modbus/RTU device

General-purpose Modbus/RTU device (Modbus/RTU protocol)

9-1
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

„ Specifications
• Number of connected PLC units = 1

• Number of connected C1M units = 31

• Communication data count: 64 (PLC → C1M), 64 (C1M → PLC)

„ Precautions for the PLC link communication function

• When the PLC link communication function is used, RS-485 communication
with the host device cannot be used.

• Do not connect anything other than the C1M and one PLC unit to the RS-485
communication line.

• Set the C1M addresses from 1 to the maximum number of connected C1M units.
The maximum number of connected C1M units can be selected from 8 (default),
16, 24, and 31.

• The PLC’s device ID and the C1M’s station address must be different.

• Do not use 255 or 254 as the device ID of the PLC.

• New settings will apply after the power of the device is turned off and back on. If
you have changed the settings, turn the power off and back on.

• Use the required number of consecutive registers on the PLC.

• Different protocols cannot be used at the same time.

9-2
 Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

9-2 Data Transmission

PLC link communication is a function for transferring data between the PLC and this controller. There are two
transfer types: “Cyclic data transfer” and “Triggered data transfer.”

The type of transfer can be set in the PLC link settings of the SLP-C1F Smart Loader Package.

The upper limits for the number of transfer processes and number of sheets are shown below.

Function Maximum No. of Maximum No. of Total maximum No. of Total maximum No. of
sheets processes in 1 sheet sheets for the function processes for the
function
Cyclic data transfer 4 sheets 64 lines 4 sheets 64 lines
Triggered data transfer 4 sheets 64 lines

z Cyclic data transfer

Data from the controller can be transferred to the PLC periodically. Data can also
be transferred from the host device to the controller.
Major applications:

• Saving controller data to the PLC

• Monitoring controller data by the PLC for device management
The controller transfers data periodically as follows.

Model C1M
(1) Cyclic start of data transmission
PLC
(3) Write
D0000 (2) Read
D0001 PV
D0002 MV
D0003 Input alarm status
Instrument alarm status
M0010
(4) Notify

(1) The controller starts cyclic data transfer according to the configuration sheets.

(2) Data is read from the controller.

(3) The read data is written to the PLC.

(4) When transfer of the data specified for the sheet is complete, a completion
notification is written.

Handling Precautions
• The normal memory area and RAM area are available for the data written from
the PLC to the C1M.
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data (for details)

9-3
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

z Triggered data transfer

Data from the controller is transferred to the PLC when the trigger device is
detected turning from OFF to ON. Data can also be transferred from the PLC to the
controller.

Major applications:

• Changing the controller settings (SP, PID, etc.) from the PLC
• Changing the controller operations (RUN/READY mode selection, etc.) from
the PLC

The controller executes triggered data transfer as follows.

Model C1M
PLC
(1) Trigger = ON Trigger device
M0000

(2) Read
D0000 (3) Write
D0001 SP
D0002 RUN/READY
D0003 AUTO/MANUAL
Manual MV
M0010
(4) Notify

(1) The controller reads the trigger device in order to monitor the trigger device
turning from OFF to ON. When the trigger device is turned on, triggered data
transfer starts.

(2) Data is read from the PLC.

(3) The read data is written to the controller.

(4) When transfer of the data specified for the sheet is complete, a completion
notification is written.

9-4
 Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

The triggered transfer scan cycle and triggered data transfer operations are as
follows.

Data transfer is started for all sheets for which trigger device = ON is detected.

OFF confirmation ON confirmation

Triggered transfer scan cycle

ON
Trigger device
(ON/OFF by PLC)
OFF

Processing
Triggered data
transfer sheet 1
Stopped

“Trigger ON” cannot be detected if the trigger device is turned

on and off by PLC on a cycle shorter than the scan cycle.

When the [Trigger device initialization] setting is [Yes], the trigger device is turned
off immediately after the trigger is detected. If the trigger device is turned off by
the trigger device initialization function, its status is the same as when the C1M
confirms that the trigger device is off. Therefore if the trigger device is turned on, it
is detected in the next trigger device scan.
Trigger device initialization

OFF confirmation ON confirmation ON confirmation

Triggered transfer scan cycle

ON
Trigger device
OFF confirmed
OFF

Processing
Triggered data
transfer sheet 1
Stopped

When the trigger device is turned off by the trigger device

initialization function, the next trigger will be detected.

9-5
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

„ Usable devices
The address ranges of the devices (data) usable with each model are as follows.

z C1M controller (this device)

Various monitoring data and parameters can be selected in the PLC link settings
in the SLP-C1F Smart Loader Package. Frequently used data and addresses can be
entered directly.

See the following table for the addresses of frequently used data.

Name R/W Address

Decimal Hex
Representative alarm R/- 14336 3800
DO state R/- 14337 3801
DI state R/- 14338 3802
Loop PV R/- 14356 3814
Loop SP R/- 14357 3815
MV R/- 14358 3816
CT1 current when output ON R/- 14418 3852
CT2 current when output ON R/- 14419 3853
Heat MV R/- 14420 3854
Cool MV R/- 14421 3855
LSP group selection R/W 14592 3900
LSP in use R/W 14593 3901
Manual MV R/W 14594 3902
RUN/READY R/W 14595 3903
AUTO/MANUAL R/W 14596 3904
AT stop/start selection R/W 14597 3905
P(Proportional Band) in use R/W 14848 3A00
I(Integral time) in use R/W 14849 3A01
D(Derivative time) in use R/W 14850 3A02
Manual Reset in use R/W 14851 3A03
Output low limit in use R/W 14852 3A04
Output high limit in use R/W 14853 3A05
P(Proportional Band)(Cool) in use R/W 14854 3A06
I(Integral time)(Cool) in use R/W 14855 3A07
D(Derivative time)(Cool) in use R/W 14856 3A08
Output low limit(Cool) in use R/W 14858 3A0A
Output high limit(Cool) in use R/W 14859 3A0B

R/- Can be read from the C1M and written to the PLC.
R/W Can be read from the C1M and written to the PLC and written from the PLC to the
C1M.

9-6
 Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

z Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC iQ-R/iQ-F/L series (Mitsubishi QnA-compatible 3C format 4 protocol)

Device type Address range
Input relay X000000 to X7FFFFF
Output relay Y000000 to Y7FFFFF
Internal relay M000000 to M999999
Special relay SM00000 to SM99999
Link special relay SB00000 to SB7FFFF
Edge relay V000000 to V999999
Latch relay L000000 to L999999
Link relay B000000 to B7FFFFF
Annunciator F000000 to F999999
Timer (contact) TS00000 to TS99999
Timer (coil) TC00000 to TC99999
Retentive timer (contact) SS00000 to SS99999
Retentive timer (coil) SC00000 to SC99999
Counter (contact) CS00000 to CS99999
Counter (coil) CC00000 to CC99999
Data register D000000 to D999999
Link register W000000 to W7FFFFF
Index register Z000000 to Z999999
File register (R) R000000 to R999999
File register (ZR) ZR00000 to ZR7FFFF
File register (ZR)(decimal) ZR00000 to ZR99999
Special register SD00000 to SD99999
Link special register SW00000 to SW7FFFF
Timer current value TN00000 to TN99999
Retentive timer current value SN00000 to SN99999
Counter current value CN00000 to CN99999

Note: The range of available addresses varies depending on the specifications and
settings of the CPU unit.

9-7
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

z Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC Q series (Mitsubishi QnA-compatible 3C format 4 protocol)

Device type Address range

Input relay X000000 to X7FFFFF
Output relay Y000000 to Y7FFFFF
Internal relay M000000 to M999999
Special relay SM00000 to SM99999
Link special relay SB00000 to SB7FFFF
Edge relay V000000 to V999999
Latch relay L000000 to L999999
Link relay B000000 to B7FFFFF
Annunciator F000000 to F999999
Timer (contact) TS00000 to TS99999
Timer (coil) TC00000 to TC99999
Retentive timer (contact) SS00000 to SS99999
Retentive timer (coil) SC00000 to SC99999
Counter (contact) CS00000 to CS99999
Counter (coil) CC00000 to CC99999
Data register D000000 to D999999
Link register W000000 to W7FFFFF
Index register Z000000 to Z999999
File register (R) R000000 to R999999
File register ZR00000 to ZR7FFFF
Special register SD00000 to SD99999
Link special register SW00000 to SW7FFFF
Timer current value TN00000 to TN99999
Retentive timer current value SN00000 to SN99999
Counter current value CN00000 to CN99999
Note: The range of available addresses varies depending on the specifications and
settings of the CPU unit.

9-8
 Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

z Omron CS/CJ/CP series (Omron FINS protocol)

z Omron NJ/NX series (Omron FINS protocol)

Device type Address range
Channel I/O bit 0000.00 to 6143.15
Internal auxiliary relay bit W0000.00 to W0511.15
Retaining relay bit H0000.00 to H1535.15
Special auxiliary relay bit A0000.00 to A1471.15
Timer (up flag) T00000 to T04095
Counter (up flag) C00000 to C04095
Channel I/O 00000 to 06143
Timer (current value) TN00000 to TN04095
Counter (current value) CN00000 to CN04095
Data memory D00000 to D32767
Extended data memory bank 0 E0_00000 to E0_32767
Extended data memory bank 1 E1_00000 to E1_32767
Extended data memory bank 2 E2_00000 to E2_32767
Extended data memory bank 3 E3_00000 to E3_32767
Extended data memory bank 4 E4_00000 to E4_32767
Extended data memory bank 5 E5_00000 to E5_32767
Extended data memory bank 6 E6_00000 to E6_32767
Extended data memory bank 7 E7_00000 to E7_32767
Extended data memory bank 8 E8_00000 to E8_32767
Extended data memory bank 9 E9_00000 to E9_32767
Extended data memory bank A EA_00000 to EA_32767
Extended data memory bank B EB_00000 to EB_32767
Extended data memory bank C EC_00000 to EC_32767
Extended data memory bank D ED_00000 to ED_32767
Extended data memory bank E EE_00000 to EE_32767
Extended data memory bank F EF_00000 to EF_32767
Extended data memory bank 10 E10_00000 to E10_32767
Extended data memory bank 11 E11_00000 to E11_32767
Extended data memory bank 12 E12_00000 to E12_32767
Extended data memory bank 13 E13_00000 to E13_32767
Extended data memory bank 14 E14_00000 to E14_32767
Extended data memory bank 15 E15_00000 to E15_32767
Extended data memory bank 16 E16_00000 to E16_32767
Extended data memory bank 17 E17_00000 to E17_32767
Extended data memory bank 18 E18_00000 to E18_32767
Extended data memory current E00000 to E32767
Note: The range of available addresses varies depending on the specifications and
settings of the CPU unit.

9-9
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

z Keyence KV nano series (Modbus/RTU protocol)

z Siemens S7-1200 series (Modbus/RTU protocol)

z General-purpose Modbus/RTU device (Modbus/RTU protocol)

Device type Address range
Coil 000001 to 065536
Input relay 100001 to 165536
Input register 300001 to 365536
Retaining register 400001 to 465536

Change the Modbus address used by the SLP in accordance with the address
expression used for the connected Modbus device.

The address expression in the Modbus protocol and the SLP is as follows.

Device type Modbus communication protocol SLP-C1F

Function code Address range Address range

For reading For writing

Coil 1 (0x01) 15 (0x0F) 0000 000001
0001 000002
to to
FFFF 065536
Input relay 2 (0x02) – 0000 100001
0001 100002
to to
FFFF 165536
Input register 4 (0x04) – 0000 300001
0001 300002
to to
FFFF 365536
Retaining 3 (0x03) 16 (0x10) 0000 400001
register 0001 400002
– to
FFFF 465536

In the Modbus communication protocol, a function number is added to an address

in order to indicate the device type. In the SLP, the type is expressed by the value (0,
1, 3, 4) at the beginning of an address.

Also, the address used by the loader is the Modbus protocol address + 1, as shown
in the above example of “000001” to “065536."
400101

Device type Modbus communication address + 1

0: Coil (decimal address)
1: Input relay
2: Input register
3: Retaining register

9-10
 Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

Handling Precautions
• When connecting to a Keyence KV PLC, set SendDelayTime to 100 ms or
longer. If a time shorter than 100 ms is set, faulty communication may result.

„ Completion notification data

When transfer of data within a sheet is completed during cyclic data transfer and
triggered data transfer, completion notification data is written. The contents of the
completion notification data are as follows.

Type Code Description

Communication succeeded 0 Normal response
Timeout 1 Timeout occurred in communication
between the PLC and the C1M
C1M error 2 An error occurred with the C1M.
PLC error 3 An abnormal code is included in the reply
data from the PLC.

9-11
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

9-3 PLC Link Setup

To set up PLC link communication, use the SLP-C1F Smart Loader Package.

Open the setup screen of the SLP-C1F and click the [PLC Link] button to open the [PLC Link] window.

The method of setup is described below, illustrated by the SLP-C1F screen.

Handling Precautions
• To use PLC link communication, set CPL/MODBUS to 3 (PLC link
communication) in the Setup (communication) Bank.

„ Common settings
(1) (2)

(3) (4) (5) (6)

(1) Select the [Common] tab to configure the PLC connection settings common to
transfer 1 to 4.

(2) Enter a value for each item.

(3) Click the [Initial PLC Link] button to initialize (clear) the PLC link setup screen.

(4) Click the [Check] button to check that all the transfer setting addresses have
been defined.

(5) Click the [Register] button to enable the configured PLC link settings.
Note that registration only rewrites the settings in the PC memory. After
registration, the settings must be written, along with other parameters, to the
controller or be saved in a PC file.

(6) Click the [Cancel] button to discard the configured PLC link settings.

9-12
 Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

„ Transfer settings
(1) (2) (3) (9)

(4) (10)
(11)
[A] (12)

(8)

[C]

[B]

(5)

(6) (7)

(1) Select a tab from the [Transfer 1] to [Transfer 4] tabs.

z Section [A] Transfer operation settings

(2) After selecting a tab, first select [Transfer type].

(3) Drag and drop an address in section [C] to [Trigger device/Live notification
device], [Completion notification bit], and [Completion notification data].

(4) You can enable or disable the settings using the [Transfer: Enabled/Disabled]
checkbox. Text on disabled tabs is grayed out.

z Section [B] Transfer data settings

(5) [Clear sheet] initializes the sheet for each transfer setting.

(6) The number of lines can be increased or decreased with [Ins] and [Del].
One line corresponds to one item. Up to 64 items can be specified in total
for transfer 1 to transfer 4 combined. [Remaining items] is displayed at the
bottom of the screen.

(7) Other lines can be selected by using [Up] and [Down].

(8) Set [PLC address] and [Address] by dragging and dropping an address in
section [C]. Also, you can enter a decimal address into [Address] directly from
the keyboard.

z Section [C] Address list

(9) Select a device (PLC or C1M).

(10) Select a data type.

(11) Enter the first address in the list.

(12) An address can be selected from the list and dragged and dropped to sections
[A] and [B].
9-13
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

„ Transfer setting examples

z Cyclic data transfer (PLC → C1M)
Used for writing parameters from the PLC to the C1M consecutively.

In this example, data at D0000100 to D0000103 are transferred to the C1M

periodically.

z Transfer operation settings

Transfer type: Cyclic data transfer (PLC → C1M)

Live notification device: M000100

Completion notification bit: M000010

Completion notification data: D000010

Note
• 0 and 1 are written alternately to the live notification device periodically.

• If [Notification device initialization] on the [Common] tab is set to 0

(enabled), 0 is written to the device specified by [Completion notification
bit] immediately before the data transfer.

• After the data transfer, 1 is written to the completion notification bit.

• If the data transfer is successful, 0 is written to the device specified by

[Completion notification data]. If there is an error in the transfer, a value
other than 0 is written to the device.

9-14
 Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

z Transfer data settings

D000100 → SP (target value)

D000101 → P (Proportional Band)

D000102 → I (Integral time)

D000103 → D (Derivative time)

Handling Precautions
• Use RAM write addresses when transferring (writing) data to the C1M
periodically.

9-15
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

z Cyclic data transfer (C1M → PLC)

Used for monitoring the C1M data on the PLC.

In this example, C1M data is transferred to addresses D000200 to D000201.

z Transfer operation settings

Transfer type: Cyclic data transfer (C1M → PLC)

Live notification device: M000101

Completion notification bit: M000011

Completion notification data: D000011

Note
• 0 and 1 are written alternately to the live notification device periodically.

• If [Notification device initialization] on the [Common] tab is set to 0

(enabled), 0 is written to the device specified by [Completion notification
bit] immediately before the data transfer.

• After the data transfer, 1 is written to the completion notification bit.

• If the data transfer is successful, 0 is written to the device specified by

[Completion notification data]. If there is an error in the transfer, a value
other than 0 is written to the device.

z Transfer data settings

PV → D000200

SP (target value) → D000201

9-16
 Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

z Triggered data transfer (PLC → C1M)

Used for writing parameters from the PLC to the C1M at a time determined by the
PLC.

This example shows the transfer of M000016 and M000017 to the C1M mode
setting when M000050 changes from OFF to ON.

z Transfer operation settings

Transfer type: Triggered data transfer (PLC → C1M)

Trigger device: M000050

Completion notification bit: M000060

Completion notification data: D000050

Note
• If [Trigger device initialization] on the [Common] tab is set to 0 (enabled), 0
is written to the trigger device when a trigger is detected.

• If [Notification device initialization] on the [Common] tab is set to 0

(enabled), 0 is written to the device specified by [Completion notification
bit] when a trigger is detected.

• After the data transfer, 1 is written to the completion notification bit.

• If the data transfer is successful, 0 is written to the device specified by

[Completion notification data]. If there is an error in the transfer, a value
other than 0 is written to the device.

z Transfer data settings

M000016 → RUN/READY mode selection

M000017 → LSP in use

9-17
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

z Triggered data transfer (C1M → PLC)

Used for writing C1M data to the PLC when a C1M event occurs.

This example shows the transfer of C1M data to D0000070 and D0000071 when the
[Alarm summary] setting of the C1M changes to a value other than 0.

z Transfer operation settings

Transfer type: Triggered data transfer (C1M → PLC)

Trigger device: Alarm summary

Completion notification bit: M000051

Completion notification data: D000051

Note
• If [Notification device initialization] on the [Common] tab is set to 0
(enabled), 0 is written to the trigger device when a trigger is detected.
• If [Notification device initialization] on the [Common] tab is set to 0
(enabled), 0 is written to the device specified by [Completion notification
bit] when a trigger is detected.
• After the data transfer, “1” is written to the completion notification bit.
• If the data transfer is successful, 0 is written to the device specified by
[Completion notification data]. If there is an error in the transfer, a value
other than 0 is written to the device.

z Transfer data settings

Representative alarm → D000070

PV → D000071

9-18
 Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

9-4 List of PLC Link Settings

The PLC link settings include common settings, transfer settings, and data settings.

„ Common settings
Item Settings Initial Notes
value
PLC Link Function 0: Disabled 0
1: Enabled
PLC Link Operation at Power On 0: PLC link operation stops when the 0 The setting is valid only if [PLC Link
power is turned on. Function] is set to 1.
1: PLC link operation is executed when
the power is turned on.
PLC Link Operation 0: Stop 0 The setting is valid only if [PLC Link
Function] is set to 1.
1: Execute
Max. No. of units connected by 8, 16, 24, 31 8
PLC link
Startup delay time 0–60 s 5
Trigger device initialization 0: No 0
1: Yes
Notification device initialization 0: No 0
1: Yes
Station address 0–127 0 The address of the PLC to
communicate with
TimeOut 0–32000 ms 1000
Send Delay Time 0–1000 ms 5

Handling Precautions
• To use PLC link communication, set C64 (CPL/MODBUS) to "3" (PLC link
communication) and configure the above settings on the PLC link screen of
the SLP-C1F in advance.

9-19
Chapter 9. PLC Link Communication Function

„ Transfer settings
Transfer sheets 1 to 4 can be set independently.

Item Settings Initial value Notes

Transfer: Enabled/Disabled Unchecked: Disabled Unchecked
Checked: Enabled
Transfer type Cyclic data transfer (PLC → C1M) None
Cyclic data transfer (C1M → PLC)
Triggered data transfer (PLC → C1M)
Triggered data transfer (C1M → PLC)
Trigger device address When trigger device is PLC Not set For triggered data transfer
See the list of address ranges for the
PLC device type.
Usable devices (p. 9-6)
When trigger device is the C1M
Selectable from the C1M monitor data
and parameters.
Live notification device address See the list of address ranges for the Not set For cyclic data transfer
PLC device type.
Usable devices (p. 9-6)
Completion notification bit See the list of address ranges for the Not set
address PLC device type.
Usable devices (p. 9-6)
Completion notification data See the list of address ranges for the Not set
address PLC device type.
Usable devices (p. 9-6)

„ Data settings
Transfer sheets 1 to 4 can be set independently. Up to 64 data items can be specified
in total for all sheets combined. The settings for each data item are shown in the
table below.

Item Settings Initial value Notes

PLC address See the list of address ranges for the Not set
PLC device type.
C1M address Selectable from the C1M monitor data Not set
and parameters.

9-20
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

„ List of communication data

The symbols in the RAM/EEPROM Read/Write columns are as follows.
No symbol: Possible
: Possible depending on the conditions
: Possible but data is invalid
: Not possible
Note: Reading the EEPROM address, like reading the RAM address, reads data from RAM.
Decimal point information
−: No decimal point
1 to 3: The value indicates the decimal point position (for communication, original value is
multiplied by 10, 100, or 1000)
P: Varies depending on the PV input range
C: Varies depending on the integral time and derivative time decimal point position
S: Varies depending on various conditions

RS/WS commands for CPL communication use a decimal word address followed by “W.”
RD/WD/RU/WU commands for CPL communication use a hexadecimal word address.
Modbus communication commands use a hexadecimal word address.
Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Instru- ROM ID 273 0111 16657 4111   − “16” for model C1M
ment ROM version 1 274 0112 16658 4112   2
informa-
ROM version 2 275 0113 16659 4113   2
tion
Loader information 276 0114 16660 4114   −
EST Information 277 0115 16661 4115   −
Manufacturing date code (year) 278 0116 16662 4116   − Year − 2000
Example: Year 2021 is “21”
Manufacturing date code (month, day) 279 0117 16663 4117   2 Month + (day ÷ 100)
Example: Dec. 1 is “12.01.”
Serial No. 280 0118 16664 4118   −
Advanced function password 1 5021 139D 21405 539D −
Advanced function password 2 5022 139E 21406 539E −
Advanced function password 3 5023 139F 21407 539F −
Advanced function password 4 5024 13A0 21408 53A0 −
Advanced function password 5 5025 13A1 21409 53A1 −
Advanced function password 6 5026 13A2 21410 53A2 −
Advanced function password 7 5027 13A3 21411 53A3 −
Advanced function password 8 5028 13A4 21412 53A4 −
Advanced function password 9 5029 13A5 21413 53A5 −
Advanced function password 10 5030 13A6 21414 53A6 −
Advanced function password 11 5031 13A7 21415 53A7 −
Advanced function password 12 5032 13A8 21416 53A8 −
Advanced function password 13 5033 13A9 21417 53A9 −
Advanced function password 14 5034 13AA 21418 53AA −
Advanced function password 15 5035 13AB 21419 53AB −
Advanced function password 16 5036 13AC 21420 53AC −

10-1
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Lock Key lock 5001 1389 21385 5389 −
Communication lock 5002 138A 21386 538A     − When communication is
locked, an error response
is sent.
Loader lock 5003 138B 21387 538B   −
Password display 5004 138C 21388 538C  − *1
Password 1A − − − −     − Passwords can’t be read/
written by comm. or loader
Password 2A − − − −     − Same as above.
Password 1B − − − −     − Same as above.
Password 2B − − − −     − Same as above.
User User function 1 5101 13ED 21485 53ED −
Function User function 2 5102 13EE 21486 53EE −
User function 3 5103 13EF 21487 53EF −
User function 4 5104 13F0 21488 53F0 −
User function 5 5105 13F1 21489 53F1 −
User function 6 5106 13F2 21490 53F2 −
User function 7 5107 13F3 21491 53F3 −
User function 8 5108 13F4 21492 53F4 −
Setup PV input range type 5201 1451 21585 5451 −
Reference junction compensation (cold 5203 1453 21587 5453   −
junction compensation)
PV Decimal point position 5204 1454 21588 5454   −
PV range low limit 5205 1455 21589 5455   P
PV range high limit 5206 1456 21590 5456   P
SP low limit 5207 1457 21591 5457 P
SP high limit 5208 1458 21592 5458 P
PV square root extraction dropout 5209 1459 21593 5459   1
(Reserved for future use.) 5210 145A 21594 545A     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5211 145B 21595 545B     P
(Reserved for future use.) 5212 145C 21596 545C     P
(Reserved for future use.) 5213 145D 21597 545D     −
Control action (direct/reverse) 5214 145E 21598 545E −
Output operation at PV alarm 5215 145F 21599 545F −
Output at PV alarm 5216 1460 21600 5460 1
Output at READY (Heat) 5217 1461 21601 5461 1
Output at READY (Cool) 5218 1462 21602 5462 1
Output operation at changing AUTO/ 5219 1463 21603 5463 −
MANUAL
Preset MANUAL value 5220 1464 21604 5464 1
Initial output type (mode) of PID control 5221 1465 21605 5465 −
Initial output of PID control 5222 1466 21606 5466 1
Integral time and derivative time deci- 5223 1467 21607 5467 −
mal point position
(Reserved for future use.) 5224 1468 21608 5468     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5225 1469 21609 5469     −
Heat/cool control 5226 146A 21610 546A −
(Reserved for future use.) 5227 146B 21611 546B     −
Heat/Cool control dead zone 5228 146C 21612 546C 1
(Reserved for future use.) 5229 146D 21613 546D     1
LSP system group 5230 146E 21614 546E −
SP ramp type 5231 146F 21615 546F −
SP ramp unit 5232 1470 21616 5470 −
*1. The value read is always 0.

10-2
 Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Setup STEP time unit 5233 1471 21617 5471 −
STEP PV start 5234 1472 21618 5472 −
STEP loop 5235 1473 21619 5473 −
CT1 operation type 5236 1474 21620 5474 −
CT1 output 5237 1475 21621 5475 −
CT1 measurement wait time 5238 1476 21622 5476 −
CT2 operation type 5239 1477 21623 5477 −
CT2 output 5240 1478 21624 5478 −
CT2 measurement wait time 5241 1479 21625 5479 −
Control output 1 range 5242 147A 21626 547A −
Control output 1 type 5243 147B 21627 547B −
Control output 1 scaling low limit 5244 147C 21628 547C S
Control output 1 scaling high limit 5245 147D 21629 547D S
Control output 1 MV scaling width 5246 147E 21630 547E P
Control output 2 range 5247 147F 21631 547F −
Control output 2 type 5248 1480 21632 5480 −
Control output 2 scaling low limit 5249 1481 21633 5481 S
Control output 2 scaling high limit 5250 1482 21634 5482 S
Control output 2 MV scaling width 5251 1483 21635 5483 P
(Reserved for future use.) 5252 1484 21636 5484     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5253 1485 21637 5485     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5254 1486 21638 5486     S
(Reserved for future use.) 5255 1487 21639 5487     S
(Reserved for future use.) 5256 1488 21640 5488     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5257 1489 21641 5489     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5258 148A 21642 548A     1
(Reserved for future use.) 5259 148B 21643 548B     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5260 148C 21644 548C     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5261 148D 21645 548D     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5262 148E 21646 548E     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5263 148F 21647 548F     1
Communications type 5264 1490 21648 5490   −
Station address 5265 1491 21649 5491   −
Transmission speed (bps) 5266 1492 21650 5492   −
Data format (data length) 5267 1493 21651 5493   −
Data format (parity) 5268 1494 21652 5494   −
Data format (stop bit) 5269 1495 21653 5495   −
Communication minimum response 5270 1496 21654 5496   −
time
Key operation mode 5271 1497 21655 5497 −
[MODE] key function 5272 1498 21656 5498 −
Mode display setup 5273 1499 21657 5499 −
PV/SP display setup 5274 149A 21658 549A −
MV display setup 5275 149B 21659 549B −
EV display setup 5276 149C 21660 549C −
Event remaining time display setup 5277 149D 21661 549D −
CT input current display setup 5278 149E 21662 549E −
User level 5279 149F 21663 549F −
Status indicator 5280 14A0 21664 54A0 −
(Reserved for future use.) 5281 14A1 21665 54A1     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5282 14A2 21666 54A2     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5283 14A3 21667 54A3     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5284 14A4 21668 54A4     −

10-3
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Setup (Reserved for future use.) 5285 14A5 21669 54A5     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5286 14A6 21670 54A6     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5287 14A7 21671 54A7     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5288 14A8 21672 54A8     −
(Reserved for future use.) 5289 14A9 21673 54A9     −
Number of CT1 turns 5290 14AA 21674 54AA −
Number of CT1 power wire passes 5291 14AB 21675 54AB −
Number of CT2 turns 5292 14AC 21676 54AC −
Number of CT2 power wire passes 5293 14AD 21677 54AD −
PV input failure (under range) type 5297 14B1 21681 54B1 −
Sampling cycle 5298 14B2 21682 54B2 −
DI assign- Internal contact 1 operation type 5401 1519 21785 5519 −
ment Internal contact 1 input bit function 5402 151A 21786 551A −
Internal contact 1 input assignment A 5403 151B 21787 551B −
Internal contact 1 input assignment B 5404 151C 21788 551C −
Internal contact 1 input assignment C 5405 151D 21789 551D −
Internal contact 1 input assignment D 5406 151E 21790 551E −
Internal contact 1 polarity A 5407 151F 21791 551F −
Internal contact 1 polarity B 5408 1520 21792 5520 −
Internal contact 1 polarity C 5409 1521 21793 5521 −
Internal contact 1 polarity D 5410 1522 21794 5522 −
Internal contact 1 polarity 5411 1523 21795 5523 −
Internal contact 1 internal event No. 5412 1524 21796 5524 −
assignment
Internal contact 2 operation type 5413 1525 21797 5525 −
Internal contact 2 input bit function 5414 1526 21798 5526 −
Internal contact 2 input assignment A 5415 1527 21799 5527 −
Internal contact 2 input assignment B 5416 1528 21800 5528 −
Internal contact 2 input assignment C 5417 1529 21801 5529 −
Internal contact 2 input assignment D 5418 152A 21802 552A −
Internal contact 2 polarity A 5419 152B 21803 552B −
Internal contact 2 polarity B 5420 152C 21804 552C −
Internal contact 2 polarity C 5421 152D 21805 552D −
Internal contact 2 polarity D 5422 152E 21806 552E −
Internal contact 2 polarity 5423 152F 21807 552F −
Internal contact 2 internal event No. 5424 1530 21808 5530 −
assignment
Internal contact 3 operation type 5425 1531 21809 5531 −
Internal contact 3 input bit function 5426 1532 21810 5532 −
Internal contact 3 input assignment A 5427 1533 21811 5533 −
Internal contact 3 input assignment B 5428 1534 21812 5534 −
Internal contact 3 input assignment C 5429 1535 21813 5535 −
Internal contact 3 input assignment D 5430 1536 21814 5536 −
Internal contact 3 polarity A 5431 1537 21815 5537 −
Internal contact 3 polarity B 5432 1538 21816 5538 −
Internal contact 3 polarity C 5433 1539 21817 5539 −
Internal contact 3 polarity D 5434 153A 21818 553A −
Internal contact 3 polarity 5435 153B 21819 553B −
Internal contact 3 internal event No. 5436 153C 21820 553C −
assignment
Internal contact 4 operation type 5437 153D 21821 553D −
Internal contact 4 input bit function 5438 153E 21822 553E −
Internal contact 4 input assignment A 5439 153F 21823 553F −

10-4
 Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
DI assign- Internal contact 4 input assignment B 5440 1540 21824 5540 −
ment Internal contact 4 input assignment C 5441 1541 21825 5541 −
Internal contact 4 input assignment D 5442 1542 21826 5542 −
Internal contact 4 polarity A 5443 1543 21827 5543 −
Internal contact 4 polarity B 5444 1544 21828 5544 −
Internal contact 4 polarity C 5445 1545 21829 5545 −
Internal contact 4 polarity D 5446 1546 21830 5546 −
Internal contact 4 polarity 5447 1547 21831 5547 −
Internal contact 4 internal event No. 5448 1548 21832 5548 −
assignment
Internal contact 5 operation type 5449 1549 21833 5549 −
Internal contact 5 input bit function 5450 154A 21834 554A −
Internal contact 5 input assignment A 5451 154B 21835 554B −
Internal contact 5 input assignment B 5452 154C 21836 554C −
Internal contact 5 input assignment C 5453 154D 21837 554D −
Internal contact 5 input assignment D 5454 154E 21838 554E −
Internal contact 5 polarity A 5455 154F 21839 554F −
Internal contact 5 polarity B 5456 1550 21840 5550 −
Internal contact 5 polarity C 5457 1551 21841 5551 −
Internal contact 5 polarity D 5458 1552 21842 5552 −
Internal contact 5 polarity 5459 1553 21843 5553 −
Internal contact 5 internal event No. 5460 1554 21844 5554 −
assignment
DO assign- Control output 1 operation type 5601 15E1 21985 55E1 −
ment Control output 1 output assignment A 5602 15E2 21986 55E2 −
Control output 1 output assignment B 5603 15E3 21987 55E3 −
Control output 1 output assignment C 5604 15E4 21988 55E4 −
Control output 1 output assignment D 5605 15E5 21989 55E5 −
Control output 1 polarity A 5606 15E6 21990 55E6 −
Control output 1 polarity B 5607 15E7 21991 55E7 −
Control output 1 polarity C 5608 15E8 21992 55E8 −
Control output 1 polarity D 5609 15E9 21993 55E9 −
Control output 1 polarity 5610 15EA 21994 55EA −
Control output 1 latch 5611 15EB 21995 55EB −
Control output 2 operation type 5612 15EC 21996 55EC −
Control output 2 output assignment A 5613 15ED 21997 55ED −
Control output 2 output assignment B 5614 15EE 21998 55EE −
Control output 2 output assignment C 5615 15EF 21999 55EF −
Control output 2 output assignment D 5616 15F0 22000 55F0 −
Control output 2 polarity A 5617 15F1 22001 55F1 −
Control output 2 polarity B 5618 15F2 22002 55F2 −
Control output 2 polarity C 5619 15F3 22003 55F3 −
Control output 2 polarity D 5620 15F4 22004 55F4 −
Control output 2 polarity 5621 15F5 22005 55F5 −
Control output 2 latch 5622 15F6 22006 55F6 −
Event output 1 operation type 5623 15F7 22007 55F7 −
Event output 1 output assignment A 5624 15F8 22008 55F8 −
Event output 1 output assignment B 5625 15F9 22009 55F9 −
Event output 1 output assignment C 5626 15FA 22010 55FA −
Event output 1 output assignment D 5627 15FB 22011 55FB −
Event output 1 polarity A 5628 15FC 22012 55FC −
Event output 1 polarity B 5629 15FD 22013 55FD −
Event output 1 polarity C 5630 15FE 22014 55FE −
Event output 1 polarity D 5631 15FF 22015 55FF −

10-5
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
DO assign- Event output 1 polarity 5632 1600 22016 5600 −
ment Event output 1 latch 5633 1601 22017 5601 −
Event output 2 operation type 5634 1602 22018 5602 −
Event output 2 output assignment A 5635 1603 22019 5603 −
Event output 2 output assignment B 5636 1604 22020 5604 −
Event output 2 output assignment C 5637 1605 22021 5605 −
Event output 2 output assignment D 5638 1606 22022 5606 −
Event output 2 polarity A 5639 1607 22023 5607 −
Event output 2 polarity B 5640 1608 22024 5608 −
Event output 2 polarity C 5641 1609 22025 5609 −
Event output 2 polarity D 5642 160A 22026 560A −
Event output 2 polarity 5643 160B 22027 560B −
Event output 2 latch 5644 160C 22028 560C −
Event output 3 operation type 5645 160D 22029 560D −
Event output 3 output assignment A 5646 160E 22030 560E −
Event output 3 output assignment B 5647 160F 22031 560F −
Event output 3 output assignment C 5648 1610 22032 5610 −
Event output 3 output assignment D 5649 1611 22033 5611 −
Event output 3 polarity A 5650 1612 22034 5612 −
Event output 3 polarity B 5651 1613 22035 5613 −
Event output 3 polarity C 5652 1614 22036 5614 −
Event output 3 polarity D 5653 1615 22037 5615 −
Event output 3 polarity 5654 1616 22038 5616 −
Event output 3 latch 5655 1617 22039 5617 −
Event Internal event 1 operation type 5801 16A9 22185 56A9 −
configura- Internal event 1 direct/reverse 5802 16AA 22186 56AA −
tion Internal event 1 standby 5803 16AB 22187 56AB −
Internal event 1 event state at READY 5804 16AC 22188 56AC −
(Reserved for future use.) 5805 16AD 22189 56AD     −
Internal event 1 alarm OR 5806 16AE 22190 56AE −
Internal event 1 special OFF setup 5807 16AF 22191 56AF −
Internal event 1 delay time unit 5808 16B0 22192 56B0 −
(Reserved for future use.) 5809 16B1 22193 56B1     −
Internal event 2 operation type 5810 16B2 22194 56B2 −
Internal event 2 direct/reverse 5811 16B3 22195 56B3 −
Internal event 2 standby 5812 16B4 22196 56B4 −
Internal event 2 event state at READY 5813 16B5 22197 56B5 −
(Reserved for future use.) 5814 16B6 22198 56B6     −
Internal event 2 alarm OR 5815 16B7 22199 56B7 −
Internal event 2 special OFF setup 5816 16B8 22200 56B8 −
Internal event 2 delay time unit 5817 16B9 22201 56B9 −
(Reserved for future use.) 5818 16BA 22202 56BA     −
Internal event 3 operation type 5819 16BB 22203 56BB −
Internal event 3 direct/reverse 5820 16BC 22204 56BC −
Internal event 3 standby 5821 16BD 22205 56BD −
Internal event 3 event state at READY 5822 16BE 22206 56BE −
(Reserved for future use.) 5823 16BF 22207 56BF     −
Internal event 3 alarm OR 5824 16C0 22208 56C0 −
Internal event 3 special OFF setup 5825 16C1 22209 56C1 −
Internal event 3 delay time unit 5826 16C2 22210 56C2 −
(Reserved for future use.) 5827 16C3 22211 56C3     −
Internal event 4 operation type 5828 16C4 22212 56C4 −
Internal event 4 direct/reverse 5829 16C5 22213 56C5 −
Internal event 4 standby 5830 16C6 22214 56C6 −

10-6
 Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Event Internal event 4 event state at READY 5831 16C7 22215 56C7 −
configura- (Reserved for future use.) 5832 16C8 22216 56C8     −
tion Internal event 4 alarm OR 5833 16C9 22217 56C9 −
Internal event 4 special OFF setup 5834 16CA 22218 56CA −
Internal event 4 delay time unit 5835 16CB 22219 56CB −
(Reserved for future use.) 5836 16CC 22220 56CC     −
Internal event 5 operation type 5837 16CD 22221 56CD −
Internal event 5 direct/reverse 5838 16CE 22222 56CE −
Internal event 5 standby 5839 16CF 22223 56CF −
Internal event 5 event state at READY 5840 16D0 22224 56D0 −
(Reserved for future use.) 5841 16D1 22225 56D1     −
Internal event 5 alarm OR 5842 16D2 22226 56D2 −
Internal event 5 special OFF setup 5843 16D3 22227 56D3 −
Internal event 5 delay time unit 5844 16D4 22228 56D4 −
(Reserved for future use.) 5845 16D5 22229 56D5     −
Parameter Control method 6001 1771 22385 5771 −
MV low limit at AT 6002 1772 22386 5772 1
MV high limit at AT 6003 1773 22387 5773 1
ON/OFF control differential 6004 1774 22388 5774 P
ON/OFF control operating point offset 6005 1775 22389 5775 P
PV filter 6006 1776 22390 5776 1
PV ratio 6007 1777 22391 5777 3
PV bias 6008 1778 22392 5778 P
(Reserved for future use.) 6009 1779 22393 5779     1
(Reserved for future use.) 6010 177A 22394 577A     3
(Reserved for future use.) 6011 177B 22395 577B     P
Time proportional cycle unit 1 6012 177C 22396 577C −
Time proportional cycle 1 6013 177D 22397 577D −
Time proportional cycle unit 2 6014 177E 22398 577E −
Time proportional cycle 2 6015 177F 22399 577F −
TP operation type 6016 1780 22400 5780 −
(Reserved for future use.) 6017 1781 22401 5781     1
SP up ramp 6018 1782 22402 5782 S
SP down ramp 6019 1783 22403 5783 S
(Reserved for future use.) 6020 1784 22404 5784     P
Time Proportional Min. ON/OFF Time 1 6021 1785 22405 5785     −
Time Proportional Min. ON/OFF Time 2 6022 1786 22406 5786     −
SP (Reserved for future use.) 7001 1B59 23385 5B59     P
(Reserved for future use.) 7002 1B5A 23386 5B5A     −
(Reserved for future use.) 7003 1B5B 23387 5B5B     S
(Reserved for future use.) 7004 1B5C 23388 5B5C     S
LSP1 7005 1B5D 23389 5B5D P Same as RAM address
13312 (decimal).
PID group number (for LSP1) 7006 1B5E 23390 5B5E −
Ramp (for LSP1) 7007 1B5F 23391 5B5F S
Soak time (for LSP1) 7008 1B60 23392 5B60 S
LSP2 7009 1B61 23393 5B61 P Same as RAM address
13313 (decimal).
PID group number (for LSP2) 7010 1B62 23394 5B62 −
Ramp (for LSP2) 7011 1B63 23395 5B63 S
Soak time (for LSP2) 7012 1B64 23396 5B64 S
LSP3 7013 1B65 23397 5B65 P Same as RAM address
13314 (decimal).
PID group number (for LSP3) 7014 1B66 23398 5B66 −
Ramp (for LSP3) 7015 1B67 23399 5B67 S

10-7
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
SP Soak time (for LSP3) 7016 1B68 23400 5B68 S
LSP4 7017 1B69 23401 5B69 P Same as RAM address
13315 (decimal).

PID group number (for LSP4) 7018 1B6A 23402 5B6A −

Ramp (for LSP4) 7019 1B6B 23403 5B6B S
Soak time (for LSP4) 7020 1B6C 23404 5B6C S
LSP5 7021 1B6D 23405 5B6D P Same as RAM address
13316 (decimal).

PID group number (for LSP5) 7022 1B6E 23406 5B6E −

Ramp (for LSP5) 7023 1B6F 23407 5B6F S
Soak time (for LSP5) 7024 1B70 23408 5B70 S
LSP6 7025 1B71 23409 5B71 P Same as RAM address
13317 (decimal).

PID group number (for LSP6) 7026 1B72 23410 5B72 −

Ramp (for LSP6) 7027 1B73 23411 5B73 S
Soak time (for LSP6) 7028 1B74 23412 5B74 S
LSP7 7029 1B75 23413 5B75 P Same as RAM address
13318 (decimal).
PID group number (for LSP7) 7030 1B76 23414 5B76 −
Ramp (for LSP7) 7031 1B77 23415 5B77 S
Soak time (for LSP7) 7032 1B78 23416 5B78 S
LSP8 7033 1B79 23417 5B79 P Same as RAM address
13319 (decimal).
PID group number (for LSP8) 7034 1B7A 23418 5B7A −
Ramp (for LSP8) 7035 1B7B 23419 5B7B S
Soak time (for LSP8) 7036 1B7C 23420 5B7C S
Event Internal event 1 main setting 7501 1D4D 23885 5D4D S Same as RAM address
13056 (decimal).
Internal event 1 sub-setting 7502 1D4E 23886 5D4E S Same as RAM address
13057 (decimal).
Internal event 1 hysteresis 7503 1D4F 23887 5D4F S
Internal event 1 ON delay time 7504 1D50 23888 5D50 S
Internal event 1 OFF delay time 7505 1D51 23889 5D51 S
Internal event 2 main setting 7506 1D52 23890 5D52 S Same as RAM address
13058 (decimal).
Internal event 2 sub-setting 7507 1D53 23891 5D53 S Same as RAM address
13059 (decimal).
Internal event 2 hysteresis 7508 1D54 23892 5D54 S
Internal event 2 ON delay time 7509 1D55 23893 5D55 S
Internal event 2 OFF delay time 7510 1D56 23894 5D56 S
Internal event 3 main setting 7511 1D57 23895 5D57 S Same as RAM address
13060 (decimal).
Internal event 3 sub-setting 7512 1D58 23896 5D58 S Same as RAM address
13061 (decimal).
Internal event 3 hysteresis 7513 1D59 23897 5D59 S
Internal event 3 ON delay time 7514 1D5A 23898 5D5A S
Internal event 3 OFF delay time 7515 1D5B 23899 5D5B S
Internal event 4 main setting 7516 1D5C 23900 5D5C S Same as RAM address
13062 (decimal).
Internal event 4 sub-setting 7517 1D5D 23901 5D5D S Same as RAM address
13063 (decimal).
Internal event 4 hysteresis 7518 1D5E 23902 5D5E S
Internal event 4 ON delay time 7519 1D5F 23903 5D5F S
Internal event 4 OFF delay time 7520 1D60 23904 5D60 S

10-8
 Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Event Internal event 5 main setting 7521 1D61 23905 5D61 S Same as RAM address
13064 (decimal).
Internal event 5 sub-setting 7522 1D62 23906 5D62 S Same as RAM address
13065 (decimal).
Internal event 5 hysteresis 7523 1D63 23907 5D63 S
Internal event 5 ON delay time 7524 1D64 23908 5D64 S
Internal event 5 OFF delay time 7525 1D65 23909 5D65 S
Extended AT type 8501 2135 24885 6135 −
tuning (Reserved for future use.) 8502 2136 24886 6136     −
(Reserved for future use.) 8503 2137 24887 6137     −
SP lag constant 8504 2138 24888 6138 1
(Reserved for future use.) 8505 2139 24889 6139     −
AT proportional band adjust 8506 213A 24890 613A 2
AT integral time adjust 8507 213B 24891 613B 2
AT derivative time adjust 8508 213C 24892 613C 2
MV Switching Point Type for AT 8541 215D 24925 615D −
MV Switching Point PV for AT 8542 215E 24926 615E P
Control algorithm 8509 213D 24893 613D −
Cooling Gain 6071 17B7 22455 57B7 1
(Reserved for future use.) 8510 213E 24894 613E     −
(Reserved for future use.) 8511 213F 24895 613F     −
(Reserved for future use.) 8512 2140 24896 6140     −
(Reserved for future use.) 8513 2141 24897 6141     −
(Reserved for future use.) 8514 2142 24898 6142     −
(Reserved for future use.) 8515 2143 24899 6143     2
(Reserved for future use.) 8516 2144 24900 6144     2
(Reserved for future use.) 8517 2145 24901 6145     2
(Reserved for future use.) 8518 2146 24902 6146     −
Mode AUTO/MANUAL 9001 2329 25385 6329   − Same as RAM address
14596 (decimal).
Writable when not
assigned to a DI, etc.
RUN/READY 9002 232A 25386 632A   − Same as RAM address
14595 (decimal).
Writable when not
assigned to a DI.
(Reserved for future use.) 9003 232B 25387 632B     − Same as RAM address
14598 (decimal).
AT start/stop selection 9004 232C 25388 632C   − Same as RAM address
14597 (decimal).
Writable when not
assigned to a DI, etc.
Auto tuning error 9126 23A6 25510 63A6   −
Release all DO latches 9005 232D 25389 632D   − Writable when not
assigned to a DI.

10-9
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Operation PV 9101 238D 25485 638D   P Same as RAM address
settings 14356 (decimal).
SP (target value) 9102 238E 25486 638E P *2

LSP group selection 9103 238F 25487 638F   − Same as RAM address
14592 (decimal).
Writable when not as-
signed to a DI.*3
(Reserved for future use.) 9104 2390 25488 6390     −
MV (Manipulated Variable) 9105 2391 25489 6391   1 Same as RAM address
14594 (decimal).
Writable in manual mode
Heat MV (Manipulated Variable) 9106 2392 25490 6392   1 Same as RAM address
14420 (decimal).
Cool MV (Manipulated Variable) 9107 2393 25491 6393   1 Same as RAM address
14421 (decimal).
(Reserved for future use.) 9108 2394 25492 6394     1 Same as RAM address
14417 (decimal).
AT progress 9109 2395 25493 6395   −
CT1 current 9110 2396 25494 6396   1 Same as RAM address
14418 (decimal).
CT2 current 9111 2397 25495 6397   1 Same as RAM address
14419 (decimal).
Timer remaining time 1 9112 2398 25496 6398   S
Timer remaining time 2 9113 2399 25497 6399   S
Timer remaining time 3 9114 239A 25498 639A   S
Timer remaining time 4 9115 239B 25499 639B   S
Timer remaining time 5 9116 239C 25500 639C   S
(Reserved for future use.) 9117 239D 25501 639D     S
(Reserved for future use.) 9118 239E 25502 639E     S
(Reserved for future use.) 9119 239F 25503 639F     S
Step No. 9120 23A0 25504 63A0   S
Step remaining time 9121 23A1 25505 63A1   S
Step remaining time (second) 9122 23A2 25506 63A2   S
LSP in use 9123 23A3 25507 63A3 P Same as RAM address
14593 (decimal).*2
PV (before ratio,bias,filter) 9124 23A4 25508 63A4   P
(Reserved for future use.) 9125 23A5 25509 63A5     P

*2. If a value is read immediately after writing it to an SP or LSP that is in use, the value may not have changed yet. Values are updated after the
sampling cycle time ends.
*3. If an SP or LSP that is in use is read immediately after writing the value to the LSP group selection, the value may not have changed yet. Values are
updated after the sampling cycle time ends.

10-10
 Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Status Input alarm status 9201 23F1 25585 63F1   − Bit 0:
AL01 (PV input error (over
range))
Bit 1:
AL02 (PV input error
(under range))
Bit 2:
AL03 (Reference junction
compensation error
(thermocouple) / PV
input error (RTD))
Bits 3–9: Undefined
Bit 10:
AL11 (CT input error (over
range))
Bits 11–15: Undefined
Instrument alarm status 9202 23F2 25586 63F2   − Bit 0:
AL74 (Nonvolatile mem-
ory error)
Bit 1: Undefined
Bit 2:
AL70 (A/D conversion
error)
Bit 3:
AL95 (Setting value error)
Bit 4:
AL96 (Adjustment value
error)
Bit 5:
AL81 (Setting value area
error)
Bit 6:
AL82 (Adjustment value
area error)
Bit 7: Undefined
Bit 8:
AL83 (Internal system
error)
Bit 9:
AL84 (Setting value
initialization error)
Bits 10–11: Undefined
Bit 12:
AL80 (Nonvolatile
memory not initialized)
Bits 13–15: Undefined
Internal event / internal contact func- 9203 23F3 25587 63F3   − Bits 0–4:
tion status Internal events 1–5
Bits 5–7: Undefined
Bits 8-10:
Internal contacts 1-3
Bits 11–15: Undefined

10-11
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Status Control status 9204 23F4 25588 63F4   − Bit 0: MANUAL mode
0: AUTO
1: MANUAL
Bit 1: READY mode
0: RUN mode
1: READY mode
Bit 2: Undefined
Bit 3: AT is in progress
Bits 4–5: Undefined
Bit 6: During SP ramp
Bit 7:
SP ramp-up is in progress
Bit 8:
SP ramp-down is in
progress
Bits 9–12: Undefined
Bit 13:
Heating PID is in use*
Bit 14:
Cooling PID is in use*
Bit 15: Undefined
DO state 9205 23F5 25589 63F5   − Same as RAM address
14337 (decimal).
Bit 0: Control output 1
Bit 1: Control output 2
Bit 2: Event output 1
Bit 3: Event output 2
Bit 4: Event output 3
Bits 5–15: Undefined
DI state 9206 23F6 25590 63F6   − Same as RAM address
14338 (decimal).
Bit 0: DI1
Bit 1: DI2
Bit 3: Undefined
User-defined bit 9207 23F7 25591 63F7 − Bit 0:User-defined bit 1
Bit 1:User-defined bit 2
Bit 2:User-defined bit 3
Bit 3:User-defined bit 4
User-defined bit 1 9208 23F8 25592 63F8 −
User-defined bit 2 9209 23F9 25593 63F9 −
User-defined bit 3 9210 23FA 25594 63FA −
User-defined bit 4 9211 23FB 25595 63FB −
Tag Tag 1 9301 2455 25685 6455 − Cannot be displayed or set
on the console
Tag 2 9302 2456 25686 6456 − Same as above.
Tag 3 9303 2457 25687 6457 − Same as above.
Tag 4 9304 2458 25688 6458 − Same as above.
Tag 5 9305 2459 25689 6459 − Same as above.
Tag 6 9306 245A 25690 645A − Same as above.
Tag 7 9307 245B 25691 645B − Same as above.
Tag 8 9308 245C 25692 645C − Same as above.
Tag 9 9309 245D 25693 645D − Same as above.
Tag 10 9310 245E 25694 645E − Same as above.
Tag 11 9311 245F 25695 645F − Same as above.
Tag 12 9312 2460 25696 6460 − Same as above.
Tag 13 9313 2461 25697 6461 − Same as above.
Tag 14 9314 2462 25698 6462 − Same as above.
Tag 15 9315 2463 25699 6463 − Same as above.
Tag 16 9316 2464 25700 6464 − Same as above.

* Valid only if C26 (heat/cool control) is set to 1 (use (individual PID))

10-12
 Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
PID Proportional band 1 12288 3000 28672 7000 1
Integration time 1 12289 3001 28673 7001 C
Derivative time 1 12290 3002 28674 7002 C
Manual reset 1 12291 3003 28675 7003 1
MV low limit 1 12292 3004 28676 7004 1
MV high limit 1 12293 3005 28677 7005 1
Cool-side proportional band 1 12336 3030 28720 7030 1
Cool-side integration time 1 12337 3031 28721 7031 C
Cool-side derivative time 1 12338 3032 28722 7032 C
(Reserved for future use.) 12339 3033 28723 7033     1
Cool-side MV low limit 1 12340 3034 28724 7034 1
Cool-side MV high limit 1 12341 3035 28725 7035 1
Proportional band 2 12294 3006 28678 7006 1
Integral time 2 12295 3007 28679 7007 C
Derivative time 2 12296 3008 28680 7008 C
Manual reset 2 12297 3009 28681 7009 1
MV low limit 2 12298 300A 28682 700A 1
MV high limit 2 12299 300B 28683 700B 1
Cool-side proportional band 2 12342 3036 28726 7036 1
Cool-side integration time 2 12343 3037 28727 7037 C
Cool-side derivative time 2 12344 3038 28728 7038 C
(Reserved for future use.) 12345 3039 28729 7039     1
Cool-side MV low limit 2 12346 303A 28730 703A 1
Cool-side MV high limit 2 12347 303B 28731 703B 1
Proportional band 3 12300 300C 28684 700C 1
Integral time 3 12301 300D 28685 700D C
Derivative time 3 12302 300E 28686 700E C
Manual reset 3 12303 300F 28687 700F 1
MV low limit 3 12304 3010 28688 7010 1
MV high limit 3 12305 3011 28689 7011 1
Cool-side proportional band 3 12348 303C 28732 703C 1
Cool-side integration time 3 12349 303D 28733 703D C
Cool-side derivative time 3 12350 303E 28734 703E C
(Reserved for future use.) 12351 303F 28735 703F     1
Cool-side MV low limit 3 12352 3040 28736 7040 1
Cool-side MV high limit 3 12353 3041 28737 7041 1
Proportional band 4 12306 3012 28690 7012 1
Integral time 4 12307 3013 28691 7013 C
Derivative time 4 12308 3014 28692 7014 C
Manual reset 4 12309 3015 28693 7015 1
MV low limit 4 12310 3016 28694 7016 1
MV high limit 4 12311 3017 28695 7017 1
Cool-side proportional band 4 12354 3042 28738 7042 1
Cool-side integration time 4 12355 3043 28739 7043 C
Cool-side derivative time 4 12356 3044 28740 7044 C
(Reserved for future use.) 12357 3045 28741 7045     1
Cool-side MV low limit 4 12358 3046 28742 7046 1
Cool-side MV high limit 4 12359 3047 28743 7047 1
Proportional band 5 12312 3018 28696 7018 1
Integral time 5 12313 3019 28697 7019 C
Derivative time 5 12314 301A 28698 701A C
Manual reset 5 12315 301B 28699 701B 1
MV low limit 5 12316 301C 28700 701C 1
MV high limit 5 12317 301D 28701 701D 1
Cool-side proportional band 5 12360 3048 28744 7048 1
Cool-side integration time 5 12361 3049 28745 7049 C
Cool-side derivative time 5 12362 304A 28746 704A C
(Reserved for future use.) 12363 304B 28747 704B     1

10-13
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
PID Cool-side MV low limit 5 12364 304C 28748 704C 1
Cool-side MV high limit 5 12365 304D 28749 704D 1
Proportional band 6 12318 301E 28702 701E 1
Integral time 6 12319 301F 28703 701F C
Derivative time 6 12320 3020 28704 7020 C
Manual reset 6 12321 3021 28705 7021 1
MV low limit 6 12322 3022 28706 7022 1
MV high limit 6 12323 3023 28707 7023 1
Cool-side proportional band 6 12366 304E 28750 704E 1
Cool-side integration time 6 12367 304F 28751 704F C
Cool-side derivative time 6 12368 3050 28752 7050 C
(Reserved for future use.) 12369 3051 28753 7051     1
Cool-side MV low limit 6 12370 3052 28754 7052 1
Cool-side MV high limit 6 12371 3053 28755 7053 1
Proportional band 7 12324 3024 28708 7024 1
Integration time 7 12325 3025 28709 7025 C
Derivative time 7 12326 3026 28710 7026 C
Manual reset 7 12327 3027 28711 7027 1
MV low limit 7 12328 3028 28712 7028 1
MV high limit 7 12329 3029 28713 7029 1
Cool-side proportional band 7 12372 3054 28756 7054 1
Cool-side integration time 7 12373 3055 28757 7055 C
Cool-side derivative time 7 12374 3056 28758 7056 C
(Reserved for future use.) 12375 3057 28759 7057     1
Cool-side MV low limit 7 12376 3058 28760 7058 1
Cool-side MV high limit 7 12377 3059 28761 7059 1
Proportional band 8 12330 302A 28714 702A 1
Integration time 8 12331 302B 28715 702B C
Derivative time 8 12332 302C 28716 702C C
Manual reset 8 12333 302D 28717 702D 1
MV low limit 8 12334 302E 28718 702E 1
MV high limit 8 12335 302F 28719 702F 1
Cool-side proportional band 8 12378 305A 28762 705A 1
Cool-side integration time 8 12379 305B 28763 705B C
Cool-side derivative time 8 12380 305C 28764 705C C
(Reserved for future use.) 12381 305D 28765 705D     1
Cool-side MV low limit 8 12382 305E 28766 705E 1
Cool-side MV high limit 8 12383 305F 28767 705F 1
Event Internal event 1 main setting 13056 3300 29440 7300 S
Internal event 1 sub-setting 13057 3301 29441 7301 S
Internal event 2 main setting 13058 3302 29442 7302 S
Internal event 2 sub-setting 13059 3303 29443 7303 S
Internal event 3 main setting 13060 3304 29444 7304 S
Internal event 3 sub-setting 13061 3305 29445 7305 S
Internal event 4 main setting 13062 3306 29446 7306 S
Internal event 4 sub-setting 13063 3307 29447 7307 S
Internal event 5 main setting 13064 3308 29448 7308 S
Internal event 5 sub-setting 13065 3309 29449 7309 S
LSP LSP1 13312 3400 29696 7400 P
LSP2 13313 3401 29697 7401 P
LSP3 13314 3402 29698 7402 P
LSP4 13315 3403 29699 7403 P
LSP5 13316 3404 29700 7404 P
LSP6 13317 3405 29701 7405 P
LSP7 13318 3406 29702 7406 P
LSP8 13319 3407 29703 7407 P

10-14
 Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Instru- Representative alarm 14336 3800 30720 7800   − Bit 0: PV error
ment Bit 1: Undefined
status 1 Bit 2: CT error (AL11)
Bits 3–7: Undefined
Bit 8:
Initialization error
(AL80/83/84)
Bits 9–11: Undefined
Bit 12:
A/D conversion error
(AL70)
Bit 13:
Setting value error
(AL81/95)
Bit 14:
Adjustment value error
(AL82/96)
Bit 15: Undefined
DO state 14337 3801 30721 7801   − Same as RAM address 9205
(decimal).
DI state 14338 3802 30722 7802   − Same as RAM address 9206
(decimal).
Instru- RUN/READY 14352 3810 30736 7810   −
ment AUTO/MANUAL 14353 3811 30737 7811   −
status 2 AT start/stop selection 14354 3812 30738 7812   −
(Reserved for future use.) 14355 3813 30739 7813     −
PV 14356 3814 30740 7814   P
SP (target value) 14357 3815 30741 7815   P
MV (Manipulated Variable) 14358 3816 30742 7816   1
Instru- (Reserved for future use.) 14416 3850 30800 7850     P Same as RAM address 7001
ment (decimal).
status 3 (Reserved for future use.) 14417 3851 30801 7851     1 Same as RAM address 9108
(decimal).
CT1 current 14418 3852 30802 7852   1 Same as RAM address 9110
(decimal).
CT2 current 14419 3853 30803 7853   1 Same as RAM address 9111
(decimal).
Heat MV (Manipulated Variable) 14420 3854 30804 7854   1 Same as RAM address 9106
(decimal).
Cool MV (Manipulated Variable) 14421 3855 30805 7855   1 Same as RAM address 9107
(decimal).

10-15
Chapter 10. List of Communication Data

Bank Item RAM address EEPROM address RAM EEPROM Decimal Notes
Decimal Hexa- Decimal Hexa- Read Write Read Write point
decimal decimal
Operation LSP group selection 14592 3900 30976 7900   − Writable when not
assigned to a DI.
Same as RAM address 9103
(decimal).
LSP in use 14593 3901 30977 7901 P Same as RAM address 9123
(decimal).
Manual MV 14594 3902 30978 7902   1 Writable in manual mode
Same as RAM address 9105
(decimal).
RUN/READY 14595 3903 30979 7903   − Writable when not
assigned to a DI.
Same as RAM address 9002
(decimal).
AUTO/MANUAL 14596 3904 30980 7904   − Writable when not
assigned to a DI, etc.
Same as RAM address 9001
(decimal).
AT start/stop selection 14597 3905 30981 7905   − Writable when not
assigned to a DI, etc.
Same as RAM address 9004
(decimal).
(Reserved for future use.) 14598 3906 30982 7906     − Same as RAM address 9003
(decimal).
PID group Proportional band 14848 3A00 31232 7A00 1
in use Integration time 14849 3A01 31233 7A01 C
Derivative time 14850 3A02 31234 7A02 C
Manual reset 14851 3A03 31235 7A03 1
MV low limit 14852 3A04 31236 7A04 1
MV high limit 14853 3A05 31237 7A05 1
Cool-side proportional band 14854 3A06 31238 7A06 1
Cool-side integration time 14855 3A07 31239 7A07 C
Cool-side derivative time 14856 3A08 31240 7A08 C
(Reserved for future use.) 14857 3A09 31241 7A09     1
Cool-side MV low limit 14858 3A0A 31242 7A0A 1
Cool-side MV high limit 14859 3A0B 31243 7A0B 1

10-16
Chapter 11. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

WARNING
To remove dirt from this device, wipe it with a soft dry cloth.
Never use an organic solvent such as paint thinner or benzene, or a detergent.
Do not use this device in wet places or with wet hands.
There is a danger of electric shock.

„ Maintenance
z Cleaning
To remove dirt from this device, wipe it with a soft dry cloth.

Never use an organic solvent such as thinner or benzene.

z Parts replacement
Do not replace any parts of this unit.

z Fuse replacement
When replacing the fuse connected to the electric wiring, always use the specified
standard fuse.

Standards compliance: IEC 60127

Speed: time-lag (T)

Rated voltage: 250 V AC

Rated current: 0.5 A

11-1
Chapter 11. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

„ Alarm codes and countermeasures

This section describes the alarm codes that are displayed if this device has errors,
and also describes countermeasures. If any of the following abnormalities occur in
the instrument, the control function of this device will stop.

Alarm Description Cause Corrective action

code*1

AL01 PV input error (over Sensor burnout, incorrect wiring Check the wiring.
range) Incorrect settings for PV range Check the PV range type (C01) and other
type, etc. settings.
AL02 PV input error (under Sensor burnout, incorrect wiring Check the wiring.
range) Incorrect settings for PV range Check the PV range type (C01) and other
type, etc. settings.
AL03 Reference junction Measurement range error in Make sure that the ambient temperature is
compensation (cold terminal temperature at reference within the specifications of this product.
Input error

junction compensation) junction compensation

error
RTD input error Sensor burnout, incorrect wiring Check the wiring.
AL11 CT input error (over Current input exceeding the high Use a current transformer with a number
range)*2 limit of the display range of turns that matches the display range.
Check the number of CT turns and the
setting.
Check the setting and the number of times
the power wire passes through the CT.
Incorrect wiring Check the wiring.
AL70 A/D conversion error A/D conversion unit failure Turn the power off and then on again.
AL74 Nonvolatile memory Temporary communication error, If the alarm is triggered when the power is
error corruption of data written, or turned on again, replace the device.
AL80 Nonvolatile memory not failure of this device
initialized
AL81 Setting value area error*3
AL82 Adjustment value area
error*3
AL83 Internal system error
AL84 Setting value Turn the power off and then on again.
initialization error
Instrument errors

If the alarm is triggered after turning

AL95 Setting value error the power on again, the problem can be
corrected with the following procedure:
• Initialize the set point
• Write the setting again
If this procedure does not correct the
problem, replace the device.
AL96 Adjustment value error Turn the power off and then on again.
If the alarm is triggered after turning
the power on again, the problem can be
corrected with the following procedure:
• Restore the adjusted value*4
If this procedure does not correct the
problem, replace the device.

11-2
 Chapter 11. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

*1. Multiple alarms may occur at the same time. If the corrective action for one of the alarms says that the device should be
replaced, it should be replaced.
*2. The error occurred because of CT input 1, 2, or both.
*3. This error may occur when updating the firmware.
*4. If the area in memory for restoring the adjustment value has been corrupted, the value cannot be restored.

11-3
Chapter 11. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

„ Operation when a PV input error occurs

If a PV input error occurs, this device will operate as follows.

Control output: Whether to continue operation can be specified.

Other operations: Operation continues.

If the PV input is abnormal, this device displays the alarm codes and values shown
in the tables below. What is displayed varies depending on the sensor type.

z Thermocouple
Error Range No. Indication Alarm code
Sensor burnout Upscale (110 % FS) AL01
Reference junction PV with incorrect cold contact AL03
compensation compensation
(cold junction
compensation) error

z Resistance temperature detector (RTD)

Error Range No. Indication Alarm code
Resistor burnout Upscale (110 % FS) AL01
Line A burnout Upscale (110 % FS) AL01
Line B burnout Upscale (110 % FS) AL01, AL03
2- or 3-wire burnout Upscale (110 % FS) AL01, AL03
Short circuit, lines A Downscale (−10 % FS) AL02
and B
Short circuit, lines A 41 (Pt100) −235 °C (−5 % FS)/−235 °F AL02
and B 42 (JPt100) −235 °C (−5 % FS)/−235 °F AL02
43 (Pt100) −235 °C (−9 % FS)/−235 °F AL02
44 (JPt100) −235 °C (−9 % FS)/−235 °F AL02

Handling Precautions
• If the temperature unit is Fahrenheit, a PV low limit alarm (AL02) is
generated at −235 °F, which is within the PV range, for PV ranges 41–44.

z DC voltage/current
Error Range No. Indication Alarm code
Burnout 84 (0–1 V) Downscale (−3 % FS) AL02
86 (1–5 V) Downscale (−10 % FS) AL02
87 (0–5 V) Downscale (−3 % FS) AL02
88 (0–10 V) Downscale (0 % FS) None
89 (0–20 mA) Unknown (around 0 % FS) None
90 (4–20 mA) Downscale (−10 % FS) AL02

11-4
 Chapter 11. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

„ If an error occurs in communication with model SLP-C1F

When this device is communicating with a PC running SLP-C1F that is connected
using the model 81441177-001 USB loader cable or the model SLP-ULCJA0 USB
loader cable (A to micro-B), reading or writing may fail. In this case, unplug the
USB loader cable from the PC’s USB connector, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
plug it in again.

11-5
Chapter 12. Calibration and Inspection

CAUTION
Do not switch to calibration/inspection mode while the object of control is in operation.
When this device is in calibration/inspection mode, the state of control outputs and event
outputs is fixed and these outputs do not function. Take this into consideration when
calibrating or inspecting.

Handling Precautions
• It may be necessary to disconnect or reconnect the wiring for calibration and
inspection.
In this case, follow the warnings and cautions regarding wiring given in
Chapter 4. Wiring.

The user can calibrate and inspect the input and output functions of this device.

The following are available:

• I/O inspection (external contact input, control output and event output, key input)

• PV input calibration

• Current output calibration

• CT input calibration

Use the SLP-C1F Smart Loader Package for calibration and inspection.

„ Starting calibration and inspection

Start the SLP-C1F Smart Loader Package to display the menu screen. Select [Menu]
→ [Calibration and checking] from the pull down menu. A dialog box saying
“Calibrate” will be displayed.

When [OK] is selected, the calibration and checking screen is displayed and this
device enters calibration/inspection mode.

When this device is in this mode, the lower display says tESt.

Handling Precautions
• Azbil Corporation will not be liable for problems caused by incorrect
calibration or checking by the user.
• To restore the settings when the product was shipped during calibration
or checking:
If you select [Command] → [Restore adjustment values] from the pull-
down menu, any current calibration settings will be discarded and
the settings when the product was shipped will be restored. If you
accidentally execute this command during calibration or checking, all the
current calibration data will be lost.

12-1
Chapter 12. Calibration and Inspection

„ Ending calibration and inspection

To end calibration or inspection, do either one of the following.

• On the calibration and checking screen of the Smart Loader Package, select [File]
→ [Quit] from the pull-down menu.

• When you click the [×] icon in the upper right corner of the calibration and
checking screen, test disappears and the device returns to normal mode.

Handling Precautions
• If you disconnect the loader cable before completing calibration or
inspection with the Smart Loader Package, this device will remain in
calibration/inspection mode. To return this device to normal mode, turn
the power off and then on.

„ Precautions for calibration

Failure to observe the following precautions will lead to poor accuracy.

• When calibrating the RTD input, use wires of the same type and length for the
three wires.

• Power this device for at least 1 hour before starting calibration.

• Calibrate this device within the ambient temperature range specified by the
standard conditions.

• Do not calibrate this device where it is exposed to wind or in a fluctuating

ambient temperature.

• Do not calibrate with instruments or conditions that do not satisfy the

specifications shown in Measuring instruments required for calibration
(p. 12-2) below.

„ Measuring instruments required for calibration

Measuring instrument Specifications
Reference current/ Accuracy: ±0.025 % or less, minimum resolution (voltage): 1 uV or less,
voltage generator minimum resolution (current): 1 µA or less
Resistor Accuracy: ±0.025 % or less, minimum resolution: 0.1 Ω or less
Ammeter Accuracy: ±0.05 % or less, minimum resolution: 1 µA or less
Voltmeter Accuracy: ±0.025 % or less, minimum resolution: 1 µV or less
Thermometer Accuracy: ±0.1 °C or less, minimum resolution: 0.1 °C or less

12-2
 Chapter 12. Calibration and Inspection

„ Calibration and checking procedure

z Inspection of I/Os
(1) Select the [I/O check] tab.

(2) Select the desired item to check.

(3) Press [Execute].

For inputs (external contact input, key input), the status (ON/OFF) retained by this
device is loaded and displayed on the PC.

For outputs (control output, event output), the status (ON/OFF) selected by the
checkbox is output from the output terminals of this device.

z PV input calibration
(1) Select the [PV Calibration] tab.

(2) Select a gain No. in ascending order.

(3) Press [Read].

(4) Apply the voltage, current, or resistance indicated on the right of the gain No.
to the PV input terminals.

Before application, connect this device to the measuring instrument as follows.

• If T (thermocouple) is selected as the PV input type by the model No. (digit ):
Model C1M

Voltage generator −
+

• If R (RTD) is selected as the PV input type by the model No. (digit ):
Model C1M

Resistor

• If L (DC voltage/current) is selected as the PV input type by the model No. (digit
):
Gain Nos. 04–06 (voltage) Gain No. 07 (current)
Model C1M Model C1M
+
Voltage generator − Current generator −
+

(5) Keep applying the voltage, current or resistance for 30 seconds or longer.

(6) Press [Write].

(7) R
 eturn to step 3 and repeat the procedure until the calibration of the last gain
is completed.

12-3
Chapter 12. Calibration and Inspection

Handling Precautions
• When calibrating the PV input, be sure to adjust all gains according to the
model that is used.
• Warm up this device from power-on to the start of calibration.
• Connect external instruments for adjustment before starting warm-up to
achieve the following input statuses:
• Thermocouple: 0 mV input
• RTD: 100 Ω input
• Voltage: 0 mV input
• Current: 0 mA input
• Do not leave the PV input terminals open during warm-up.

z Current transformer (CT) input calibration

(1) Select the [CT Input Calibration] tab.

(2) Select the channel to calibrate.

(3) Select [Zero] in the [Zero/Span] field.

Both zero and span should be calibrated for one channel. Therefore, after
selecting a channel, first calibrate zero and then span.

(4) Press [Read].

(5) Keep applying the zero calibration current to the CT input terminals of the
selected channel for 30 seconds or longer. Before application of current,
connect this device to the measuring instrument as shown.
CT input 1 Model C1M CT input 2 Model C1M

+
Current generator − Current generator −
+

(6) Press [Write].

(7) Select [Span] in the [Zero/Span] field.

(8) Press [Read].

(9) Keep applying the span calibration current to the CT input terminals of the
selected channel for 30 seconds or longer.

(10) Press [Write].

(11) If there are other channels to calibrate, return to step 4.

Handling Precautions
• When calibrating the CT input, apply a DC current (mA) to the input
terminals.

12-4
 Chapter 12. Calibration and Inspection

z Current output calibration

(1) Select the [Analog Output Calibration] tab.

(2) Select the channel to calibrate.

Control output 1 is indicated as “OUT1” and control output 2 is “OUT2.”

(3) Select [Zero] in the [Zero/Span] field.

Both zero and span should be calibrated for one channel. Therefore, after
selecting a channel, first calibrate zero and then span.

(4) Press [Read].

(5) The zero calibration current is output to the output terminal of the selected
channel.
Keep this state for 30 seconds or longer. The figures below illustrate how to
connect the measuring instrument.
Control output 1 Model C1M Control output 2 Model C1M

+
Ammeter − Ammeter −
+

(6) Check the current indicated by the ammeter to the 3rd digit after the decimal
point, enter it in [Adjustment value], and press [Write].

(7) Select [Span] in the [Zero/Span] field.

(8) Press [Read].

(9) The span calibration current is output to the output terminal of the selected
channel.
Keep this state for 30 seconds or longer.

(10) Check the current indicated by the ammeter to the 3rd digit after the decimal
point, enter it in [Adjustment value], and press [Write].

(11) If there are other channels to calibrate, return to step 4.

12-5
Chapter 13. Disposal

Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (for Environmental Protection)

This is an industrial product subject to the WEEE Directive.
Do not dispose of electrical and electronic equipment in the same way as household waste.
Old products contain valuable raw materials and must be returned to an authorized collection
point for correct disposal or recycling.

13-1
Chapter 14. Specifications

„ Specifications
z PV input (selectable by model No.)
Item Description
Number of inputs 1
Sampling cycle 50, 100, 300, 500 ms
Thermocouple input
Thermocouple type K, J, E, T, R, S, B, N (JIS C 1602: 2015)
PLII, PR40-20 (ASTM E1751/E1751M-20)
WRe5-26 (ASTM E988-96 (Reapproved 2002)
JIS C 1602:2015 (C thermocouple))
DIN U, DIN L (DIN 43710:1985)
Indication accuracy (under ±0.3 % FS ±1 digit (excluding the reference
standard conditions) junction compensation point)
(Negative range: ±0.6 % FS ±1 digit. Other
exceptions: see the PV input range table)
Reference junction ±0.5 °C (under standard conditions)
compensation (cold junction (For every 1 °C outside the temperature range of
compensation) accuracy the standard conditions, the accuracy decreases
by ± 0.05 °C.)
Reference junction (cold Select “0” (internal compensation (by this device))
junction) compensation or “1” (external compensation (by another
method device)).
Allowable input* −0.5 to +12 V
Input bias current +0.2 μA max. (under standard conditions)
Thermocouple/ 0.3 to 0.65 mm
compensating lead wire
diameter
Operation upon input wire Operation when a PV input error occurs
burnout (p. 11-4)
RTD
RTD type Pt100 (JIS C 1604:2013)
JPt100 (JIS C 1604:1989)
Indication accuracy (under ±0.2 % FS ±1 digit
standard conditions)
Allowable input* −0.5 to +12 V
Measuring current 1 mA (typical), from terminals 5 and 6
Wiring resistance effect ±0.05 % FS/Ω max.
Allowable wiring resistance 85 Ω max.
Operation upon input wire Operation when a PV input error occurs
burnout (p. 11-4)
DC voltage
DC voltage type 0–1 V
1–5 V
0–5 V
0–10 V
Indication accuracy (under ±0.2 % FS ±1 digit
standard conditions)
Allowable input* −0.5 to +12 V
Input impedance 1 MΩ min.
Operation upon input wire Operation when a PV input error occurs
burnout (p. 11-4)

14-1
Chapter 14. Specifications

Item Description
DC current
DC current type 0–20 mA
4–20 mA
Indication accuracy (under ±0.2 % FS ±1 digit
standard conditions)
Allowable input* 30 mA or less, or 4 V or less
Input impedance 100 Ω max. (with 20 mA input)
Operation upon input wire Operation when a PV input error occurs
burnout (p. 11-4)

* A voltage or current input greater than the allowable input may damage the circuits.

z Digital input (DI1–2) (optional)

Item Description
Number of inputs 2
Input type Non-voltage contacts or open collector
Allowable ON contact resistance 250 Ω max.
Allowable OFF contact resistance 100 kΩ min.
Allowable ON residual voltage 1.0 V max.
Terminal current while ON Approx. 7.5 mA (when shorted) / approx. 5.0 mA
(at a contact resistance of 250 Ω)
Minimum hold time Sampling cycle + 10 ms
Open terminal voltage 5.5 V DC ±1 V
Parallel connection circuit voltage 24 V DC max.

z Current transformer inputs (CT1–2) (optional)

Item Description
Number of inputs 2
Measurement method RMS
Input object Current transformer with 100–4000 turns
(availability is in 100-turn units)
Measurement current 0.4–50.0 A AC, 50/60 Hz (800 turns, 1 power wire
pass)
Allowable measured current 0.0–70.0 A AC and peak current 110 A (800 turns,
1 power wire pass)
Indication accuracy (under standard ±5 % FS ±1 digit (not including accuracy of
conditions) current transformer in the case of sine waves)
Indication resolution 0.1 A AC
Indication update cycle 100 ms
Allowable input current 0.0–100 mA AC, peak current: 141.4 mA (at the CT
input terminals of this device)
Transient overvoltage Supply voltage + 250 V
Precautions when using a CT Do not use CT input for phase control.

14-2
 Chapter 14. Specifications

z Control output (selectable by model No.)

Item Description
Relay output
Contact configuration 1c (SPDT)
Contact rating 250 V AC / 30 V DC, 3 A (resistive load)
Service life N.O. side: 100,000 cycles or more
N.C. side: 100,000 cycles or more
Minimum switching 5 V, 100 mA
specifications (reference
value)
Minimum open/close time 50 ms
Voltage pulse output (for SSR drive)
Voltage when open 19 V DC ±15 %
Internal resistance 18 Ω
Allowable current 24 mA max
OFF-state leak current 100 μA max.
Short-circuit protection Yes
function
Minimum OFF/ON time 1 ms
Current output
Output type 0–20 mA DC or 4–20 mA DC
Allowable load resistance 600 Ω max.
Output accuracy (under ±0.3 % FS
standard conditions) However, ±1 % FS at 0–1 mA
Output resolution 1/12500 (at 0–20 mA DC), 1/10000 (at 4–20 mA
DC)
Output update cycle Same as sampling cycle

z Event relay (EV1–3) (optional)

Item Description
Number of outputs 3 (for models with 3 EV outputs)
2 (for models with 2 EV outputs with independent
contacts)
Contact configuration 1a (SPST)
Contact rating 250 V AC / 30 V DC, 2 A (resistive load)
Service life 100,000 cycles or more
Minimum switching specifications 5 V, 10 mA
(reference value)
Minimum open/close time 50 ms

z Loader communication
Item Description
Cables Dedicated USB loader cable (included with
models SLP-C1FJA0 and SLP-C1FJA3)

14-3
Chapter 14. Specifications

z RS-485 communication (optional)

Item Description
Transmission line 3-wire system
Transmission speed 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps
Data length 8 bits / 7 bits
Parity bit Even parity, odd parity, no parity
Stop bits 1 or 2
Communication protocol Host communication: compliant with CPL,
Modbus™/RTU, Modbus/ASCII, or PLC link
Terminating resistor External resistor (120 Ω, 1/2 W or more)
recommended
Network Multidrop (up to 31 slave stations for 1 host
station)
Communications/synchronization Half-duplex, start-stop synchronization
type
Maximum cable length 500 m

z I/O Isolation
Items enclosed by solid lines are isolated from other signals. The presence or
absence of input/output depends on the model. Thick solid lines indicate reinforced
insulation.
Power Event outputs 1–3
DIs 1–2 *O
 n models with independent
contacts, event outputs 1 and 2 have
RS-485 communication
Internal circuits reinforced insulation.
CT inputs 1–2 Control output 1 (relay)
PV input Control outputs 1–2 (voltage pulse,
Loader communication current)

z Standard conditions
Item Description
Ambient temperature 25 ±3 °C
(provided there is a space of 2 cm below the
product)
Ambient humidity 60 ±5 % RH (without condensation or freezing)
Power 105 V AC ±10 %
Power frequency 50/60 Hz ±1 Hz
Vibration 0 m/s2
Shock 0 m/s2
Mounting angle Reference plane ±3°

14-4
 Chapter 14. Specifications

z Operating conditions
Item Description
Ambient temperature −10 to +55 °C for independent mounting
Ambient humidity 10–85 % RH (without condensation or freezing)
Power 85–264 V AC, 50/60 Hz ±2 Hz
(Rated power: 100–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz)
Vibration 0–5 m/s2 (10–60 Hz for 2 h each in the X, Y, and Z
directions)
Shock 0–100 m/s2
Mounting angle Reference plane ±10°

z Transport and storage conditions

Item Description
Ambient temperature −20 to +70 °C
Ambient humidity 10–85 % RH (without condensation or freezing,
protected from humidity and dust)
Vibration 0–10 m/s2 (10–60 Hz for 2 h each in the X, Y, and
Z directions)
Shock 0–300 m/s2 (vertically 3 times)
Drop test Drop height 60 cm (free fall on 1 corner, 3 edges,
6 sides)

14-5
Chapter 14. Specifications

z Other specifications
Item Description
Protection class IP66 (device front side)
(only when individually mounted in a panel using
the included gasket)
Nonvolatile memory EEPROM (durability: 100,000 erase/write cycles)
Power consumption 8 VA or less (6 VA at 100 V AC, 8 VA at 264 V AC)
Allowable transient power loss 20 ms max.
Elevation 2000 m max.
Mass Approx. 130 g (for panel mounting: including the
supplied mounting bracket, model No. 84515488-
001)
Terminal screw tightening torque 0.6 ±0.1 N·m
Legal control/authentication Law/ Certificate/ Notes
directive file No., etc.
CE LVD EN 61010-1
CE EMC* EN 61326-1
(For use in
industrial
locations)
CE RoHS EN IEC63000
UKCA LVD EN 61010-1
UKCA EMC* EN 61326-1
(For use in
industrial
locations)
UKCA RoHS EN IEC63000
KC Korean R-R-
Radio Act A2B-A146
Overvoltage category II (IEC 60364-4-443, IEC 60664-1)
Allowable pollution degree 2
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min.
(Power terminals, and between power terminals
and isolated I/O terminals)
(with a 500 V DC insulation resistance tester)
Dielectric strength 1500 V AC for 1 minute
Power-on inrush current 18 A max. / 1.5 ms max.
Case material/color Modified PPE/black
Protective sheet material/color Polyester film/black
* During EMC testing, the indication or output may fluctuate by the equivalent of
±10 % FS.

14-6
Appendix
„ ROM version history
This section describes added functions and changes to specifications for each ROM
version.

z ROM version 1.01 (available from January 2023)

z New function

(1) Added the password function.

Password (p. 5-104)

(2) Added the event remaining time display function.

Event remaining time display setup (p. 5-97)

z Functional improvement

(1) Even if PLC link communication is enabled by the SLP, if the setting for
[Communication type] is anything other than “3” (PLC link), PLC link
communication will not work.
Common settings (p. 9-19)

(2) Changed the conditions for displaying the [Control action (direct/reverse)]
setting.
Setup bank (p. 6-19)

(3) Changed the display transition using keys when [Bit 1: SP] of [PV/SP display
setup] is set to “0” (No).
PV/SP display setup (p. 5-95)

z Program modification

(1) If a timeout, C1M error, or PLC error occurs during cyclic or triggered
data transfer from the PLC to the C1M in PLC link communication, C1M
parameters will not be updated.
Transfer settings (p. 9-20)

(2) Improved the latch operation when output assignments A–D are set to “14”
(MV ON/OFF status 1) or “15” (MV ON/OFF status 2).
Latch (p. 5-74)

z ROM version 1.00 (available from January 2022)

z New function

(1) New release

z Functional improvement

(None)

z Program modification

(None)

App.-1
Appendix

„ Description of used symbols, terms, and abbreviations

Abbreviations are used in the descriptions, tables, and illustrations of this manual. The main abbreviations are
explained below.

Information such as detailed meanings as well as other abbreviations and words can be found on the website of Azbil
Corporation.

https://www.compoclub.com/products/knowledge/word/index.html

z Symbol
% FS (% of full scale)

Full scale error

The full scale is the input range of a controller or recorder. The control or
display accuracy of a device that has a specified measurement range setting for
temperature, flow rate, etc., is expressed with this term. The range of error is
obtained by multiplying the range specified for the device by this percentage.

zA
AT (auto-tuning)

A function to automatically calculate the optimum value of the PID control

parameters (P, I, D).

zC
CJ (cold junction)

Cold junction compensation

A reference junction compensation in which the temperature of the reference

junction is set to 0 °C.

CPL (Controller Peripheral Link)

CPL communication, CPL communication protocol

A type of communication, or a communication protocol, that can be used with

Azbil’s controllers, etc. Used to connect to a device and read and write its internal
data.

CT (current transformer)

Used to detect the current applied to a heater. Heater burnout, relay short circuit,
etc., can be monitored.

zD
D (derivative)

D action (derivative action)

A control action that gives a controlled variable proportional to the speed at which
the process value deviates from the set point. It makes a large correction while the
deviation is small. It is not used alone but works in combination with P or PI action.

App.-2
 Appendix

DI (digital input)

External contact input

Used to switch remote/local, multiple SPs, auto/manual, etc., of controllers, etc.

DO (digital output)

External output

An ON/OFF signal is output to external devices from control output terminals,

relay terminals, and event output terminals.

zE
EV (event)

Event output

A function of a controller or recorder that determines process (PV) abnormalities,

etc., independently from the main control. A function to output abnormalities as
alarms is also expressed as EV. Used with PV high/low limit alarm, deviation high/low
limit alarm, etc. It is also possible to output the mode of a device (ready, manual, etc).

zI
I (integral)

I action (integral action)

A control action in which the amount of change in correction is proportional to

the integrated value of the deviation. When an offset occurs, integral action works
to eliminate the offset by changing the manipulated variable. I action is not used
alone, but always with proportional action.

zL
LSP (local set point)

Local SP

The SP stored in the device. For the C1M, LSP has the same meaning as SP.

zM
Motor feedback (MFB)

Motor opening

The opening signal sent from the motor controlled by a controller. The C1M does
not have an MFB function.

MV (manipulated variable)

A signal sent to an actuator. It is also called “control output.”

App.-3
Appendix

zO
OH (output high limit)

MV high limit

The highest MV allowed. It can be set for normal control output, control output for
cooling, control output during AT, etc.

OL (output low limit)

MV low limit

The lowest MV allowed. It can be set for normal control output, control output for
cooling, control output during AT, etc.

zP
P (proportional)

P action (proportional action)

Proportional control A control method in which the amount of correction is

proportional to the amount of deviation. The range of the controlled variable to be
corrected is called the proportional band. When only P action is used for control,
an offset occurs in which the controlled variable becomes stable at a value equal to
or less than the set point.

PID (proportional, integral, and derivative)

PID control

A control method that uses proportional, integral, and derivative actions.

PLC (programmable logic controller)

Programmable controller

A sequencer.

PV (process value)

Present value

Present value, measured value, detected value

zR
RJ (reference junction)

Reference junction compensation

A thermocouple has two junctions for the purpose of temperature measurement,

one at the object being measured and the other connected to the measuring
instrument. The junction connected to the measuring instrument is called the
reference junction.

App.-4
 Appendix

RSP (remote set point)

Remote SP

An SP sent from an external device. The C1M does not have an RSP function.

RTD (resistance temperature detector)

An RTD consists of a resistance element composed of unshielded wires made from

a material such as platinum, internal lead wires, a protective tube, terminals, etc.
It measures temperature by utilizing the fact that the electrical resistance of the
resistance element changes with temperature. The operating temperature range is
−200 to + 500 °C for platinum resistance temperature detectors.

zS
SCR (silicon controlled rectifier)

A thyristor (power regulator).

It is composed of semiconductor element transistors and is used for heater control

in combination with a controller that continuously outputs a current signal for
proportional control.

SLP (Smart Loader Package)

Application software that runs on a computer and facilitates configuration and

monitoring of Azbil controllers.
SP (set point)

The target value

A set point specified by controllers, etc. It is also called the SV (set value).

SSR (solid-state relay)

Used for heater control in combination with a controller that outputs voltage pulses.

ST (self-tuning)

A function that automatically sets PID values when the set point is changed or a
disturbance occurs. Unlike auto-tuning, the controller determines when to activate
this function.

zT
T/C (thermocouple)

Used for temperature measurement. For the purpose of generating

thermoelectromotive force, one end of two kinds of metal wires is electrically
connected. The combinations of metals in commonly used thermocouples include
platinum–platinum rhodium (R thermocouple), alumel-chromel (K thermocouple),
iron-constantan (J thermocouple), and copper-constantan (T thermocouple).

App.-5
Appendix

zU
U (unit)

The smallest unit of an industrial quantity (°C, Pa, L/min, etc.) of a PV range. For a
range of −200 to +200 °C, 1 U = 1 °C. For 0.0 to 200.0 °C, 1 U = 0.1 °C.

For DC voltage input with a scaling of 0.00 to 10.00, 1 U = 0.01. 0.1 U is one tenth
of 1 U.

UF (user function)

User-defined function

A function for displaying settings and monitoring data specified by the user in the
operation display of a controller. Up to 8 items can be specified.

App.-6
Index
Number Current transformer input  2-1, 5-89
3-wire system  4-6 Current transformer input calibration  12-4
5-wire system  4-7 Cyclic data transfer  9-3

A D
Accessories  1-3 Data format  7-1
Alarm codes  D-8, 11-2 Data link layer  7-3
Alarm OR  5-64 DC current  5-5
Application examples  5-76 DC voltage  5-5
Application layer  7-3, 7-6 Delay time unit  5-64
AT error  5-12 Derivative time  5-21
AT startup  5-28 Device ID code  7-4
AT stop/start  5-12 Digital input (DI)  5-47
AUTO/MANUAL mode  5-11 Digital output (DO)  5-68
Automatic tuning  5-24 Direct/reverse  5-63
Automatic tuning stop/start  5-12 Display on the console  5-93

C E
Calibration  12-1 Event display setup  5-97
CE marking  1-1 Event output  2-1
Checksum  7-5 Event remaining time display setup  5-97
Cold junction compensation  5-6 External dimensions  3-3
Command External resistance  4-10
RD command  7-9
RS command  7-7 F
RU command  7-11
Fixed-length continuous data read command  7-9
WD command  7-10
Fixed-length continuous data write command  7-10
WS command  7-8
Fixed-length random data read command  7-11
WU command  7-12
Fixed-length random data write command  7-12
Communication function  7-1
Flowchart of displays  D-2
Communication lock  5-103
Function result polarity  5-53, 5-74
Communication minimum response time  7-1
Communication procedure  7-2
Communication type  7-1 G
Completion notification data  9-11 Gasket  3-4
Console  1-4
Constant-current SSR  4-8
H
Continuous data read command  7-7, 7-9
Continuous data write command  7-8, 7-10 Heating/cooling control  5-16, 5-22
Continuous output  5-85 Heating/cooling control dead zone  5-22
Control action  5-16 Holding SP of step  5-46
Control method  5-16 Host device  7-1
Control output  2-1 How to set data  2-6
Control output type  1-1 Hysteresis  5-65
CPL  7-1
CR filter  4-11 I
Crimp terminal lugs  4-5
IEC Directive  1-1
CT input  5-89
Initial output of PID control  5-19
CT input calibration  12-4
Initial output type (mode) of PID control  5-18
CT input current display setup  5-98
Input assignment  5-52
CT measurement wait time  5-90
Input assignment polarity  5-53
CT operation type  5-90
Input bit functions  5-51
CT output  5-90
Input type  1-1
Current output calibration  12-5
Inspection  12-1

Index-1
Installation location  3-1, 11-1 Modbus/ASCII  8-3
Integral time  5-21 MODBUS communications  8-1
Integral time and derivative time decimal point Modbus/RTU  8-5
position  5-19 Mode display setup  5-94
Internal contact  5-48 Model selection table  1-2
Internal contact operation type  5-46 Mode transition  2-9
Internal event  5-50 Mounting bracket  3-4
Internal event operation type  5-62 Mounting method  3-4
Internal Events  5-55 MV1/MV2 processing  5-69
Alarm  5-61 MV display setup  5-96
AT in execution  5-61 MV scaling width  5-88
Control action  5-61
Deviation high and low limits  5-56
N
Deviation high limit  5-56
Deviation low limit  5-56 Noise suppression measures  4-11
During SP ramp  5-61 Number of connectable units  4-8
Heater burnout  5-57 Number of CT turns  5-91
Heater short circuit  5-57 Number of LSP groups  5-33
Loop diagnosis  5-58 Number of steps  5-38
MANUAL  5-61 Numerical representation  7-14
MV high and low limits  5-57
MV high limit  5-57 O
MV low limit  5-57 OFF delay time  5-66
PV high and low limits  5-56 ON delay time  5-66
PV high limit  5-56 One data record write command (06H)  8-13
PV low limit  5-56 ON/OFF control  5-14, 5-20
READY  5-61 Operation mode  2-9
SP high and low limits  5-57 Operation when a PV input error occurs  11-4, 11-5
SP high limit  5-57 Optional parts  1-3
SP low limit  5-57 Output assignment  5-72
Timer  5-61 Output assignment polarity  5-73
I/O inspection  12-3 Output at READY  5-17
Output operation at changing AUTO/MANUAL
K  5-17
Key lock  5-103 Output operation at PV alarm  5-17
Key operation mode  5-93 Output range  5-85
Key operations  D-2 Output scaling  5-87
Output type  5-86

L
P
Latch  5-74
Line filter  4-11 Password  5-104
Loader lock  5-103 PID control  5-15, 5-21
Local SP  5-32 PLC
Loop-back  5-43 Common settings  9-19
LSP  5-33 Data settings  9-20
LSP group No.  5-34 Transfer settings  9-14, 9-20
Common settings  9-12
Transfer settings  9-14
M PLC link communication function  9-1
Main setting  5-65 PLC link settings  9-19
Maintenance  11-1 PLC protocol  9-1
Manipulated variable (MV)  5-21 Preset MANUAL value  5-17
Manual reset  5-21 Proportional band  5-21
Master station  7-1 PV bias  5-8
Message structure  7-3, 8-3 PV decimal point position  5-7

Index-2
PV filter  5-9 SSR  4-8
PV high limit alarm  5-10 Standard key operation mode  2-2
PV hold  5-9 Standby  5-63
PV input  2-1 Station address  7-1, 7-4
PV input calibration  12-3 Status indicator  5-98
PV input range table  5-2 STEP loop  5-43
PV input range type  5-2 Step operation  5-38
PV limiting  5-10 STEP PV start  5-42
PV low limit alarm  5-10 STEP time unit  5-41
PV low limit alarm threshold  5-9 Sub-address  7-4
PV range high limit  5-8 Sub-setting  5-65
PV range low limit  5-8
PV ratio  5-8
T
PV/SP display setup  5-95
PV start  5-42 Terminals  1-5
Terminal wiring label  4-2
Termination code  7-15
R Thermocouple  5-2
RAMP  5-38 Time proportional cycle  5-69
Ra-PID  5-26 Time proportional cycle mode  5-69
Ra-PID control  5-15 Time proportional minimum ON/OFF time  5-69
RD command  7-9 Transmission speed  7-1
Read command (03H)  8-9 Transmission start time  7-17
READY mode operation  5-63 Trigger device  9-4
Reference junction compensation  5-6 Triggered data transfer  9-3
Releasing all DO latches  5-13
Releasing digital output latches  5-13
U
Releasing DO latches  5-13
Remote SP  5-32 Usable devices  9-6
Resistance SSR  4-8, 4-10 User-defined bit 1  5-13
Response monitoring time  7-17 User-defined function  5-99, 5-100
Response start conditions  7-3 User level  2-8, 5-98
RS-485 driver control timing specifications  7-17 Using the [MODE] key  2-7
RS command  7-7
RTD  D-8 V
RU command  7-11 Voltage between terminals  4-8, 4-9
RUN/READY mode  5-11

W
S
Waterproof mounting  3-4
Sample program  7-18 WD command  7-10
Sensor type  5-2, 5-3, 5-4 Wiring  4-4
Simple setup  2-1 Word addresses  7-13
SOAK  5-38 Write command (10H)  8-11
SP  5-32 Write conditions  7-13
SP down ramp  5-36 Write data range  7-13
Special key operation mode  2-2, 2-4 WS command  7-8
Special OFF  5-64 WU command  7-12
SP high limit  5-37
SP lag  5-27
SP low limit  5-37
SP ramp  5-36
SP ramp unit  5-40
SP up ramp  5-36
Square root extraction  5-6
Square root extraction dropout  5-6

Index-3
Revision History of CP-SP-1448E

Date Rev. (New) Page No. Description

June 2022 1
Nov. 2023 2 v Added CAUTION
vi Changed descripions
D-6 Changed Item and Contents
3-3 Changed Handling Precautions
4-2, 4-3 Changed Symbols used in the terminal wiring label and Wiring precautions
5-30 Changed Handling Precautions
5-49 Changed words
5-75 Added descriptions
5-91 Changed Number of CT turns / number of CT power wire passes
5-92 Changed Handling Precautions
5-97 Added Handling Precautions
5-104 Added Handling Precautions
6-24 Changed Item
7-18 Changed Communication program example
9-1 Added descriptions and changed Supported PLC protocol
9-6, 9-7, 9-8 Deleted Connectible PLCs and changed Usable devices
9-12-9-18 Changed PLC Link Setup
9-19 Added Handling Precautions
10-1 Added Decimal point information
10-4 Changed Item
10-10 Changed *2 and *3
11-5 Added If an error occurs in communication with model SLP-C1F
12-2 Changed descriptions
12-4 Changed Handling Precautions
14-1-14-6 Changed Specifications
App-1-App-6 Added ROM version and changed styles
 Terms and Conditions
We would like to express our appreciation for your purchase and use of Azbil Corporation’s products.
You are required to acknowledge and agree upon the following terms and conditions for your purchase of Azbil Corporation’s products (system
products, field instruments, control valves, and control products), unless otherwise stated in any separate document, including, without limitation,
estimation sheets, written agreements, catalogs, specifications and instruction manuals.
1. Warranty period and warranty scope
1.1 Warranty period
Azbil Corporation’s products shall be warranted for one (1) year from the date of your purchase of the said products or the delivery of the
said products to a place designated by you.
1.2 Warranty scope
In the event that Azbil Corporation’s product has any failure attributable to azbil during the aforementioned warranty period, Azbil
Corporation shall, without charge, deliver a replacement for the said product to the place where you purchased, or repair the said
product and deliver it to the aforementioned place. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any failure falling under one of the following shall
not be covered under this warranty:
(1) Failure caused by your improper use of azbil product (noncompliance with conditions, environment of use, precautions, etc. set
forth in catalogs, specifications, instruction manuals, etc.);
(2) Failure caused for other reasons than Azbil Corporation’s product;
(3) Failure caused by any modification or repair made by any person other than Azbil Corporation or Azbil Corporation’s
subcontractors;
(4) Failure caused by your use of Azbil Corporation’s product in a manner not conforming to the intended usage of that product;
(5) Failure that the state-of-the-art at the time of Azbil Corporation’s shipment did not allow Azbil Corporation to predict; or
(6) Failure that arose from any reason not attributable to Azbil Corporation, including, without limitation, acts of God, disasters, and
actions taken by a third party.
Please note that the term “warranty” as used herein refers to equipment-only-warranty, and Azbil Corporation shall not be liable for any
damages, including direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of Azbil Corporation’s
products.
2. Ascertainment of suitability
You are required to ascertain the suitability of Azbil Corporation’s product in case of your use of the same with your machinery,
equipment, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “Equipment”) on your own responsibility, taking the following matters into consideration:
(1) Regulations and standards or laws that your Equipment is to comply with.
(2) Examples of application described in any documents provided by Azbil Corporation are for your reference purpose only, and
you are required to check the functions and safety of your Equipment prior to your use.
(3) Measures to be taken to secure the required level of the reliability and safety of your Equipment in your use
Although azbil is constantly making efforts to improve the quality and reliability of Azbil Corporation’s products, there exists
a possibility that parts and machinery may break down. You are required to provide your Equipment with safety design such
as fool-proof design,*1 and fail-safe design*2 (anti-flame propagation design, etc.), whereby preventing any occurrence of
physical injuries, fires, significant damage, and so forth. Furthermore, fault avoidance,*3 fault tolerance,*4 or the like should be
incorporated so that the said Equipment can satisfy the level of reliability and safety required for your use.
*1. A design that is safe even if the user makes an error.
*2. A design that is safe even if the device fails.
*3. Avoidance of device failure by using highly reliable components, etc.
*4. The use of redundancy.
3. Precautions and restrictions on application
3.1 Restrictions on application
Please follow the table below for use in nuclear power or radiation-related equipment.

Nuclear power quality*5 required Nuclear power quality*5 not required

Within a radiation Cannot be used (except for limit switches for Cannot be used (except for limit switches for
controlled area*6 nuclear power*7) nuclear power*7)
Outside a radiation Cannot be used (except for limit switches for Can be used
controlled area*6 nuclear power*7)

*5. Nuclear power quality: compliance with JEAG 4121 required

*6. R adiation controlled area: an area governed by the requirements of article 3 of “Rules on the Prevention of Harm from
Ionizing Radiation,” article 2 2 4 of “Regulations on Installation and Operation of Nuclear Reactors for Practical Power
Generation,” article 4 of “Determining the Quantity, etc., of Radiation-Emitting Isotopes,”etc.
*7. L imit switch for nuclear power: a limit switch designed, manufactured and sold according to IEEE 382 and JEAG 4121.
Any Azbil Corporation’s products shall not be used for/with medical equipment.
The products are for industrial use. Do not allow general consumers to install or use any Azbil Corporation’s product. However, azbil
products can be incorporated into products used by general consumers. If you intend to use a product for that purpose, please contact
one of our sales representatives.
3.2 Precautions on application
you are required to conduct a consultation with our sales representative and understand detail specifications, cautions for operation,
and so forth by reference to catalogs, specifications, instruction manual, etc. in case that you intend to use azbil product for any purposes
specified in (1) through (6) below. Moreover, you are required to provide your Equipment with fool-proof design, fail-safe design, anti-
flame propagation design, fault avoidance, fault tolerance, and other kinds of protection/safety circuit design on your own responsibility
to ensure reliability and safety, whereby preventing problems caused by failure or nonconformity.
 (1) For use under such conditions or in such environments as not stated in technical documents, including catalogs, specification,
and instruction manuals
(2) For use of specific purposes, such as:
* Nuclear energy/radiation related facilities
[When used outside a radiation controlled area and where nuclear power quality is not required]
[When the limit switch for nuclear power is used]
* Machinery or equipment for space/sea bottom
* Transportation equipment
[Railway, aircraft, vessels, vehicle equipment, etc.]
* Antidisaster/crime-prevention equipment
* Burning appliances
* Electrothermal equipment
* Amusement facilities
* Facilities/applications associated directly with billing
(3) Supply systems such as electricity/gas/water supply systems, large-scale communication systems, and traffic/air traffic control
systems requiring high reliability
(4) Facilities that are to comply with regulations of governmental/public agencies or specific industries
(5) Machinery or equipment that may affect human lives, human bodies or properties
(6) Other machinery or equipment equivalent to those set forth in items (1) to (5) above which require high reliability and safety
4. Precautions against long-term use
Use of Azbil Corporation’s products, including switches, which contain electronic components, over a prolonged period may degrade
insulation or increase contact-resistance and may result in heat generation or any other similar problem causing such product or switch
to develop safety hazards such as smoking, ignition, and electrification. Although acceleration of the above situation varies depending
on the conditions or environment of use of the products, you are required not to use any Azbil Corporation’s products for a period
exceeding ten (10) years unless otherwise stated in specifications or instruction manuals.
5. Recommendation for renewal
Mechanical components, such as relays and switches, used for Azbil Corporation’s products will reach the end of their life due to wear by
repetitious open/close operations.
In addition, electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors will reach the end of their life due to aged deterioration based on
the conditions or environment in which such electronic components are used. Although acceleration of the above situation varies
depending on the conditions or environment of use, the number of open/close operations of relays, etc. as prescribed in specifications
or instruction manuals, or depending on the design margin of your machine or equipment, you are required to renew any Azbil
Corporation’s products every 5 to 10 years unless otherwise specified in specifications or instruction manuals. System products, field
instruments (sensors such as pressure/flow/level sensors, regulating valves, etc.) will reach the end of their life due to aged deterioration
of parts. For those parts that will reach the end of their life due to aged deterioration, recommended replacement cycles are prescribed.
You are required to replace parts based on such recommended replacement cycles.
6. Other precautions
Prior to your use of Azbil Corporation’s products, you are required to understand and comply with specifications (e.g., conditions and
environment of use), precautions, warnings/cautions/notices as set forth in the technical documents prepared for individual Azbil
Corporation’s products, such as catalogs, specifications, and instruction manuals to ensure the quality, reliability, and safety of those
products.
7. Changes to specifications
Please note that the descriptions contained in any documents provided by azbil are subject to change without notice for improvement
or for any other reason. For inquires or information on specifications as you may need to check, please contact our branch offices or
sales offices, or your local sales agents.
8. Discontinuance of the supply of products/parts
Please note that the production of any Azbil Corporation’s product may be discontinued without notice. After manufacturing is
discontinued, we may not be able to provide replacement products even within the warranty period.
For repairable products, we will, in principle, undertake repairs for five (5) years after the discontinuance of those products. In
some cases, however, we cannot undertake such repairs for reasons, such as the absence of repair parts. For system products, field
instruments, we may not be able to undertake parts replacement for similar reasons.
9. Scope of services
Prices of Azbil Corporation’s products do not include any charges for services such as engineer dispatch service. Accordingly, a separate
fee will be charged in any of the following cases:
(1) Installation, adjustment, guidance, and attendance at a test run
(2) Maintenance, inspection, adjustment, and repair
(3) Technical guidance and technical education
(4) Special test or special inspection of a product under the conditions specified by you
Please note that we cannot provide any services as set forth above in a nuclear energy controlled area (radiation controlled area) or at a
place where the level of exposure to radiation is equivalent to that in a nuclear energy controlled area.

AAS-511A-014-10
 Specifications are subject to change without notice. (11)

1-12-2 Kawana, Fujisawa

Kanagawa 251-8522 Japan
URL: https://www.azbil.com
1st edition: June 2022 (S)
2nd edition: Nov. 2023